JP6982317B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In conventional gaming machines, there are known gaming machines having a warning display in the gaming area that calls attention to a player or a person involved in a hall (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-226261

However, in a conventional gaming machine, since the warning display is performed in a conspicuous place, there is a possibility that it does not match the motif or decorative member of the gaming machine, which may spoil the aesthetic appearance.

An object of the present invention is to avoid deterioration of aesthetics due to a warning display placed on a gaming machine.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the gaming machine has a viewing area that makes the gaming area visible, and a tank for storing the gaming ball is located rearward. , a switching unit mounted openably provided on an upper portion of the opening portion, projecting upward, and decoration device upper surface having an inclined surface inclined rearwardly toward the tank, a predetermined reminder display The alert display means is provided, and the alert display means is arranged inside a wall portion that surrounds a part of the alert display means on the upper surface of the opening / closing portion, and the wall portion is the wall portion. It is characterized in that it is located behind the decorative device and below the virtual extension surface of the inclined surface, and the decorative device makes it difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to avoid deterioration of the aesthetic appearance due to the warning display arranged on the gaming machine.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from the diagonally upper right. It is a front view which looked at the gaming machine from the front. It is a left side view of a gaming machine as seen from the left. It is an exploded perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a perspective view (a) seen from the diagonally upper right side of the lower plate unit and the perspective view (b) seen from diagonally above the left side. It is a top view (a) of the lower plate unit, the sectional view (b) in the line AA, and the enlarged sectional view (c) (d). It is an exploded perspective view of the glass frame excluding the decorative device (top unit). Front view (a) of the glass frame excluding the decorative device (top unit), sectional view (b) along the AA line, front view (c), and back view (d) of the glass frame excluding the speaker decorative member. Is. It is an enlarged sectional view (a) of a sound output part, and the figure (b) which shows how the sound output from an upper speaker is transmitted. It is a perspective view of the gaming machine seen from the right diagonal view. It is a side view (a) of a speaker decoration member attached to a gaming machine, and is a perspective view (b) seen from the diagonally upper left of the speaker decoration member. It is a front view (a) of the speaker decoration member, and the perspective view (b) seen from the right oblique side of the speaker decoration member. It is a partially enlarged front view of the front frame. It is a front view (a) and a perspective view (b) of a ball launcher, and a perspective view (c) of a cutting blade. It is a front view (a) and an exploded perspective view (b) of a foul ball catch unit. It is a back view (a) and the perspective view (b) of the back side of a foul ball catch unit. It is a cross-sectional view (a) in a horizontal direction (line AA) of a foul ball catch unit, and a cross-sectional view (b) in a horizontal direction of a part member. It is a perspective view of a foul ball catch unit seen from diagonally above. It is a partially enlarged front view of the front frame with the foul ball catch unit removed. It is a perspective view (a) of the upper plate unit in the state where the effect button unit is removed from the upper plate unit main body, and the top view (b) of the upper plate unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper plate unit (the upper plate unit main body). It is an exploded perspective view of the effect button unit (effect button). It is a front view (a) and a perspective view (b) of an effect button unit (effect button). It is a plan view (a) which looked at the effect button unit (effect button) from above, and is the perspective view (b) which shows by removing the effect button unit and the button installation part on the right side in the operation panel. The front view (a) of the precision plate unit, the cross-sectional view (b) of the front view (a) seen from the side along the line AA, and the enlarged view of the main part of the cross-sectional view (b). (C). A cross-sectional view (a) of the top view of the precision plate unit (similar to FIG. 18 (b)) when the cross section taken along the line AA is viewed from the back side, and a front view of a state in which a part of the members constituting the precision plate unit is removed. (B). A cross-sectional view (a) of the top view of the precision plate unit (similar to FIG. 18 (b)) seen from the front along the line AA, and an enlarged view of the main part (b) obtained by enlarging the main part of the cross-sectional view (a). ). An enlarged view of the right main part (a) showing an enlarged view of the right side of a cross section obtained by cutting the effect button unit and its peripheral portion along the radial direction, an enlarged view of the left main part (b) showing an enlarged view of the left side, and a button. It is a top view (c) and (d) which show the main part of the base. It is a front view explaining the discharge port. It is the back view (a) and the sectional top view (b) of the outer unit (or the front frame). It is an exploded perspective view of the outer unit (or the front frame). It is an exploded perspective view of a sphere flow path unit. It is a back view (a) and a perspective front view (b) of a spherical flow path unit base. It is a right side view (a) of a glass frame and a partially enlarged view (b), and the perspective view (c) and a partially enlarged view (d) seen from the lower side of the glass frame. It is an exploded perspective view (a) which separated the protrusion effect unit (decorative device) from a glass frame, and is the exploded perspective view (b) of the protrusion effect unit. It is a front view of the protrusion effect unit. It is a front view (normal gaming state) of the gaming board of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view (state suggesting a specific mode) of the gaming board of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view (specific game state) of the game board of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the lighting mode of the accessory lamp, FIG. 38 (a) shows a lighting mode in which the lighting portion circulates at the time of fluctuation, and FIG. 38 (b) shows a lighting mode in which two lighting states are alternately repeated at the time of fluctuation. FIG. 38 (c) shows a lighting mode in which the lighting portion changes so as to draw a figure 8 when the fluctuation occurs. 39 (a) is a schematic view of a general winning opening unit and a batch display device, FIG. 39 (b) is a detailed view of the batch display device, and FIG. 39 (c) is a sticker for decorating the general winning opening unit. A schematic diagram is shown, and FIG. 39 (d) shows a schematic diagram of the position information and related information displayed on the sticker. It is a figure explaining the operation of the accessory unit and the falling accessory unit, the display mode in the display device, etc., FIG. 40 (a-1) is an example in the case of a normal gaming state, and FIG. 40 (a-2) is. FIG. 40 (b-1) shows an example in which the falling accessory unit operates in the state of FIG. 40 (a-1), and FIG. 40 (b-1) shows an example in the case of suggesting a specific mode. 2) shows an example in which the falling accessory unit operates in the state of FIG. 40 (b-1), and FIG. 40 (c-1) shows an example in the case of a specific gaming state, FIG. 40 (c-2). ) Shows an example in which the falling accessory unit operates in the state of FIG. 40 (c-1). It is an exploded perspective view of a movable accessory. It is a detailed exploded perspective view of a movable accessory. It is an exploded view of the urging member unit which constitutes the movable accessory main body. It is a perspective view which shows the operation of the lower movable part which guides the movement of a movable accessory body, FIG. 44 (a) is the case where the urging member is in the initial state, and FIG. The cases of are shown respectively. It is a front view (initial position) of a movable accessory body. It is a back view of FIG. 45. It is a front view (intermediate position) of the movable accessory body. It is a back view of FIG. 47. It is a front view (maximum position) of a movable accessory body. It is a back view of FIG. 49. It is a rear view of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the sub-board box accommodating the effect control device. It is a front view of the box upper member to which a cover member is attached. FIG. 53 is a partial detailed view (enlarged view of a portion surrounded by a rectangular broken line in FIG. 53), FIG. 54 (a) is a view when there is no cover member, and FIG. 54 (b) is a view with a cover member attached. It is a figure of the case. FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 53, which is a view when a cover member is attached, and a partial detailed view thereof. FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 53, which is a view when a cover member is attached, and a partial detailed view thereof. It is a perspective view of a cover member. It is a back view which shows the mounting surface of a cover member. It is a front view of a cover member. It is a left side view of a cover member. 58 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIGS. 58 and 59. It is a figure showing the cut area of the 1st cut part of a cover member, FIG. 63 (a) is a front view, and FIG. 63 (b) is a back view. It is a figure showing the cut area of the 2nd cut part (and the 1st cut part) of a cover member, FIG. 64A is a front view, and FIG. 64B is a back view. It is a figure which shows the attachment process of a cover member, FIG. 65 (a) shows the process of attaching a fastening screw, and FIG. 65 (b) shows the state before attaching a cover member. It is a figure which shows the attachment process of a cover member, FIG. 66C shows the state in which a cover member is attached to a box upper member, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the process of removing a cover member, FIG. 67 (a) shows the process of cutting a cut portion, and FIG. 67 (b) shows the process of removing a fastening screw. It is a figure which shows the removal process of a cover member, FIG. 68 (c) shows the state in which a cover member is being removed from a box upper member, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st modification of a cover member. It is the second modification of the cover member, FIG. 70A is a front view, and FIG. 70B is a back view. It is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board and the like of the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of a large winning opening unit. It is a perspective view which shows the operation of the big entry fly part drive mechanism of a large winning opening unit, FIG. 73A (a) shows an initial state, and FIG. 73A (b) shows a winning state to a V switch or a residual ball switch, respectively. .. FIG. 73B (a) is a plan view of the movable portion drive mechanism of the large winning opening unit, and FIG. 73B (a) shows a remaining ball switch winning state (initial state), and FIG. 73B (b) shows a V switch winning state. It is a front view of the large winning opening unit and is the figure which shows the V switch winning prohibition state. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 74. It is a front view of the large winning opening unit and is the figure which shows the V switch winning possible state. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 76. It is a front view (specific game state) of the game board of the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production control system of the gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the transition state at the time of power-on of the gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main process of a game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main process of a game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port switch common processing. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 game processing (the first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing (the latter half). Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fall lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a table exemplifying the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the fall probability. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing (first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing (the latter half). It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows the received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the design system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process. It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from the diagonally upper right. It is an exploded perspective view of a gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the glass frame excluding the decorative device (top unit). Front view (a) of the glass frame excluding the decorative device (top unit), sectional view (b) along the AA line, front view (c), and back view (d) of the glass frame excluding the speaker decorative member. Is. It is a plan view (view from directly above) of the gaming machine, FIG. 116A shows a state before the front frame and the glass frame are rotated forward of the gaming machine, and FIG. 116B shows the front frame. And the state after the glass frame is rotated to the front of the gaming machine. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the caution display part. It is sectional drawing (the part surrounded by the ellipse of the broken line in FIG. 117) which shows the arrangement relationship of a wall part and a decorative device (top unit). It is a back view which shows the arrangement relation of a wall part and a hinge. It is a cross-sectional view which shows the deformation example of a wall part (the part surrounded by the ellipse of a broken line in FIG. 117), and FIG. , The case where the upper surface of the wall portion is lower than the same plane including the upper surface of the decorative device, and FIG. 121 (b) shows the case where the upper surface of the wall portion and the upper surface of the decorative device have the same inclination angle and the wall portion. In FIG. 121 (c), the inclination angle of the upper surface of the wall portion is higher than the inclination angle of the upper surface of the decoration device, and the upper surface of the wall portion is decorated. It is lower than the coplanar including the upper surface of the device, and further shows the case where the coplanar including the upper surface of the wall touches the rear end of the decorative device. It is a cross-sectional view which shows the deformation example of the wall part (the part surrounded by the ellipse of the broken line in FIG. 117), and FIG. 122 (b) shows a case where the upper surfaces of the front wall and the side wall form the same plane as the upper surface of the front frame in the arrangement shown in FIG. 122 (a). It is a back view which shows the deformation example of a wall part. It is a top view (view from directly above) which shows the deformation example of a wall part. It is a figure which shows the example of the sheet attached to a decorative device.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the description of the gaming machine, the front, back, left, and right refer to the direction seen from the player during the game.

[Overall view of the gaming machine]
1, FIG. 2, and FIG. 3 are diagrams illustrating a gaming machine. 1, FIG. 2, and FIG. 3 are a perspective view, a front view, and a left side view of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame that is rotatably attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via hinges 16a and 16b. The opening and closing frame is the front frame 12 (main body frame) and the glass frame 15.
It is composed of (front frame unit). The frame 11 and the front frame 12 form an outer frame unit 17.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 35) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 is
It functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 35) formed on the game board 30 visible. The cover glass 14 is shown as an example of the transparent member, and a plastic cover may be used instead of the cover glass 14. The glass frame 15 functions as a transparent member holding frame for holding the transparent member.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by rotating and opening only the glass frame 15 via the hinges 12a and 12b (FIG. 4), the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Further, by rotating and opening the front frame 12 via the hinges 16a and 16b while the glass frame 15 is not opened, the game control device 100 (main substrate) arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30 is opened. ) (See FIG. 79) and the like. The glass frame 15 and / or the front frame 12 is locked and unlocked by the key portion 446.

In the front frame base unit 480 (FIG. 7) of the glass frame 15 (front frame unit), a front frame inner member 482 having an overall concave shape when viewed from the front is arranged in front of the edge of the cover glass 14. There is. The front frame inner member 482 has a bottom plate 482a extending in the left-right direction and a bottom plate 482.
Two vertical plates 482b and 482c on the right side and the left side extending in the vertical direction from both ends of a are provided. The vertical plates 482b and 482c face the front (player side) on the lower side, but are twisted at the center, and face the center side of the game machine 10 on the upper side (also in FIG. 33 (a)). reference).

The front frame inner member 482 has black as a color having low lightness and saturation. For this reason, there is a part of black in the field of view when the player pays attention to the display device 41 (described later) and the various winning openings (described later) of the game board 30 through the cover glass 14 (transparent member). , The feeling of oppression on the player is reduced. If the front frame inner member 482 is a color having high saturation and lightness such as red, it is assumed.
It gives the player a terrible impression because it stands out. Further, there are light emitting devices such as decorative devices 18b and 18c and the effect button 25 around the outside of the front frame inner member 482, but these light emitting devices are clearly different from the black front frame inner member 482 in terms of appearance. Since it is partitioned, its light emission will be conspicuous. The material itself of the front frame inner member 482 may be black, or the front surface thereof may be painted black.

Further, various frame constituent members are arranged on the edge portion around the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15.

Decorative devices 18a, 18b, 18c capable of producing light emission according to the gaming state are arranged in the upper center, the right side portion, and the left side portion of the glass frame 15. The decorative devices 18a, 18b, 18c are
It is a production device that houses lighting members such as LEDs inside and produces light emission effects according to the game state. The lighting members arranged inside the decorative devices 18a, 18b, and 18c form a part of the frame decorative device 18 (see FIG. 80).

The decorative device 18a is a top unit that extends in the left-right direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects forward in the upper part of the glass frame 15. Although the decorative device 18a is fixed and does not operate in the present embodiment, it may project forward or vertically only when necessary from the initial retracted position (normal position) so as to reduce the feeling of oppression to the player. It may move.

The decorative device 18b is a projecting effect unit (front frame light emitting unit) that extends in the vertical direction on the right side of the glass frame 15 and projects forward. The decorative device 18c is a projecting effect unit (front frame light emitting unit) that extends in the vertical direction and projects forward on the left side of the glass frame 15. The decorative devices 18b and 18c irradiate the center side (inside) of the gaming machine 10 with light toward the player, and the side covers 795 have a plurality of openings 795a.
Light leaks to the outside of the gaming machine 10 through the inner lens 794 (inner cover).
The detailed configurations of the decorative devices 18b and 18c will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

Upper speakers 19a and 19b are arranged in the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Apart from the upper speakers 19a and 19b, two lower speakers 19c and 19d are provided at the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speakers 19c and 19d have a glass frame 15
It is arranged in the lower left corner portion of the above and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. On these speakers 19a,
The 19b and the lower speakers 19c and 19d emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like. The upper speakers 19a and 19b are covered with the speaker decoration member 470a on the right side and the speaker decoration member 470b on the left side, respectively. The detailed functions and configurations of the speaker decoration members 470a and 470b are shown in FIGS. 7 to 11. Will be described later based on.

At the bottom of the glass frame 15, an upper plate unit 20 having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached. The upper plate 21 is formed in the shape of a box opened at the upper part. The upper plate 21 also has a black color as a color having low lightness and saturation, like the front frame inner member 482. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to the ball launcher 530 (described later) one by one. The detailed configuration of the precision plate unit 20 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 to 27.

The upper plate unit 20 includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from a player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from a player, and a decoration device 2 that performs a light emission effect according to a game state.
2 and are further prepared.

The effect operation device is an operation device including an effect button 25, volume adjustment buttons 690d and 690e, and a cross key 690f, and is provided in the upper center of the upper plate unit 20 and on the left side thereof so that the player can easily operate the effect device. ing. The effect button 25 is arranged in the opening of the operation panel 690 so as to be surrounded by the operation panel 690. The operation panel 690 can reflect light by metal plating on the surface or by making the whole metal, and has a metallic luster of silver (silver), for example. When the effect button 25 emits light, the light from the effect button 25 is reflected by the surrounding operation panel 690, and the light emission effect of the effect button 25 becomes effective.

As will be described later, in the effect button 25, the button lens 754 on the uppermost surface is transparent, and the character "PUSH" of the button lens decoration 756 arranged under the button lens 754 can be visually recognized (FIG. 18). Further, the effect button 25 has a vibration function such that it is vibrated by a motor 771 as a driving means (FIG. 18). The effect button 25 may operate so as to pop out upward, in which case the front frame base unit 48 is viewed from the front.
It overlaps a part with the black front frame inner member 482 (bottom plate 482a) of 0, and the player notices that there is a change in the part that looks black, and the change (operation) of the effect button 25 is not overlooked. If the effect button 25 has a color (for example, silver) different from that of the front frame inner member 482 (bottom plate 482a) or emits light when popping out, the change (operation) of the effect button 25 will not be overlooked.

The volume adjusting buttons 690d and 690e are provided on the upper left side of the operation panel 690 of the precision plate unit 20 and adjust the volume of the speaker by increasing / decreasing (+-). The cross key 690f is provided adjacent to the volume adjusting buttons 690d and 690e on the upper left side of the operation panel 690 of the precision plate unit 20, and adjusts the brightness of the LED, for example.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated when the player rents a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the operation panel 690 of the upper plate unit 20. The ball lending operation device includes a balance display unit 690a, a ball lending button 690b, and a return button 690c. The balance display unit 690a is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like. Ball rental button 690
b is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and return button 690c is a button operated by the player when a prepaid card or the like is ejected from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the game machine 10. It is a button to operate.

The decoration device 22 houses a lighting member such as an LED inside, and is a device that performs light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided in the upper plate unit 20. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 80).

Below the glass frame 15 provided with the upper plate unit 20 and the like described above, below the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launcher 530 and a lower plate capable of storing game balls A lower plate unit 29 including 23 and the like is provided. The lower plate unit 29 and the upper plate unit 20 are morphologically compatible and are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. By operating the upper plate operation unit 735 of the upper plate unit 20, the game ball of the upper plate 21 can be made to flow down to the lower plate 23. The detailed configuration of the lower plate unit 29 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6.

The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19c on the right side. The ball launcher 5 is operated by the player by rotating the operation handle 24.
30 fires the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The rate of fire of the game ball launched from the ball launcher 530 is set so as to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device 530 can change the firing force, which is the force (speed) for launching the game ball into the game area 32, in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and various launch modes having different launching forces. You can fire a game ball with. The launch mode includes a left-handed hit (normal hit) in which the game ball is made to flow down on the left side of the game area 32, and a right-handed hit in which the game ball is made to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 of the lower plate unit 29 is arranged below the upper plate unit 20 at a predetermined interval from the upper plate unit 20. The lower plate 23 has an opening 455a (described later) that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 467 for opening / closing the opening 455a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation unit 467 to open the opening 455a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the opening 455a.

Further, on the back side of the front frame 12, there are a power supply device 400 that supplies electric power to various devices, an upper tank 448 that stores game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) installed in the island facility, and an upper tank 448. A payout unit 780 or the like that pays out the flowing game balls to the upper plate 21 is arranged (FIG. 3).

As shown in FIG. 3, in the present embodiment, the decorative device 18a (top unit) protrudes slightly forward from the upper plate unit 20 and the decorative devices 18b, 18c (protruding effect unit) and the lower plate unit so as to stand out. It protrudes forward much larger than 29 (see one-dot chain line).
.. That is, the amount of protrusion of the decorative device 18a to the front is slightly larger than that of the upper plate unit 20 and the like, and considerably larger than that of the decorative devices 18b and 18c and the lower plate unit 29. Here, the protrusion amount is the distance from the rear portion of the glass frame 15 (for example, the cover glass 14) to the cutting edge 432a (apex) in the front-rear direction. However, not limited to FIG. 3, the amount of protrusion of the decorative device 18a to the front can be appropriately changed. For example, the amount of protrusion of the decorative device 18a is smaller than that of the upper plate unit 20 (decorative device 18b) so that the player's head does not collide with the decorative device 18a (top unit).
, 18c), the cutting edge 432a (vertex) of the decoration device 18a may be placed behind the cutting edge 20a (vertex) of the precision plate unit 20.

FIG. 4 is an exploded view of the gaming machine. A part of the game board 30 is omitted for easy viewing.

The decorative device 18a (top unit) includes a main body portion 432, a transparent cover 434 located in front of the main body portion 432, a decorative portion 436 protruding from the front portion of the main body portion 432 to the left and right, and a decorative portion 436.
The left and right light emitting portions 440 (light emitting means) located behind the main body portion 432, and mounting portions 438 and 442 located behind the main body portion 432 are provided. The decorative device 18a has a divergent shape that spreads up, down, left, and right toward the front in order to make the player look large and wide. The decorative device 18a is attached to the front frame base unit 480 by an attachment portion 442 connected to the receiving portion 444 of the front frame base unit 480.

A sheet on which the model name of the gaming machine 10 is displayed is sandwiched between the front surface 432b of the main body 432 and the transparent cover 434. By replacing only the sheet, the decoration device 18a can be used with different models without replacing the entire decoration device 18a, and the cost can be reduced.

At the lower part of the front frame 12, a ball launching device 530 for launching a game ball and a foul ball catching unit 560 (foul ball catching member) for capturing a foul ball (described later) are arranged. Details of the ball launcher 530 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. The foul ball catch unit 560 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 and 14 to 17.

A plurality of game board locking members 12c for locking the locked portion 30d (see FIG. 35) of the game board 30 are provided at the left end portion of the front frame 12. The game board 30 is attached to the front frame 4 via the locked portion 30d and the game board locking member 12c. Further, a receiving portion 451 connected to the engaging portion 452 of the lower plate unit 29 is provided at the right end portion of the front frame 12.

On the lower left side of the front frame 12, a prize ball payout outlet 443 for passing the prize ball paid out from the payout unit 780 to the prize ball entrance 484 of the upper plate 21 is provided.

[Lower plate unit]
The detailed configuration of the lower plate unit 29 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 shows a perspective view (a) of the lower plate unit 29 viewed from diagonally above right and a perspective view (b) viewed from diagonally above left. FIG. 6 shows a top view (a), a cross-sectional view (b), and an enlarged cross-sectional view (c) (d) of the lower plate unit 29.

The lower plate unit 29 includes a lower plate base 453 on the back side, a left side case portion 456, a central case portion 458, and a right side case portion 460 connected to the lower plate base 453 from the front.
Further, the lower plate unit 29 includes a lower case portion 459 that is below the left side case portion 456 and is connected to the lower plate base 453 from the front.

Further, the lower plate unit 29 is provided with a call button 454 for calling a staff member of the game hall (game store) in front of the left side case portion 456. The ON signal of the call button 454 is input to the game control device 100 (FIG. 79), sent as external information from the external information terminal 71 to the data lamp, and the data lamp, which is a display device for game information and the like, emits light.

In front of the central case portion 458, the right decorative portion 466 that decorates the right front side of the lower plate unit 29.
a is provided. In front of the lower plate 23, a left decorative portion 4 that decorates the left front side of the lower plate unit 29.
66a is provided.

The central case portion 458 has a vertical portion 458a extending substantially in the vertical direction and a horizontal portion 458b extending in the substantially horizontal direction. The lower speaker 19c and the shaft portion 24a of the operation handle 24 are arranged between the vertical portion 458a of the central case portion 458 and the right side case portion 460.

The lower plate unit 29 is roughly divided into a flat portion 29a extending in the left-right direction and a flat portion 29.
It consists of a right-side protruding portion 29b that protrudes upward on the right side of a. The flat portion 29a includes a lower plate 23, a left case portion 456, and a lateral portion 458b of the central case portion 458. Above the flat portion 29a, the bottom plate portion 701 (described later) of the precision plate unit 20 is arranged facing each other. Right side protrusion 2
Reference numeral 9b is a vertical portion 458a of the central case portion 458, a right case portion 460, and a lower speaker 19c.
, And the operation handle 24. So that the glass frame 15 can be closed with respect to the front frame 12.
The right protruding portion 29b is the right end portion of the precision plate unit 20 and the front frame base unit 480 (FIG. 7).
) Has a shape that fits from behind in the lower right corner.

A passage 462 (groove) for a game ball is formed between the left case portion 456 and the central case portion 458. At the upper end of the passage 462, a cover 46, which is a transparent member that covers the passage 462 from above.
4 is provided. Since the cover 464 is transparent, the inside of the passage 462 can be visually recognized when the glass frame 15 is opened with respect to the front frame 12.

On the back surface of the lower plate base 453 of the lower plate unit 29, a first entrance 461 and a second entrance 465 of the game ball are provided. At the first entrance 461, a foul ball (falling ball) that was launched from the ball launcher 530 but returned without reaching the game area 32 flows in from the foul ball catch unit 560, and the upper plate 21 is inserted. Payout unit 7 when the tank is full
A game ball (prize ball) from 80 may flow in. The game ball pulled out from the upper plate 21 by the operation of the upper plate operation unit 735 may flow into the second entrance 465. The game ball flows from the first entrance 461 and the second entrance 465 through the passage 462 and from the exit 463 of the passage 462 into the lower plate 23. When the lower plate 23 is full, the game balls are stored in the passage 462. Passage 46
2 is partly left side case portion 456 in order to communicate with the first entrance 461 and the second entrance 465.
And may pass through the inside or the bottom of the central case portion 458.

Since the foul ball passes through the passage 462 from the first entrance 461, the foul ball to which one end of the thread is attached as a part of fraud (goto act) (the other end of the thread is attached to the game ball in the game area 32). When the transparent cover 464 of the passage 462 is used, the transparent cover 464 of the passage 462 is rubbed with a thread and is damaged and becomes white and becomes non-transparent, so that fraud can be easily detected. Further, the transparent cover 464 can be replaced even if it is damaged by fraud, and it is not necessary to replace the entire lower plate unit 29.

A dish portion 455 constituting the bottom portion and the front portion of the lower dish 23 is arranged in front of the left side case portion 456 and above the lower case portion 459. As shown in FIG. 6B, the dish portion 455 has an L-shaped cross section in the vertical direction and the front-back direction. The left case portion 456 has an integrally formed upper plate 456a and a front plate 456b, and the front plate 456b constitutes the back plate of the lower plate 23. As shown in FIG. 6 (b), the front plate 456b (back plate of the lower plate 23) of the left side case portion 456 has an inclination so as to be located on the back side toward the lower side, so that the player can diagonally move upward. Lower plate 2 from the front
It becomes easy to scrape out the game ball of 3 by hand.

At the bottom of the lower dish 23 (that is, the bottom of the dish portion 455), an annular opening 455a and an opening 4 are provided.
A valley portion 455b extending radially from 55a in four directions is provided. The game ball that has flowed into the lower plate 23 from the exit 463 of the passage 462 falls into the opening 455a through the valley portion 455b that is easy to pass through. The opening 455a is normally closed by the opening / closing member 457, but the opening / closing operation unit 46
The opening / closing member 457 is opened by the operation of 7. When the opening / closing member 457 opens, the game ball opens the opening 4
It passes through 55a and is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 10 from the annular discharge port 459a projecting from the lower case portion 459.

As shown in FIG. 6 (c), the depth D1 of the recess (recess) of the lower plate 23 is shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp the game ball by hand. The depth D1 is the lower end of the opening 455a (the depth D1 is defined as the lower end (
It corresponds to the height from the closed upper surface of the opening / closing member 457 to the lower end of the exit 463 of the passage 462. Further, the depth D2 of the annular discharge port 459a is longer than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the opening 455a tends to fall directly below.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6D, the depth D3 of the discharge portion (discharge hole) including the discharge port 459a and the opening 455a is longer than the diameter of the game ball, but larger than twice the diameter of the game ball. short. Therefore, when the lower half side of the game ball is pinched by the opening / closing member 457 (door) of the discharging portion (when it is pinched and returned to the lower side), it is easy to return to the lower side, and the upper half side of the game ball is the opening / closing member 457 of the discharging portion. If it is caught in the box (when it is caught and ejected to the outside of the game machine), the game ball is guided straight to the box (collection box for automatic counting or so-called dollar box), so that it does not spill from the box. The depth D3 is the discharge port 45.
It corresponds to the height from the lower end of 9a to the upper end of the opening 455a.

[Sound output section]
The configuration of the sound output unit 473 for outputting sound will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9. The sound output unit 473 has upper speakers 19a and 19b and upper speakers 19a and 19 as sound generating means.
Speaker decoration members 470a and 470b are provided as peripheral members of b. FIG. 7 is an exploded view of the glass frame 15 excluding the decorative device 18a (top unit). FIG. 8 shows the decorative device 1.
Front view (a), sectional view (b), and speaker decorative member 47 of the glass frame 15 excluding 8a.
It is a front view (c) and a back view (d) excluding 0a and 470b. FIG. 9 is an enlarged cross-sectional view (a) of the sound output unit and a diagram (b) showing how the sound output from the upper speakers 19a and 19b is transmitted.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the front frame base unit 480 of the glass frame 15 (front frame unit) is
The upper speakers 19a and 19b are provided. The upper speakers 19a and 19b are tilted so that sound is output toward the lower side and the inner side (center side) of the gaming machine 10. Front frame base unit 48
The precision plate unit 20 and the speaker decorative members 470a and 470b are attached to 0. The speaker decorative member 470a on the right side is attached to the front frame base unit 480 so as to cover the upper speaker 19a on the right side. The speaker decorative member 470b on the left side is the upper speaker 1 on the left side.
It is attached to the front frame base unit 480 so as to cover 9b.

The speaker decorative members 470a and 470b prevent the sound from the upper speakers 19a and 19b from being directly transmitted to the player. The sounds emitted from the front parts of the upper speakers 19a and 19b are reflected on the back surfaces of the speaker decorative members 470a and 470b, respectively, hit the cover glass 14, and are reflected again there and transmitted to the player (solid line in FIG. 9B). ). The lower speakers 19c and 19
The sound from d is directly transmitted to the player. The speaker decorative members 470a and 470b form the first sound reflecting means, and the cover glass 14 constitutes the second sound reflecting means.

The upper speaker 19a (or the upper speaker 19b) includes a speaker main body 490 and a speaker main body 4.
The first speaker accommodating member 491a behind the 90 and the first speaker body 490 located around the speaker body 490.
It is a speaker unit including a second speaker storage member 491b connected to the speaker storage member 491a, and a speaker outer frame member 491c arranged around the second speaker storage member 491b.

The first speaker accommodating member 491a and the second speaker accommodating member 491b are combined.
Except for the front part of the speaker main body 490, the speaker main body 490 is surrounded and stored. A space 492 (gap) is formed between the rear portion of the speaker main body 490 and the first speaker accommodating member 491a. A box-shaped space 493 (gap) is formed between the lower portion of the first speaker accommodating member 491a constituting the back surface of the upper speakers 19a and 19b (speaker unit) and the cover glass 14. The length L1 in the front-rear direction of the space 493, that is, the distance between the lower portion of the first speaker accommodating member 491a and the cover glass 14, is that the sound emitted from the rear portions (rear surface of the speaker unit) of the upper speakers 19a and 19b is played by the cover glass 14. To be able to reflect toward a person (Fig. 9 (b))
Dotted line), set to an appropriate value.

As shown by the solid line and the dotted line in FIG. 9B, the sounds emitted from the front and rear parts of the upper speakers 19a and 19b are reflected by the cover glass 14 and directed toward the player, so that various effects are produced. for example,
In the case of high-pitched sound, if the player directly hits the sound, the ear hurts, but it can be alleviated by passing through the cover glass 14 (wall). Further, it is preferable because the sound (particularly the bass) hits the cover glass 14 and the sound seems to be emitted from the entire cover glass 14. In addition, the sound is less likely to leak to the outside, making it easier for the player to hear the sound.

As shown in FIG. 8D, the front frame base unit 480 has the upper speaker 1 on the back surface thereof.
The back side cover member 488a on the right side and the back side cover member 488b on the left side are provided at positions corresponding to the rear (back side) of each of 9a and 19b. The back cover members 488a and 488b have a box-like shape. The back cover member 488a on the right side can attenuate the sound (vibration) transmitted from the upper speaker 19a to the rear (back side) via the front frame base unit 480 by confining it in the internal space. Similarly, the back cover member 488b on the left side is the upper speaker 1.
The sound (vibration) transmitted from 9b to the rear (back side) via the front frame base unit 480 can be confined in the internal space and attenuated. Therefore, the back cover members 488a and 488b
Is effective in preventing noise and can protect various electronic circuit boards around the upper speakers 19a and 19b from vibration.

Further, the back side cover members 488a and 488b can keep the electric wiring away from the cover glass 14 by arranging the electric wiring on the outside (the side opposite to the cover glass 14).
The cover glass 14 (including the frame 14a) is attached to the mounting portion 480a of the front frame base unit 480.
Make it easy to remove from. Further, in at least one of the back side cover members 488a and 488b, the portion along the cover glass 14 conforms to the member of the game board 30 (for example, the guide rail 31) in shape, and the glass frame 15 is attached to the front frame 12. Acts as a guide when closing. Further, the back side cover members 488a and 488b may be increased in thickness in the front-rear direction to function as spacers to prevent the game board 30 from coming into contact with the cover glass 14. in this case,
The game board 30 may have a portion that abuts on the back side cover members 488a and 488b.

The front frame base unit 480 will be further described below. The front frame base unit 480 includes the frame 14a of the cover glass 14, the above-mentioned front frame inner member 482 arranged in front of the frame 14a, and the above-mentioned front frame inner member 482. To prepare for. Further, the front frame base unit 480 has a prize ball entrance 484 for flowing the prize ball paid out from the payout unit 780 into the upper plate 21, and a launch ball supply path 486 for supplying the game ball from the upper plate 21 to the ball launcher 530. And prepare. Further, the front frame base unit 480 has a front frame base unit 480 so that the glass frame 15 is closed with respect to the front frame 12.
A curved bay entrance end portion 480c that conforms to the shape of the right protruding portion 29b of the lower plate unit 29 is provided on the lower right side.

At the prize ball entrance 484 (FIG. 7), the prize ball passage 487 (on the back side of the front frame base unit 480) (
FIG. 8 (d)) communicates. The prize ball passage 487 is the prize ball payout exit 443 of the front frame 12 (FIG. 4).
Connect with. Therefore, the prize ball from the payout unit 780 is the prize ball payout exit 443 (FIG. 4).
It flows into the upper plate 21 through the prize ball passage 487 (FIG. 8 (d)) and the prize ball entrance 484 (FIG. 7).

In the normal case where the upper plate operation unit 735 is not operated, the opening / closing member 734 (FIGS. 18 and 19) is in the closed state, and the game ball is supplied from the upper plate 21 to the launch ball supply path 486. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 734 is opened by the operation of the upper plate operation unit 735, the game ball flows to the downward passage 485 instead of the launch ball supply path 486, and the second entrance 465 communicating with the passage 485. To reach. As a result, the game ball is pulled out from the upper plate 21 to the lower plate 23.

Further, the front frame base unit 480 has a ball stop unit 489 as shown in FIG. 8D. The ball stop unit 489 is for stopping the game ball from flowing backward from the front frame base unit 480 from the launch ball supply path 486 when the glass frame 15 is released from the front frame 12. In the ball stop unit 489, a substantially L-shaped ball stop member 483 capable of opening and closing the launch ball supply path 486 is rotatably attached to the front frame base unit 480. The ball stop unit 489 may be the same as the conventional one (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-232200).

The ball stop member 483 is urged by an urging member (not shown) such as a coil spring so that the launch ball supply path 486 is closed. Then, when the glass frame 15 is closed with respect to the front frame 12, the ball stop member 483 engages with the ball stop member conversion unit 536 (see FIGS. 4 and 13) projecting from the front surface of the ball launcher 530. By doing so, the launch ball supply path 486 is opened. The front end surface of the ball-stopping member conversion unit 536 is inclined so as to be a trapezoidal cam surface on which the ball-stopping member 483 in contact is slid.

[Speaker decoration member]
With reference to FIGS. 10, 11A, and 11B, the speaker decorative members 470a and 470b.
The configuration of is described. Although only the speaker decoration member 470a is shown in FIGS. 10, 11A and 11B, the speaker decoration member 470a and the speaker decoration member 47 are shown.
0b has the same configuration if the left and right are exchanged.

FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 10 as viewed from an oblique right side. FIG. 11A shows a side view (a) of the speaker decorative member 470a in a state of being attached to the gaming machine 10, and the speaker decorative member 47.
It is a perspective view (b) which saw 0a from the diagonally upper left. 11B is a front view (a) of the speaker decorative member 470a and a perspective view (b) of the speaker decorative member 470a viewed from an oblique right side.

The speaker decorative member 470a (470b) has an outer mounting portion 514a and 514b screwed to the side portion of the front frame base unit 480, and an inner mounting portion screwed to the front frame base unit 480 on the inner mounting plate 512. It has 516. Further, the speaker decoration member 470a (470b) includes an opening 518 through which the mounting portion 438 of the decoration device 18a (top unit) penetrates.

The speaker decorative member 470a (470b) has a diffusing unit 50 as a light diffusing means for diffusing light.
2 is provided, and an upper reflection unit 504 and a lower reflection unit 506 are provided as light reflecting means for reflecting light. The diffusion portion 502 is arranged adjacent to the inner mounting plate 512 arranged inside (center side) of the gaming machine 10. The upper reflection portion 504 is arranged in contact with the diffusion portion 502 on the lower right side of the diffusion portion 502. The upper reflection unit 504 and the diffusion unit 502 may be in substantially the same plane. The lower reflection portion 506 is arranged below the upper reflection portion 504. The diffusion unit 502, the upper reflection unit 504, and the lower reflection unit 506 are
The surface (particularly the front surface) is metal-plated or has a metal surface (surface plate).

The diffusion unit 502 is arranged behind the light emitting unit 440 of the decoration device 18a in a state where the speaker decoration member 470a (470b) and the decoration device 18a (top unit) are attached to the gaming machine 10 (front frame base unit 480). To. The diffuser portion 502 may be arranged in contact with the back surface (rear portion) of the transparent case of the light emitting portion 440. Further, the diffusing portion 502 is provided on a frosted glass-like surface portion in which irregularities of various sizes are randomly arranged, and diffusely reflects and diffuses the light radiated rearward from the light emitting portion 440. As a result, even if the LED is arranged like a point light source inside the light emitting unit 440, the light emitting unit 440 can be illuminated as a whole. The light diffusely reflected by the diffusing portion 502 heads forward or toward the upper reflecting portion 504 and the lower reflecting portion 506. The light emitting portion 440 of the decorative device 18a emits light to appeal to the player viewed from the side surface side of the gaming machine 10 (in the direction of the entrance of the gaming island).

The upper reflection unit 504 and the lower reflection unit 506 can reflect the light from the light emitting unit 440 and have a blade-like shape as a whole. The upper reflecting portion 504 has a front surface 504a and a side surface 504b. The lower reflective portion 506 has a front surface 506a and a side surface 506b. Upper reflector 504 and lower reflector 50
6 may increase in thickness toward the outside of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG. 11B (a), the front surface 504a of the upper reflecting portion 504 has a washboard shape, and a plurality of ridges 50 projecting forward.
4c are arranged side by side. Similarly, the front surface 506a of the lower reflection portion 506 also has a washboard shape, and a plurality of ridges 506c projecting forward are arranged side by side. Individual ridge 50
4c and 506c extend substantially in the vertical direction.

The overall inclination (angle) of the front surfaces 504a and 506a with respect to the vertical direction or the horizontal direction can be appropriately adjusted. For example, as shown in the side view of FIG. 11A (a), the front surface 5 of the upper reflecting portion 504.
The 04a is arranged so as to face forward substantially parallel to the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, while the front surface 506a of the lower reflection portion 506 may be greatly tilted from the vertical direction. The lower reflection unit 506 is a light emitting unit 440.
Since the distance from the upper reflecting portion 504 is farther than that of the upper reflecting portion 504, the direction of the reflected light from the front surface 506a can be prevented from being too downward, and the light is reflected by both the lower reflecting portion 506 and the upper reflecting portion 504. The light from the light emitting unit 440 can be concentrated at a predetermined position (for example, the head of the player). Further, the front surface 440a of the case of the diffusion unit 502 and the light emitting unit 440 is the upper reflection unit 5.
Since the direction is aligned with the front surface 504a of 04 and faces forward, the diffuser portion 502 and the light emitting portion 440
And the light emission effect of the upper reflection unit 504 is coordinated, and the interest is improved.

As shown in FIG. 11B (a), the cross sections (perpendicular in the longitudinal direction) of the plurality of ridges 504c and 506c are like saw teeth. The individual ridges 504c and 506c have a triangular (or L-shaped) cross section protruding forward, and the reflecting surface 5 to which the light from the light emitting portion 440 of the decorative device 18a hits.
It has 22 and a non-reflective surface 524 (a shadowed portion) to which the light from the light emitting unit 440 does not hit. Due to the presence of the reflective surface 522 and the non-reflective surface 524, only the reflective surface 522 shines on the front surfaces 504a and 506a, and the front surface looks like a striped pattern.

Further, by adjusting the width of the reflecting surface 522, the amount of light reflected from the front surface 504a of the upper reflecting unit 504 or the front surface 506a of the lower reflecting unit 506 can be adjusted. For example, the lower reflector 50
Since the distance from the light emitting portion 440 of 6 is farther than that of the upper reflecting portion 504, the ridge 506c has a width larger than that of the ridge 504c so that the amount of reflected light is aligned between the upper reflecting portion 504 and the lower reflecting portion 506. It may have a reflective surface 522.

Further, the reflective surface 522 is inclined downward toward the center side (inside) of the gaming machine 10, but the reflective surface 52
The front surface 50 of the upper reflecting portion 504 can also be adjusted by adjusting the inclination (angle) of 2 from the left-right direction.
The amount of light reflected from 4a or the front surface 506a of the lower reflecting portion 506 can be adjusted. For example, since the lower reflecting portion 506 is farther from the light emitting portion 440 than the upper reflecting portion 504, the reflecting surface 522 of the ridge 506c has the reflecting surface 522 so that the amount of reflected light is aligned between the upper reflecting portion 504 and the lower reflecting portion 506. The inclination (angle) from the left-right direction may be smaller than that of the reflective surface 522 of the ridge 504c. note that,
When the inclination of the reflective surface 522 of the ridge 506c is reduced (that is, the height to the front is lowered),
Since the area of the non-reflective surface 524 (the shadowed portion) is reduced, the amount of reflected light of the front surface 506a is increased.

Further, to explain with reference to FIGS. 10, 11A, and 11B, the speaker decorative member 470a (470b) has a first decorative portion 508 facing the upper reflective portion 504 behind the outer side of the upper reflective portion 504. A second decorative portion 509 arranged between the upper reflective portion 504 and the lower reflective portion 506,
The third decorative portion 510 facing the lower reflective portion 506 on the lateral rear side of the lower reflective portion 506, and the fourth decorative portion 511 facing the third decorative portion 510 on the lower side of the third decorative portion 510 (omitted in FIG. 11B). )When,
To prepare for. Further, on the speaker decoration member 470a (470b), two thin blade-shaped lower decoration portions 520a and 520b are arranged in a step on the lower side of the lower reflection portion 506. The light from the light emitting unit 440 of the decoration device 18a is blocked by the lower reflection unit 506 and the upper reflection unit 504, and hardly reaches the decoration units 508 to 511, 520a, 520b, and the upper reflection unit 50.
The reflected light from the front surface 504a of 4 or the front surface 506a of the lower reflecting portion 506 becomes conspicuous.

The first decorative portion 508 and the third decorative portion 510 have a metallic luster due to metal plating on the surface or a metallic surface portion (surface plate), but the second decorative portion 509 and the fourth decorative portion 511.
Is made of a resin having black color (a color having low lightness and saturation), does not reflect light, and has no metallic luster.
Therefore, the metallic luster of the first decorative portion 508 and the third decorative portion 510 becomes conspicuous, and the decorativeness is improved.

[Ball launcher]
The details of the ball launching device 530 (launching unit, ball launching means) will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. 12 is a partially enlarged front view of the front frame 12 having the ball launcher 530. FIG. 13 is a front view (a) and a perspective view (b) of the ball launcher 530, and a perspective view (c) of the cutting blade 550.

The game ball ejected by the launching pestle 532 of the ball launching device 530 is usually a foul ball catch unit 560 (foul ball catching unit 560) from a launching rail 533 formed so as to incline from the lower right to the upper left at the lower part of the front frame 12. It jumps over the ball catching member), flows into the launch ball guide passage 33 of the game board 30, and is guided to the game area 32 (see FIG. 35) through the launch ball guide passage 33.

As shown by the solid line arrow and the dotted line arrow pointing to the lower right in FIG. 12, the game ball (launch ball) having a small rate of fire (rate of fire) returns from the launch ball guide passage 33 without reaching the game area 32. It comes and becomes a foul ball (falling ball) and flows into the foul ball catch unit 560. In particular, the foul ball (falling ball) collides with the protrusion 585, which is a ball stopper of the foul ball catch unit 560, and flows into the foul ball catch unit 560. Further, the game ball (launch ball) having a smaller rate of fire (rate of fire) becomes a foul ball (direct ball) that directly jumps into the foul ball catch unit 560 without reaching the foul ball guide passage 33. As described above, the foul ball catch unit 560 constitutes a catching means for catching a foul ball that has been fired but does not enter the game area 32. The details of the configuration of the foul ball catch unit 560 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), the ball launching device 530 for launching the game ball is the upper plate 21.
A taxiway 542 that communicates with the launch ball supply path 486 that supplies the game ball stored in the ball, and a cutting mechanism 544 that cuts the thread member of the illegal ball when the illegal ball to which the thread member is attached is launched.
To prepare for.

A game ball (illegal ball) to which a thread member such as a fishing line is attached is launched by the ball launcher 530, and when the game ball enters the game area 32 (see FIG. 35), the thread member is operated from the upper plate 21. In some cases, fraudulent acts such as winning a prize in the winning opening may be performed, and the cutting mechanism 544 cuts the thread member of the fraudulent ball. The cutting mechanism 544 constitutes a first fraud countermeasure means (first fraud countermeasure unit).

In the closed state of the glass frame 15, the taxiway 542 on the front frame 12 side and the launch ball supply path 486 on the glass frame 15 side are connected and communicate with each other to become a part of the supply flow path 540. The supply flow path 540 is
The game ball stored in the upper plate 21 is guided to the right side in the left-right direction and then guided to the rear side in the front-rear direction to be supplied to the launch position of the ball launcher 530.

The ball launcher 530 has a base plate 531 installed at the lower right of the front surface of the front frame 12, and a launching pestle 532 rotatably arranged on the front surface of the base plate 531. Also, the base plate 53
A launch rail 533 (launch passage) that slopes up from the right side to the left side is fixed to the front surface of 1.

The launch pestle 532 is configured to rotate based on the rotation operation of the operation handle 24 and repel the game ball at the launch position on the launch rail 533. The game ball ejected by the launch pestle 532 is guided to the left in the left-right direction by the launch rail 533, flows from the launch rail 533 into the launch ball guide passage 33 of the game board 30, passes through the launch ball guide passage 33, and is a game area. Guided to 32.

The rate of fire of the game ball launched from the ball launcher 530 is set so as to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases.

The inlet portion 542a of the taxiway 542 is provided on the cover member 534 attached to the base plate 531 so as to cover the front of the base plate 531 of the ball launcher 530. The inlet portion 542a is formed as an opening that penetrates the cover member 534 in the front-rear direction.

Further, the taxiway 542 is provided with a cutting mechanism 544 for cutting the thread member of the illegal ball.

The cutting mechanism 544 has a thread guiding portion 546 formed in the cover member 534 so as to be connected to the inlet portion 542a of the guide path 542, and a cutting blade attached to the cover member 534 so that the cutting edge portion is located in the thread guiding portion 546. It includes a 550 and a fixing plate 548 for fixing the cutting blade 550 to the cover member 534.

The thread guide portion 546 is an opening that penetrates the cover member 534 in the front-rear direction, and is a guide path 54.
It is cut out so as to be connected to the upper portion of the left side portion of the entrance portion 542a of 2. The thread guide portion 546 and the inlet portion 542a are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The thread guiding portion 546 is configured as a guiding passage that enables the thread member of the illegal ball to move toward the cutting edge portion (predetermined position) of the cutting blade 550 when the illegal ball is launched.

As shown in FIG. 13 (c), the cutting blade 550 has a flat plate-shaped base end portion 553 and a flat plate-shaped first tip portion that is connected to the base end portion 553 and extends in the same plane as the base end portion 553. 551 and base end 5
It is provided with a flat plate-shaped second tip portion 552 that is connected to 53 and is bent rearward from the base end portion 553. The first tip portion 551 and the second tip portion 552 are arranged vertically, and these tip portions 5 are arranged side by side.
The gap portion 554 formed between 51 and 552 (boundary) serves as a cutting portion for cutting the thread member of the illegal ball. The tip surface 551a (right side surface) of the first tip portion 551 and the tip surface 552a (right side surface) of the second tip portion 552 have a gap portion 554 so as to guide the thread member of the illegal ball to the gap portion 554.
It is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward.

The cutting blade 550 is fixed to the cover member 534 via the fixing plate 548 in a state of being accommodated in the accommodating recess 534a formed on the back surface of the cover member 534. The cutting blade 550 is fixed in the accommodating recess 534a by a fixing plate 548 that engages with the cover member 534. The fixing plate 548 is arranged on the rear side of the cutting blade 550 fitted in the accommodating recess 534a.

The accommodating recess 534a has a cover member 534 so that the cutting blade 550 can be fitted into the accommodating recess 534a.
It is formed by denting. The accommodating recess 534a is a recess formed so as to resemble the outer shape of the cutting blade 550, and in a state where the cutting blade 550 is fitted into the accommodating recess 534a, the cutting blade 5
The movement of 50 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is restricted. Further, the cutting blade 550 accommodates the accommodating recess 53.
When installed in 4a, the cutting edge portion such as the gap portion 554 of the cutting blade 550 is located at a recessed position (leftward position) of the thread guiding portion 546.

In this way, the cutting blade 550 has its cutting edge portion turned to the right side and the thread guiding portion 54.
It is arranged so as to be exposed to No. 6 (see FIG. 13 (a)).

In the cutting mechanism 544 configured as described above, when the illegal ball to which the thread member is attached is launched by the ball launching device 530, the thread member of the illegal ball is cut by the cutting blade 550 via the thread guiding portion 546. It is guided by and bites into the gap 554 of the cutting blade 550. The thread member that bites into the gap 554 is pulled and cut by the firing force of the illegal ball. The thread guide portion 546 of the cutting mechanism 544 is connected to the inlet portion 542a of the guideway 542 of the supply flow path 540.
Since it is cut out on the side of 2a and the cutting blade 550 is arranged at a recessed position of the thread guiding portion 546, it is possible to cut the thread member of the illegal ball without hindering the flow of the game ball. Will be.

The supply flow path 540 is configured to guide the game ball stored in the upper plate 21 to the right side and then to the rear side to supply the game ball to the launch position of the ball launcher 530, and the launch rail 533 launches from the launch position. It is configured to guide the played ball to the left. The thread guide portion 546 is formed so as to be connected to the left side portion of the inlet portion 542a of the guideway 542, and the cutting blade 550 is arranged so that the cutting edge portion thereof faces the right side. In this way, the thread guiding portion 546 is provided on the side portion of the inlet portion 542a on the game ball launching direction side, and the cutting edge portion of the cutting blade 550 is provided in the direction opposite to the game ball launching direction. It is possible to cut reliably.

[Foul ball catch unit]
A foul ball catching unit 5 capable of capturing a foul ball with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17.
The details of 60 will be described. The foul ball is a game ball launched by the ball launcher 530 but does not enter the game area 32. 14A is a front view (a) and an exploded view (b) of the foul ball catch unit 560. 14B is a back view (a) and a perspective view (b) of the back side of the foul ball catch unit 560. FIG. 15 shows a foul ball catch unit 56.
It is the horizontal sectional view (a) of 0 and the horizontal sectional view (b) of a part member 560b. The upper view of FIG. 15A is the same as that of FIG. 14B (a). FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the foul ball catch unit 560 viewed from diagonally above. FIG. 17 is a partially enlarged front view of the front frame 12 from which the foul ball catch unit 560 is removed.

The foul ball catch unit 560 is a combination of a base member 560a and a part member 560b connected to the back surface side of the base member 560a from the rear. Base member 5
By being installed on the front frame 12, the 60a is in contact with the installation surface 598 (FIG. 17) of the front frame 12 to form various game ball flow paths 590 (590a-590d). Further, a flow path 591 between base parts is formed between the base member 560a and the parts member 560b. note that,
The foul ball catch unit 560 includes a main body portion 569 having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a drop-out ball recovery section 570 located on the left side of the main body portion 569. Drop-out ball collection unit 57
0 collects the game ball that flows out from the prize ball payout outlet 443 (FIGS. 4 and 12) and falls downward when the glass frame 15 is in the open state.

First, the base member 560a will be described. The base member 560a has a flat plate-shaped front surface portion 561 (front plate) and a flat plate-shaped rolling portion 56 provided vertically at the rear on the upper portion of the front surface portion 561.
4 (rolling plate) and the base side box portion 56 provided at the rear in the lower center of the front portion 561.
5 and. The front surface portion 561 is provided with three window portions 561a for visually recognizing the rear portion. The window portion 561a also functions to prevent the accumulation of static electricity. Base side box part 56
No. 5 has an opening in the front portion 561 at the front. The upper end surface 594 of the base side box portion 565 is an inclined surface on which the game ball can roll to the left.

Further, the base member 560a is located on the right side of the opening of the base side box portion 565 and has a front portion 56.
The base side reinforcing rib 566, which is an annular enclosure provided vertically in the front in the lower right portion of 1, and the part support portion 567 and the right flow path arranged at positions opposite to the base side reinforcing rib 566 with respect to the front surface portion 561. A forming portion 568 is provided. The part support portion 567 and the right flow path forming portion 568 are provided vertically at the rear in the lower right portion of the front surface portion 561.

The part support portion 567 has an "F" -shaped shape rotated 90 degrees when viewed from the rear (FIG. 14B (a)), and the long plate portion 567a and the short plate that support the part member 560b from below. Part 56
Has 7b. Both the long plate portion 567a and the short plate portion 567b have the same width in the front-rear direction and extend from the front portion 561, but the length (height) in the vertical direction is toward the long plate portion 567a. Is longer than the short plate portion 567b. Further, the long plate portion 567a is arranged in parallel with the short plate portion 567b, and is arranged to the right of the short plate portion 567b.

The front surface portion 561 has an upper edge portion 562 extending rearward perpendicularly to the front surface portion 561.
The flat plate-shaped rolling portion 564 is tilted downward to the lower right in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball can roll to the lower right side. The rolling portion 564 extends substantially parallel to the upper edge portion 562, but the width of the upper edge portion 562 in the front-rear direction is shorter than the width of the rolling portion 564 in the front-rear direction (short direction). Therefore, the rolling part 564
A foul ball can flow into.

The base side reinforcing rib 566 is provided on the part support portion 567, the right flow path forming portion 568, and the front portion 5.
In order to face each other across 61, the flow path wall of the right side flow path 590c formed between the part support portion 567 and the right side flow path forming part 568 is reinforced. Further, the base-side reinforcing rib 566 prevents sink marks (defects such as dents caused by molding shrinkage) during molding.

Further, the base member 560a has a left side bottom surface portion 571a located on the left side and a left side bottom surface portion 5.
A stepped bottom surface portion 571 having a right side bottom surface portion 571b located at a lower position on the right side than 71a is provided. The bottom surface portion 571 extends in the vertical direction at the lower end portion of the front surface portion 561. The guide flow path 590a formed on the left bottom surface portion 571a and the guide flow path 590a (left side bottom surface portion 5).
The saucer portion 572 extending in front of the front portion 561 of 71a) constitutes the drop-out ball collecting portion 570. The saucer portion 572 has an L-shaped cross section in the front-rear direction, and the prize ball payout outlet 443 (FIG. 4, FIG.
The game ball spilled from FIG. 12) is received and allowed to flow down to the rear guide flow path 590a. The bottom portion of the saucer portion 572 may be inclined backward so as to allow the game ball to flow down to the guide flow path 590a.

Further, the base member 560a has a central flow path forming portion 589 extending vertically and rearward from the front surface portion 561. The central flow path forming portion 589 forms the central flow path 590b together with the installation surface 598 (FIG. 17) of the front frame 12 and the front surface portion 561. Further, the central flow path forming portion 589 functions as a partition plate for partitioning the guide flow path 590a and the central flow path 590b.

In addition, the base member 560a is provided on the installation surface 598 (FIG. 17) of the front frame 12 2
Two engaging hooks 575 that are pushed into one engaged portion 598a, 598b
It has a, 575b.

Next, the part member 560b will be described. The part member 560b is a base member 56.
It includes a flat plate-shaped part main body portion 576 arranged in parallel with the flat plate-shaped front surface portion 561 of 0a, and a mounting portion 578 arranged above the part main body portion 576 and attached to the front surface portion 561. The part main body portion 576 has an upper end portion 576a that abuts on the step portion 564a at the rear end of the rolling portion 564 (rolling plate). The mounting portion 578 is formed so as to be convexly raised in the front of the part main body portion 576, and is mounted to the columnar screw receiving portion 561b (FIG. 14B (b)) of the front portion 561 by screwing from the rear. The mounting portion 578 has a through hole 578a through which a screw passes.

Further, the part member 560b has a part-side box portion 579 provided in front of the lower part of the part main body portion 576. The upper end surface 580 of the part-side box portion 579 is an inclined surface on which the game ball can roll to the left. The side end surface 581 of the part side box portion 579 is
It faces the side end surface (not shown) of the base side box portion 565 and is in contact with the right side. The side end surface 581 of the part side box portion 579 is inclined on the left side so as to be located rearward toward the left side, but the side end surface of the base side box portion 565 is not inclined. Therefore, a narrow slit-shaped gap 592 exists on the left side between the base side box portion 565 and the parts side box portion 579 (FIG. 15 (a)). The upper end surface 58 of the parts side box portion 579
The width in the front-back direction of 0 is slightly narrower (shorter) toward the tip 580a (left end) of the upper end surface 580.
However, the width of the upper end surface 594 of the base side box portion 565 is constant.

The side end surface 581 of the part side box portion 579 has an opening 581a for screwing the part side box portion 579 to the base side box portion 565, and a square shape protruding to the right at the upper part (
A sharp portion 581b and an elongated protruding engaging portion 584 that engages with the side end surface of the base side box portion 565 are provided. The engaging portion 584 may have a function of positioning the part member 560b. The base of the sharp portion 581b is supported from below by the short plate portion 567b of the part support portion 567, and the tip of the sharp portion 581b abuts on the long plate portion 567a of the part support portion 567 (FIG. 14B (a)).

Further, the part member 560b includes a protrusion 585 provided at the front at the right end of the flat plate-shaped part main body 576, and a reinforcing rib 586 provided under the protrusion 585 to support and reinforce the protrusion 585. Be prepared.

The reinforcing rib 586 is a right plate-shaped member 586 that supports the lower right portion and the lower left portion of the protrusion 585, respectively.
It has a and a left plate-shaped member 586b. The width of the protrusion 585 in the front-rear direction is the reinforcing rib 586 (
It is shorter than the width in the front-rear direction of the two plate-shaped members 586a and 586b). At the upper ends of the two plate-shaped members 586a and 586b, the front side not connected to the protrusion 585 is the base member 56.
It abuts on the upper edge portion 562 of 0a. Both of the two plate-shaped members 586a and 586b have the same width in the front-rear direction and abut on the front surface portion 561 of the base member 560a (FIG. 15A).
.. The right plate-shaped member 586a and the left plate-shaped member 586b are arranged substantially in parallel along the vertical direction, but the length (height) in the vertical direction is lower for the right plate-shaped member 586a and the left plate-shaped member 586b.
Is long. The long plate portion 567a of the part support portion 567 is in contact with the right plate-shaped member 586a on the right side and is arranged in parallel (FIG. 15A), and together with the right plate-shaped member 586a, is located on the right side of the protrusion 585. Support the bottom from below.

The protrusion 585 (ball stopper) is the upper edge 56 of the base member 560a (front surface 561).
It becomes a barrier protruding above 2 (FIGS. 14A (a) and 14B (a)). As described above in FIG. 12, the foul ball (falling ball) returned from the launch ball guide passage 33 on the upper left of the foul ball catch unit 560 collides with the protrusion 585 and advances beyond the protrusion 585 to the right. It is difficult to do so, and it flows into the foul ball catch unit 560. The foul ball returned from the launch ball guide passage 33 is the left plate-shaped member 58 of the reinforcing rib 586 as a barrier.
It may collide with 6b and flow into the foul ball catch unit 560.

Further, the protrusion 585 has a hollow chevron shape as a whole, as if one plate was folded at three points.
It has a substantially "C" shape that does not close at the lower left when viewed from the front), and because it is hollow, it is possible to reduce the generation of collision sound between the foul ball and the protrusion 585, and to appropriately adjust the pitch of the collision sound. Further, the space defined by the two plate-shaped members 586a and 586b of the reinforcing rib 586 and the protrusion 585 is
The collision sound between the foul ball and the protrusion 585 can be trapped and attenuated.

[Flow and flow path of game ball (inside foul ball catch unit)]
Next, the flow and flow path of the game ball (foul ball) in the foul ball catch unit 560 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17 (particularly, FIG. 14B (a)).

The foul ball can flow into the rolling portion 564 and roll. As a foul ball here, a foul ball (falling ball) that has returned from the launch ball guide passage 33, collided with the protrusion 585, and bounced off.
, A foul ball (falling ball) that returned from the launch ball guide passage 33 but did not reach the protrusion 585, or a foul ball (launch ball, direct ball) whose rate of fire was slow and could not exceed the foul ball catch unit 560. ). The game ball that has rolled down the rolling portion 564 is the rolling portion 56.
It flows into the large opening 595a between 4 and the protrusion 585. A foul ball that collides with the protrusion 585 and bounces off, a foul ball with a slow rate of fire (launching ball, direct ball), or the like may directly flow into the large opening 595a.

The game ball (foul ball) that has passed through the large opening 595a flows into the inter-base parts flow path 591 located above the upper end surface 580 of the parts side box portion 579 and the upper end surface 594 of the base side box portion 565. The flow path 591 between base parts is formed by an upper end surface 580, 594, a front surface portion 561 of the base member 560a, and a part main body portion 576 of the part member 560b. The flow path 591 between the base parts is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball can roll to the left.

The width of the upper end surface 594 in the front-rear direction, that is, the amount of protrusion of the base side box portion 565 to the rear is
Since it is longer than the width of the upper edge portion 562 in the front-rear direction, the game ball can fall on the upper end surface 594 of the base side box portion 565. Further, the width of the flow path 591 between the base parts (here, the upper end surface 5).
(Approximately equal to the sum of the widths of 80 and the upper end surface 594 in the front-rear direction) is approximately equal to the width in the front-rear direction (short direction) of the rolling portion 564. The parts side box part 579 and the base side box part 565
It is possible to omit one of them (that is, one of the upper end surface 580 and the upper end surface 594), but in that case, the width of the other of the upper end surface 580 and the upper end surface 594 is set in the front-rear direction (short) of the rolling portion 564. direction)
May be approximately equal to the width of. Further, the total width of the upper end surface 580 and the upper end surface 594 in the front-rear direction is
If the amount is smaller than the diameter of the game ball (the amount that the game ball does not fall), it can be shorter than the width of the rolling portion 564 in the front-rear direction (short direction).

The game ball that has passed through the flow path 591 between the base parts flows into the central flow path 590b on the right side of the central flow path forming portion 589. The central flow path 590b is between the installation surface 598 of the front frame 12 and the front surface portion 561 of the base member 560a, and the base side box portion 565 and the parts side box portion 579.
It is formed by the left end surface of the above and the central flow path forming portion 589. The central flow path 590b extends substantially in the vertical direction.

The game ball that has passed through the central flow path 590b has a bottom flow path 5 formed on the right bottom surface portion 571b.
It flows into 90d. As described above, the game ball that has spilled from the prize ball payout outlet 443 (FIGS. 4 and 12) and entered the saucer portion 572 also passes through the guide flow path 590a formed on the left bottom surface portion 571a. After that, it flows into the bottom flow path 590d located at a position lower than the guide flow path 590a.

The game ball that has passed through the bottom flow path 590d passes through the discharge port 593, flows to the first inlet 461 (FIG. 6A) of the lower plate unit 29, and flows into the lower plate 23 from the first inlet 461.

In addition, a foul ball from the right side (launching ball, direct ball) with a very slow rate of fire, or a foul ball (falling ball) that rarely exceeds the protrusion 585 from the left side, forms a right flow path with the part support portion 567. It can flow into the small opening 595b between the portions 568. The small opening 595b is the large opening 5.
It is smaller than 95a.

The game ball that has passed through the small opening 595b flows into the right side flow path 590c formed between the right side flow path forming portion 568 and the long plate portion 567a of the part support portion 567. The game ball that has passed through the right flow path 590c passes through the discharge port 593 and passes through the first inlet 461 of the lower plate unit 29 (FIG. 6 (a).
)) And flows into the lower plate 23 from the first entrance 461. The small opening 595b and the right side flow path 590c can be omitted and may be configured to be nonexistent.

From the above-mentioned three window portions 561a of the base member 560a, the guide flow path 5 is used, respectively.
90a, the flow path between base parts 591, and the bottom flow path 590d can be visually recognized, and the guide flow path 59 can be visually recognized.
When the game ball is clogged in 0a, the flow path between base parts 591, and the bottom flow path 590d, the window portion 5
It is also possible to insert a thin stick or the like from 61a to clear the clogging of the game ball.

In this embodiment, the rolling portion 564, the parts support portion 567, and the right flow path forming portion 56
8. The widths of the central flow path forming portion 589 and the reinforcing ribs 586 (two plate-shaped members 586a and 586b) in the front-rear direction are substantially the same, but can be appropriately changed as long as they are within the diameter of the game ball. be.

[Countermeasures against fraud]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17 (particularly, FIGS. 15 and 16), fraud countermeasures (goto countermeasures) in the foul ball catch unit 560 will be described.

As described above, in the ball launching device 530 (launching unit), the first fraud countermeasure means (first).
As a fraud countermeasure unit), a cutting mechanism 544 for cutting the thread member of the fraudulent ball is provided, but the foul ball catch unit 560 is provided with second to fourth fraud countermeasure means (fraud countermeasure unit) for fraud countermeasures.

In the foul ball catch unit 560, fraud countermeasures against fraud (goto act) executed by the following procedure are taken. First, a thread member (fishing line, etc.) is attached to two game balls so that they form a pair, and one of the pair of game balls is launched at a slow speed by the ball launcher 530, and the foul ball catch unit 560 is used as a foul ball. Drop it. Subsequently, the other game ball of the pair is fired at a normal speed and put into the game area 32. Then, the thread member attached to the foul ball entered into the lower plate 23 from the foul ball catch unit 560 is operated from the lower plate 23 to illegally win the game ball in the game area 32 in the winning opening. In this fraud, the movement of the hand operating the thread member is difficult to see due to the lower plate 23, and it seems that the movement of the game ball is brought to the upper plate 21.

In many cases, the cutting mechanism 544 (first fraud countermeasure means) can cut the thread member when the thread member is operated after the game ball is put in the game area 32 (in some cases, the thread member cannot be cut at the time of launch). Yes), it may not be possible to cut the thread member attached to the foul ball.

As described above, a cut-shaped (crevice-shaped) gap 592 is provided on the left side between the base-side box portion 565 and the parts-side box portion 579, and this gap 592 is the second.
It becomes a fraud countermeasure measure (second fraud countermeasure department).

The thread member attached to the foul ball that has entered the lower plate 23 through the large opening 595a of the foul ball catch unit 560 is placed on the upper end surface 580 of the part side box portion 579 and the upper end surface 594 of the base side box portion 565. It passes through the located inter-base parts flow path 591 from right to left, and passes through the central flow path 590b on the right side of the central flow path forming portion 589 from top to bottom.
In the above-mentioned fraud, if the thread member attached to the foul ball is pulled by hand from the lower plate 23, the thread member is sandwiched between the cut-shaped gaps 592 and becomes difficult to operate and move.

As described above, in order to provide a cut-shaped gap 592, the part side box portion 57
The side end surface 581 of 9 is inclined so as to be located rearward toward the left side, but the inclination is steep from the right side to the left side. Therefore, the inlet 592a of the gap 592 becomes wider, the thread member can easily enter the gap 592, and the thread member attached to the foul ball can be inserted into the lower plate 2.
When the thread member is gradually pinched by the cut-shaped gap 592 and finally becomes immobile on the narrow right side of the gap 592 when the thread member is operated many times by pulling and separating from 3 by hand, further operations can be performed. It disappears.

By providing a large number of irregularities in the vertical direction on the upper end surface 580 and 594 to make the surface rough, the friction with the thread member may be increased and the thread member may be easily entangled in the gap 592. Further, it is also possible to form a cut-shaped gap 592 by providing an inclination on the side end surface of the base side box portion 565 instead of the side end surface 581 of the part side box portion 579.

Next, a slit-shaped notch 596a formed in the upper part of the right flow path forming portion 568 (FIG. 16).
) Is the third fraud countermeasure means (third fraud countermeasure department).

A launch ball (foul ball) with a very slow rate of fire has a small opening 595b and a right flow path 590.
It passes through c and flows into the lower plate 23 of the lower plate unit 29. At this time, the thread member attached to the foul ball may enter the notch 596a and be sandwiched, and then it may be difficult to operate and move the thread member. Further, if the thread member attached to the foul ball is manually pulled from the lower plate 23 and operated, the thread member may enter the notch 596a and be pinched.

Next, the slit-shaped notches 597a and 597b formed around the discharge port 593 (FIG. 1).
6) becomes the fourth fraud countermeasure means (fourth fraud countermeasure department). In this embodiment, the notch 5
The 97a is provided at the right end portion of the right bottom surface portion 571b. The notch 597b is provided in the lower end portion of the right side flow path forming portion 568 and its peripheral members.

The foul ball is finally discharged to the lower plate unit 29 through the discharge port 593 of the foul ball catch unit 560, and at this time, the thread member attached to the foul ball enters the notch 597a and 579b. It can be pinched and then difficult to operate and move. Further, when the thread member attached to the foul ball is manually pulled from the lower plate 23 and operated, the thread member may enter the notch 597a and 579b and be pinched.

In the foul ball catch unit 560, a notch or the like can be provided in the member even around other places where the thread member attached to the foul ball passes, and the foul ball can be used as a countermeasure against fraud.

[Plate unit]
The precision plate unit 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19.

FIG. 18 is a perspective view (a) of the upper plate unit 20 in a state where the effect button unit 750 is removed from the upper plate unit main body 680, and a top view of the upper plate unit 20. FIG. 19 is an exploded view of the upper plate unit 20 (upper plate unit main body 680). The production button unit 750
The details of (effect button 25) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 20, 21 and 22 and the like.

The upper plate unit 20 (upper plate unit main body 680) includes a right lens member 681, a left lens member 682, an operation panel 690, an upper plate frame 700, an intermediate member 720, a button base 730, and a rear member 740. , (Fig. 19).

A right lens member 681 and a left lens member 682 are arranged in front of the upper plate frame 700, and an operation panel 690 is arranged above. Further, in the upper plate frame 700, the intermediate member 720 is arranged at the rear on the right side, and the LED substrate 726 is arranged at the rear on the left side. Further, in the upper plate frame 700, a button base 730 is arranged substantially lower and rearward, and a rear member 740 is further arranged rearward. The upper plate frame 700 accommodates the intermediate member 720, the LED substrate 726, and the button base 730, and the operation panel 690 from above and the rear member 7 from the rear.
It is covered with 40. The LED substrate 726 may also be included in the category of the intermediate member 720.

The right lens member 681 and the left lens member 682 each have a front-side upper plate lens that is transparent and diffuses light from the rear, and a lens frame that is arranged behind the upper plate lens.

The operation panel 690 is the balance display unit 690a described above in the button installation unit 691 on the right.
, The ball lending button 690b and the return button 690c are provided, and the volume adjusting buttons 690d and 690e and the cross key 690f described above are provided in the left button installation unit 692.

Further, the operation panel 690 has an annular effect button accommodating portion 694 that accommodates the effect button unit 750. The effect button accommodating portion 694 has a stepped scale-like decoration on the surface. The effect button unit 750 is inserted and accommodated in the opening 694a of the effect button accommodating portion 694. The front plate portion 696 constituting the front portion of the effect button accommodating portion 694 has a central sharpened portion 696a sharpened forward in the center. The front plate portion 696 includes a right plate 696b and a left plate 6
It is composed of 96c, and the connection point between the right plate 696b and the left plate 696c is the central sharpened portion 696a.
Will be.

As shown in FIG. 19, the upper plate frame 700 has a bottom plate portion 701, a front surface portion 702 extending substantially upward from the bottom plate portion 701, and an upper plate portion 7 connected to the front surface portion 702 from the rear of the front surface portion 702.
03 and a substantially C-shaped operation panel accommodating portion 704 connected to the front surface portion 702 and the upper plate portion 703 are provided.

The front surface portion 702 of the upper plate frame 700 is provided with a speaker opening 702a into which the lower left speaker 19d is inserted. Further, a right lens base 706 to which the right lens member 681 is attached from the front and a left lens base 707 to which the left lens member 682 is attached from the front are connected to the front surface portion 702.

The right lens base 706 has an opening 706a through which the light of each LED of the rear LED substrate 721 passes, and has a mounting portion 708 at the rear. The left lens base 707 is the rear LE
Aperture 707a through which the light of each LED of the D substrate 726 is passed (not shown in FIG. 19).
And has a mounting portion 709 at the rear. The mounting portion 709 is mounted on the front frame base unit 480 (FIG. 7).

Further, in the upper center of the front surface portion 702, a lower step portion 710 and an upper step portion 712 having a substantially L-shaped cross section with respect to the cross section in the front-rear direction and the vertical direction (cross section perpendicular to the left-right direction) are provided (FIG. 23). (C) and FIG. 24 (a)). The upper portion 712 is formed at the upper end of the lower portion 710, and the upper portion 712 has a saucer-like shape and is concave when viewed from the front (see also FIG. 24 (a)). .. The width of the upper portion 712 in the left-right direction is narrower than the width of the lower portion 710 in the left-right direction. The lower portion 710 and the upper portion 712 are arranged after the front plate portion 696 of the operation panel 690 so as to be covered and shielded by the front plate portion 696 of the operation panel 690. Therefore, unless the front plate portion 696 is transparent, the player can see the lower portion 710 and the upper portion 712 from the front.
Cannot be seen. It is also possible to make the front plate portion 696 transparent for the purpose of producing an effect. Details of the lower portion 710 and the upper portion 712 will be described later.

On the right side of the upper plate portion 703 of the upper plate frame 700, the opening 703a in which the upper plate operation portion 735 is inserted and arranged from below abuts with the plate-shaped communication terminal storage place 743 (smartphone storage place) of the rear member 740. A receiving portion 703b (right end portion) is provided.

The intermediate member 720 of the upper plate unit 20 (upper plate unit main body 680) holds the LED substrate 721 arranged behind the right lens base 706 of the upper plate frame 700 and the LED substrate 721 on the right side, and is substantially above. It has an LED board cover 723 that covers the rear. Each of the plurality of LEDs provided on the LED substrate 721 is arranged at a position corresponding to the opening 706a of the right lens base 706. Further, the intermediate member 720 has a mounting portion 722 behind the LED board cover 723. The mounting portion 722 is mounted on the front frame base unit 480 (FIG. 7). Further, the intermediate member 720 has a receiving portion 724 that conforms to the shape of the holding portion 736 of the precision plate operating portion 735 and receives the intermediate member 720.

The button base 730 of the upper plate unit 20 (upper plate unit main body 680) has a main body portion 731.
From above, the opening / closing mechanism 732, the relay board 737, and the left and right reinforcing plates 739a, 73.
9b (reinforcing member, reinforcing means) is installed.

The main body 731 is the effect button unit 750 (effect button 2) in the upper plate unit 20.
A bottom portion 731a on which 5) is placed, and a right side portion 731b provided on the right side of the bottom portion 731a.
To prepare for. In the center of the bottom portion 731a, a box portion 731c having three rooms (spaces) partitioned by a wall is provided. Further, the right side reinforcing plate mounting portion 731 to which the right side reinforcing plate 739a is attached by screwing to the right end portion and the left end portion of the bottom portion 731a, respectively.
d and the left side reinforcing plate mounting portion 731e to which the left side reinforcing plate 739b is attached by screwing are arranged.

In the main body 731, the bottom portion 731a to which the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) is attached, the right side reinforcing plate mounting portion 731d, and the left side reinforcing plate mounting portion 731e.
Is tilted downward to the front side, and the effect button unit 750 is also tilted downward to the front side as a whole.
The front part of the effect button unit 750 is formed so as to be arranged lower than the rear part (see also FIG. 23 (b)).

The opening / closing mechanism 732 is installed on the right side portion 731b of the main body portion 731, and is operated by the player to cause the game ball of the upper plate 21 to flow down to the lower plate 23, and the upper plate operation unit 735 and the upper plate operation unit. The holding portion 736 that holds the 735, the opening / closing lever 733 that moves (operates) the opening / closing member 734 in response to the operation of the upper plate operating portion 735, and the opening / closing lever 733 that are attached to the opposite side of the upper plate operating portion 735. An opening / closing member 734 is provided. When the opening / closing member 734 is opened, the upper plate 21 to the lower plate 23 pass through the passage 485 (FIG. 8 (d)) and the second entrance 465 (FIG. 5 (b) and FIG. 6 (a)). The game ball flows down.

The relay board 737 relays a detection signal related to the operation of the player to the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) to the effect control device 300 (described later), or relays the effect button unit 75.
Power may be supplied to the LED of 0 (effect button 25).

In the present embodiment, the relay board 737 includes an LED board 721, a cross key 690f, volume adjusting buttons 690d and 690e, and an optical sensor 77 of a button unit base 770 described later.
It is electrically connected to each of the 2nd grade.

Configurations related to the effect, such as the LED board 721, the cross key 690f, the volume adjustment buttons 690d, 690e, and the optical sensor 772 of the button unit base 770, are configured via the relay board 737 as the effect control device 300 (sub). It is connected to the board). The LED board 72 is configured to be connected to the effect control device 300 (sub board) via the relay board 737.
1. Wiring processing for connecting each of the cross key 690f, the volume adjusting buttons 690d, 690e, the optical sensor 772 of the button unit base 770, and the like to the effect control device 300 (sub-board) can be facilitated. Further, the space for wiring for connecting each of these configurations to the effect control device 300 (sub-board) can be saved.

In the present embodiment, the relay board 737 is not connected to the effect control device 300 (sub-board) like the balance display unit 690a, the ball lending button 690b, and the return button 690c (configuration not related to the effect). Is not electrically connected to. However, even if the configuration is not directly connected to the effect control device 300 (sub-board), the effect control device 300 (sub-board) is once integrated on the relay board 737 by electrically connecting to the relay board 737. ) Can be configured to pull out the wiring toward a different board. With such a configuration, the wiring process can be simplified and the space for wiring can be saved.

The reinforcing plates 739a and 739b (reinforcing member, reinforcing means) reinforce the operation panel 690 by supporting the operation panel 690 from below. Reinforcing plates 739a, 739b
Is an operation panel 6 when the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) is operated.
The subduction of 90 can be prevented.

The rear member 740 of the upper plate unit 20 (upper plate unit main body 680) includes a back plate 742, a lower speaker 19d attached from the front on the left side of the back plate 742, and an upper plate 21 provided above the back plate 742. A plate-shaped communication terminal storage space 743 is provided above the back plate 742 and to the right of the upper plate 21. The back plate 742 is provided with an opening / closing member opening 742a extending in the left-right direction through which the opening / closing member 734 can move left and right. The upper plate 21 includes an upper plate bottom portion 21a and an upper plate wall portion 21b extending substantially vertically from the upper plate bottom portion 21a.

The communication terminal storage 743 has three protrusions 743a, 743b, 743c and a raised portion 74.
3d, and sandwiched between the groove portion between the ridge portions 743a and 743b, the groove portion between the ridge portions 743b and 743c, and the groove portion between the ridge portions 743c and the raised portion 743d, such as a smartphone. A communication terminal can be placed. Since the length of each groove in the left-right direction is different, it is easy to place the communication terminal according to the model (width of the communication terminal). Further, the ridge portion 743a forming the groove,
The lengths of 743b and 743c in the vertical direction may be different from each other.
The different lengths in the vertical direction make it easier to place the communication terminal. The communication terminal storage area 743 is located behind the button installation portion 691 on the right side of the operation panel 690, and is the upper plate frame 70.
It is fitted and arranged between the upper plate portion 303 of 0 and the right lens base 706.

[Direction button unit (Direction button)]
The details of the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) will be described with reference to FIGS. 20, 21 and 22 (also refer to FIG. 25 (b) if necessary). FIG. 20 is an exploded view of the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25). FIG. 21 shows the effect button unit 750.
It is a front view (a) and a perspective view (b) of (effect button 25). FIG. 22 is a plan view (a) of the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) viewed from above, and a perspective view (b) showing the effect button unit 750 and the button installation portion 691 on the right side of the operation panel 690.
).

The effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) includes a button frame 752, a button lens 754, a button lens decoration 756, an in-button lens upper portion 758, an in-button inner lens lower portion 760, and a reflector 762, which are combined in layers. Reflector base 764
And a button bottom base 766 and a button unit base 770 (see FIG. 20).
.. Between the button lens 754 and the button bottom base 766, the button lens decoration 756, the button inner lens upper part 758, the button inner lens lower part 760, the reflector 762, and the reflector base 764 are the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25). ) Are overlapped in the direction of the central axis (see FIG. 20).

Button lens 754 and button bottom base 766, and button lens decoration 7 between them
56 is supported by a button unit base 770 via a coil spring (elastic member) not shown in FIG. In addition, as will be described later, the button frame 752 and
The upper part of the lens inside the button, the lower part 760 of the lens inside the button, the reflector 762, and the reflector base 764 are fixing members fixed with respect to the button unit base 770 and do not move by the operation of the player. Therefore, the movable members are the button lens 754, the button lens decoration 756, and the button bottom base 766. These movable members are the player's button lens 7
By the operation of pushing 54, it moves along the central axis direction (in the substantially vertical direction) from the initial position and sinks downward, and if there is no operation by the player, it is urged by a coil spring (not shown) and the central axis. It moves upward along the direction and returns to the initial position.

The button frame 752 has a front decorative portion 752a arranged on the front side and a button lens 754.
The opening 752b into which the button unit base 770 is inserted and the receiving portion 77 on the outside of the button unit base 770.
It comprises a plurality of legs 752c that are inserted and engaged with 0f. The button frame 752 is
It has a shape like a shade with the central part removed to make an opening 752b, and has an outer peripheral surface (inclined surface 75).
Although 1c) is inclined downward in the radial direction, it has an annular shape as a whole.

The inner peripheral end portion 751a on the inner side in the radial direction of the opening 752b is the outer peripheral end portion 751 on the outer peripheral side in the radial direction.
It is formed at a position higher than b in the central axial direction, and the inner peripheral end portion 751a is formed by being bent downward from an inclined outer peripheral surface (inclined surface 751c). The tip portion bent downward is the flange portion 7 formed on the button lens main body 754a, which will be described later.
It is configured to come into contact with 54b.

From the inner peripheral end 751a on the inner side of the opening 752b in the radial direction to the outer peripheral end portion 751 on the outer side in the radial direction.
The inclined surface 751c toward b is formed with an inclination so as to be gently continuous with the inclined surface of the button lens 754 formed in a convex shape, which will be described later, and the player can use the button lens 754 and the button frame 752. It is said to be a design that makes the boundary part look natural.

Further, the front decorative portion 752a is arranged above the central sharpened portion 696a of the operation panel 690. The button frame 752 is fixed to the button unit base 770 by a plurality of leg portions 752c, and does not move when the player operates the button lens 754.

The button lens 754 is engaged with the annular portion 766b (wall portion) of the pot-shaped (tub-shaped) bottom base 766. The button lens 754 includes a circular button lens body 754a that rises in the center in a mountain shape, and a flange portion 754b having an L-shaped cross section in the radial direction of the button lens 754 at the hem portion of the button lens body 754a. , Equipped with. An outer peripheral groove 754c is formed between the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens main body 754a and the flange portion 754b. The button lens body 754a has an opening 752 formed in the button frame 752.
Part of the flange portion 754b (outer wall portion of the outer peripheral groove 754c) when arranged inside b
Is configured to be located below the inner peripheral end 751a of the button frame 752. Therefore, even if the button lens 754 is urged by a coil spring, a part of the flange portion 754b abuts on the inner peripheral end portion 751a of the opening portion 752b, so that the button lens 754 pops out above the button frame 752. There is no such thing.

As shown in FIGS. 21 (b) and 22 (a), in a part of both sides of the button lens body 754a in the left-right direction, the flange portion 754 b is notched so that the outer peripheral groove 754c is opened to the outside in the radial direction. A cut lateral notch 754f (described later) is formed. Side notch 7
A screw receiving portion 754e (described later) is formed at the position of 54f. Further, in front of the button lens main body 754a, the flange portion 754b is formed with a front notch portion 754g (described later) notched so that the outer peripheral groove 754c is opened to the outside in the radial direction. The side notch 754f and the front notch 754g are formed so as to be aligned in the circumferential direction with the lateral guide port 766i and the front guide port 766g formed in the button lower base 766, respectively (also in FIG. 21). reference).

Further, in the button lens main body 754a, the flange portion 754b is recessed inward in the radial direction between the position of the side notch portion 754f on which the screw receiving portion 754e is formed and the position of the front notch portion 754g. A flange recess 754h is formed. Further, the flange recess 7
54h is also formed at a position that is line-symmetric with respect to a straight line connecting the lateral notches 754f formed in the left-right direction. These flange recesses 754h form an avoidance portion that avoids the leg portion 752c extending downward from the button frame 752 toward the receiving portion 770f in the button unit base 770. Note that FIG. 22A shows the button unit base 77 for convenience of explanation.
The receiving portion 770f at 0 is also shown.

In the button lens body 754a, the peripheral edge portion of the button lens body 754a such as the outer peripheral groove 754c, the flange portion 754b, the screw receiving portion 754e, and the flange recess 754h is shielded by the button frame 752 described above so as not to be visible to the player. ing. Therefore, as will be described later, when the fluid is dropped and flowed on the effect button unit 750, the button frame 752 constitutes a shielding means for shielding the fluid flowing around the effect button unit 750 from the player.

As shown in FIG. 20, the button lens decoration 756 has a wristwatch-like shape as a whole, and has a character portion 756a indicating the character "PUSH", a circular button lens decoration main body 756b, and left and right band portions 756c. And left and right band end portions 756d, and left and right button lens engaging portions 756e. Since the button lens 754 is transparent, the character "PUSH" of the character portion 756a arranged under the button lens 754 can be visually recognized. The left and right button lens engaging portions 756e are engaged with the annular portion 766b (wall portion) of the pot-shaped lower button base 766.

The upper part of the lens inside the button, the lower part 760 of the lens inside the button, and the reflector 762 are combined to form an assembly (see FIG. 25 (b)). The inner lens upper portion 758 having a disk-shaped shape has a plurality (8) protrusions 758a protruding outward in the radial direction on the outer peripheral surface. The protrusions 758a arranged at equal intervals of 45 degrees have every other locking portion 758b on the lower side, and there are a total of four locking portions 758b. Each locking portion 758b is inserted into the corresponding groove-shaped receiving portion 760b of the inner lens lower portion 760 of the button, and is inserted into the upper inner button inner lens 758 capable of transmitting light and the lower inner button lens capable of transmitting light. The lower 760 is combined.

Further, a reflector 762 is attached to the upper portion 758 of the lens in the button from below by screwing. The reflector 762 is made of metal or has a metal-plated surface and is capable of reflecting light. The lower part of the in-button lens 760, which has a substantially cylindrical shape, houses the reflector 762 inside. The lower lens 760 in the button includes two eaves 760a arranged at an angle of 180 degrees and a leg 760c extending below each eaves 760a.

The reflector base 764 has an opening 764e at the bottom, has a mortar-shaped shape with the bottom removed, and has a substantially conical inner surface. The reflector base 764 is made of metal or has a metal-plated inner surface. The reflector base 764 is subjected to diffused reflection processing, has irregularities 764a arranged radially in the radial direction, and diffusely reflects light.

The reflector base 764 includes an engagement receiving portion 764b to which each leg portion 760c of the lower lens portion 760 in the button is engaged. As a result, the reflector base 764 has the lower part of the lens inside the button 7
60 is placed. Here, the lower end of the lower lens 760 in the button is the reflector base 7.
It abuts on the upper side of the inner peripheral end of 64 (which defines the opening 764e) and the reflector 762.
Is inserted into the opening 764e (see FIGS. 23 (b) and 25 (b)).

Further, the reflector base 764 is provided with a fitting portion 764c at the outer peripheral end to which each band end portion 756d of the button lens decoration 756 is slidably fitted. As a result, the reflector base 7
64 will be sandwiched between the two band ends 756d of the button lens decoration 756. Then, by the operation of pushing the button lens 754 of the player, each band end portion 756d slides on the fitting portion 764c as a groove in the central axial direction (substantially vertical direction).

Further, the reflector base 764 has a leg portion 764d that penetrates the button bottom base 766 and engages the button unit base 770. As a result, the reflector base 764, and thus the upper part of the lens inside the button 758, the lower part 760 of the lens inside the button, and the reflector 762.
And are fixed to the button unit base 770.

The button bottom base 766 has a pot-shaped (tub-shaped) shape, a bottom portion 766a having a disk-shaped shape, an annulus portion 766b extending vertically upward from the bottom portion 766a, and an annulus. A flange portion 766c (flange portion) extending radially outward from the upper end portion of the portion 766b is provided. The button bottom base 766 is a housing portion 766d formed inside the annular portion 766b in the radial direction.
The LED substrate 767 is housed in the bottom portion 766a of the. Button bottom base 766 collar 766c
(Flange portion) abuts on the flange portion 754b of the button lens 754.

The disk-shaped LED substrate 767 has one central LED 767a arranged in the center and eight peripheral LEDs 767b arranged in an annular shape around the central LED 767a. The LED board 767 has
The lower end of the reflector 762 and the lower end of the reflector base 764 (around the opening 764e) come into contact with each other. The central LED 767a is arranged so as to surround the lower end portion of the reflector 762, and the eight peripheral LEDs 767b are arranged so as to surround the lower end portion of the reflector 762. That is, the central LED 767a is arranged radially inside the lower end of the reflector 762.
The peripheral LED 767b is arranged radially outside the lower end of the reflector 762 and radially inside the lower end of the reflector base 764 (see FIG. 25 (b)).

The direct light from the central LED 767a and the indirect light reflected by the reflector 762 mainly pass through the substantially transparent inner lens upper portion 758, the button lens decoration 756, and the button lens 754, and the effect button unit 750. Go out of. The direct light from the peripheral LED 767b and the indirect light reflected by the direct light on the reflector base 764 mainly pass through the lower part of the inner lens of the button 760, the button lens decoration 756 and the button lens 754, and are outside the effect button unit 750. Go out to.

The annulus 766b of the button bottom base 766 has button lens decorations 75 on both sides in the left-right direction.
The engaging receiving portion 766e in which each button lens engaging portion 756e of 6 is abutted and arranged, and the screw hole portion 766 for abutting the screw receiving portion 754e and screwing the screw receiving portion 754e with a screw.
It is provided with an f (female screw) and a concave lateral guide port 766i arranged so as to face the engaging receiving portion 766e and the screw hole portion 766f on the outer side in the radial direction.

By screwing the screw receiving portion 754e formed on the button lens body 754a to the screw hole portion 766f, the flange portion 754b of the button lens 754 becomes the button bottom base 766.
It is pressed against the flange portion 766c (flange portion) of the. Further, the button lens engaging portion 756e formed on the button lens decoration 756 has an engaging receiving portion 766e located below the button lens engaging portion 756e and a screw located above the button lens engaging portion 756e. Receiving part 754e
It is sandwiched between and fixed (see FIG. 21 (b)).

The screw hole portion 766f is arranged so as to straddle the engagement receiving portion 766e and the bottom portion of the lateral guide port 766i.
The opening portion of the screw hole is formed so as to be slightly upwardly convex. In addition, the screw hole portion 7
The 66f is formed to have an outer diameter size that fits in the screw receiving portion 754e formed on the button lens main body 754a when viewed from above. Since it is inserted into the concave lateral guide port 766i, the screw receiving portion 754e also has a function of positioning the button lens 754 in the circumferential direction when the button lens 754 is attached to the button lower base 766.

As will be described later, the lateral guide port 766i allows the flowable fluid (liquid or the like) dropped on the effect button unit 750 to be transferred from the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754 to the upper plate unit main body 68.
It is guided to the inside of 0 without passing through the effect button unit 750.

The fluid (liquid, etc.) that has fallen on the button lens 754 is the button lens body 754a.
The surface of the surface is directed toward the outer peripheral surface 754d and enters the outer peripheral groove 754c. In addition, the operation panel 69
If the amount of the fluid (liquid or the like) that has fallen above 0 is large, it may go down the surface of the effect button accommodating portion 694, exceed the button frame 752, and enter the outer peripheral groove 754c. Since the effect button unit 750 mounted on the bottom 731a of the button base 730 inclined downward to the front side is inclined downward to the front side, it is behind the lateral guide port 766i (rearward from the dotted line) as shown in FIG. 22A. ), The fluid (liquid or the like) that has entered the outer peripheral groove 754c flows over the screw receiving portion 754e to the lateral guide port 766i. The fluid from the lateral guide port 766i is the button frame 75.
Panel side recess 694b provided in the button frame mounting portion 694c on which 2 is mounted (FIG. 22 (FIG. 22).
b) Inflow into). Further, in the flange recess 754h, the outer peripheral groove 754c has a narrow gap through which a fluid can pass (it is also possible to widen it). However, the fluid is a flange recess 754h.
A flow path formed between the inner peripheral end portion 751a of the button frame 752 and the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens main body 754a can flow beyond the above.

Further, the annular portion 766b of the button lower base 766 has a concave shape at the front position on the outer peripheral surface, and protrudes outward in the radial direction from the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b. A front guide port 766 g is formed (see FIG. 21). In the present embodiment, the front guide port 766 g is formed at the foremost portion of the outer peripheral surface. The flange portion 766c (flange portion) is notched at a position corresponding to the front guide port 766 g. Therefore, the front induction port 766 g
The upper part of is open.

Further, three ribs 776 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b surrounded by the concave protruding portion forming the front guide port 766 g. Each of the ribs 776 is formed so as to extend in the vertical direction (from the upper side to the lower side) at substantially equal intervals, and each of the ribs 776 is formed from the upper side to the lower side from the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b. It is formed so that the height is high.

Due to this structure, the front guide port 766 g allows a fluid such as a liquid to be introduced from the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754 into the inside of the upper plate unit main body 680 to produce the effect button unit 750.
Induce without passing through. At this time, each of the three ribs 776 is a base under the button 766.
Through the notch of the flange portion 766c (flange portion) of the button lens 754, the front notch portion 7 of the button lens 754
It facilitates the flow of fluid (liquid, etc.) from 54 g into the front guide port 766 g. Since the effect button unit 750 is inclined downward to the front side, the lateral guide port 766 is shown in FIG. 22 (a).
The fluid (liquid or the like) that has entered the outer peripheral groove 754c located in front of i (front of the dotted line) flows from the front notch 754 g to the front guide port 766 g.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the button bottom base 766 includes a light-shielding plate 768 extending downward from the bottom 766a and four spring shafts 766h. The shading plate 768 moves downward together with the button lower base 766 by pressing the button lens 754 of the player.
It is detected by the optical sensor 772 (effect button switch 25a) of the button unit base 770. The spring shaft 766h is housed together with the coil spring in the spring chamber 770d of the button unit base 770 in a state where the coil spring (not shown) is passed through and attached.

The button unit base 770 includes a storage frame 770a for accommodating the motor 771, a lower outer wall portion 770b and an upper outer wall portion 770c extending downward or upward along the central axial direction (substantially vertical direction) from the storage frame 770a, respectively. To prepare for. The storage frame 770a is mounted on the bottom 731a of the button base 730. The lower outer wall portion 770b is connected to the button base 730. The upper outer wall portion 770c is arranged around the annular portion 766b of the button lower base 766 so as to face the annular portion 766b (FIG. 25 (b)).

Further, the button unit base 770 has four spring chambers 770d for accommodating a spring shaft 766h to which a coil spring is attached, a vertical hole 770e into which each leg portion 764d of the reflector base 764 is inserted, and each leg portion of the button frame 752. Receiving part 770 to which 752c is attached
It has f and. As a result, the button frame 752 and the reflector base 764 are fixed to the button unit base 770, and the button lower base 766 is the button unit base 77.
It is movably supported against 0.

Further, the button unit base 770 has a plurality of mitigation members 773 that alleviate the collision when the button bottom base 766 that is sunk by the operation of pressing the button lens 754 of the player collides with the button unit base 770. The button unit base 770 has an optical sensor 772 that detects the shading plate 768 (described above) of the button lower base 766 when the button lower base 766 is sunk by the operation of pressing the button lens 754 of the player. The optical sensor 772 functions as an effect button switch 25a described later, which is turned on when the light-shielding plate 768 blocks the light generated from the light-irradiating unit and the light-receiving unit cannot receive the light.

When the motor 771 housed in the storage frame 770a operates, the entire effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) vibrates, and an operation promotion notification prompting the player to operate the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25). You can perform the production. Button base 73
The box portion 731c of 0 is arranged below the motor 771 and can absorb the noise of the motor 771.

[1st storage section (water storage section)]
The first storage unit 713 (water storage unit) of the precision plate unit 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG. 23 is an enlargement of a front view (a) of the precision plate unit 20, a cross-sectional view (b) of the cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the front view (a) as viewed from the left side, and a main part of the cross-sectional view (b). Enlarged view of the main part (
c). Further, FIG. 24 shows A- of the top view of the precision plate unit 20 (similar to FIG. 18B).
It is a cross-sectional view (a) which looked at the cross-sectional view in line A from the back side, and is the front view (b) in the state which a part of the member constituting the precision plate unit 20 was removed.

As shown in FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (c), in the upper plate unit 20, the front notch portion 754 g formed in the button lens main body 754 and the front guide port 766 g formed in the button lower base 766. Is assembled so as to face the front decorative portion 752a in the button frame 752. Further, the central sharpened portion 696a formed in the front plate portion 696 of the operation panel 690.
And the lower portion 710 and the upper portion 712 formed on the upper plate frame 700 are assembled so as to face each other. The front decorative portion 752a of the button frame 752 is enlarged to increase the lower portion 7
It is also possible to face the 10 and the upper portion 712, or to lengthen the central sharpened portion 696a of the operation panel 690 so as to face the front guide port 766g.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23B, in the button base 730 (main body portion 731), the upper end of the bottom portion 731a to which the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) is attached, the right side reinforcing plate mounting portion 731d, and the left side reinforcing plate attachment. The portion 731e is inclined downward to the front side with respect to the bottom plate portion 701, and is provided with an inclination angle so that the front portion of the effect button unit 750 is arranged lower than the rear portion. That is, the effect button unit 750 is inclined so that the end portion on the player side is lower than the end portion on the board surface side.

As shown in FIGS. 19, 23 (a) and 24 (a), the lower portion 710 formed on the upper plate frame 700 includes the right lens base 706 and the left lens base 7 of the upper plate frame 700.
It is formed between 07, that is, substantially the center of the front of the gaming machine, in a portion of the upper plate frame 700 that protrudes toward the player. The lower portion 710 has bottom surfaces 710a and 710b extending from the player side of the upper plate frame 700 toward the back side of the gaming machine and a back surface 710 extending above the gaming machine.
With c.

When the central sharpened portion 696a of the front plate portion 696 of the operation panel 690 is transparent, the lower portion 710
The bottom surfaces 710a and 710b of the above are visible to the player. In this case, in the lower portion 710, the bottom surfaces 710a and 710b are formed in a substantially V shape when viewed from the player side, and the right lens base 706 extending to the right of the upper plate frame 700 and the left lens extending to the left. It is said to be a design linked to the base 707.

Further, the tip portion 710d near the apex of the substantially V-shaped lower portion 710 is formed so as to project to the frontmost (player side), and as described above, the cross section perpendicular to the left-right direction of the tip portion 710d. However, it exhibits a substantially L-shape.

The upper portion 712 is formed continuously from the upper end 710u of the back portion 710c of the lower portion 710, and has a bottom surface 712a extending from the player side to the back side of the gaming machine and a back surface 71 extending above the gaming machine.
Has 2b. Further, the upper portion 712 includes partition portions 712c and 712d in the left-right direction. The upper portion 712 has a saucer-like shape due to the bottom surface 712a, the back surface 712b, and the partition portions 712c and 712d, and is formed in a concave shape when viewed from the front (FIG. 21A).
And also see FIG. 24 (a)). The width of the upper portion 712 in the left-right direction (distance between the partition portion 712c and the partition portion 712d) is narrower than the width of the widest portion in the left-right direction of the lower portion 710 formed in a V shape.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), in the front portion of the effect button unit 750 in a state where each part of the precision plate unit 20 is assembled, the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens main body 754
Communication space S between the outside of the button frame 766, the outside of the front guide port 766g formed in the annular portion 766b of the button lower base 766, and the inside of the button frame 752 assembled so as to shield the two.
1 is formed. Water does not enter behind the dotted line in FIG. 24 (c). The communication space S1 between the movable member (button lens 754, button lower base 766) and the fixing member (button frame 752) of the effect button unit 750 is a part of the flow path of the fluid (arrow in FIG. 23 (c)). To configure. In the communication space S1, the flow path width is widened according to the movement of the movable member downward from the initial position by the operation of pressing the button lens 754 of the player, and the fluid can easily flow.

In addition, the button base 730 and the effect button unit 750 (button unit base 77).
The lower part 710 and the upper part 712 located at the front of the upper plate frame 700 in which 0) is housed.
A connected space S2 is formed between the outside of the operation panel 690 and the inside of the central sharpened portion 696a of the operation panel 690. The communication space S2 is formed between the upper plate frame 700 and the operation panel 690, and is fixed, so that the flow path width does not expand with the movement of the movable member.

Here, the communication space S1 constitutes a delay means for delaying the flow of the fluid. Connected space S
2 constitutes a first storage unit 713 (delaying means) that delays the flow of the fluid. The delay of the fluid includes the evaporation of the fluid accumulated in the first reservoir 713 from the gaps of the constituent members of the precision unit main body 680 (for example, the flow path to the first reservoir 713). May be good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), the lower edge portion 753 of the front decorative portion 752a of the button frame 752 and the upper edge portion 698a of the central sharpened portion 696a are in contact with each other, and the central sharpened portion in the operation panel 690 is in contact with each other. The lower edge portion 698b of the 696a and the tip portion 710d of the precision plate frame 700 are in contact with each other. Therefore, the communication space S1 and the communication space S2 are isolated from the outside of the gaming machine, and the fluid does not flow out to the outside of the gaming machine.

As described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21, the effect button unit 750 has an outer peripheral groove 754c in the button lens main body 754a, and a front notch 7 is provided on the front side of the outer peripheral groove 754c.
54 g is formed. The front notch portion 754 g is assembled so as to be aligned with the front guide port 766 g formed in the button lower base 766. Further, as described above, FIG. 23.
As shown in (b) and (c), on the front side (player side) of the upper plate unit 20, the front notch portion 754 g, the front guide port 766 g, and the lower stage portion 71 formed in the upper plate frame 700.
0 and the upper part 712 are the front decorative part 752a and the operation panel 6 in the button frame 752.
It is assembled so as to face the central sharpened portion 696a formed in the front plate portion 696 of the 90.

According to such a structure, in the front portion of the effect button unit 750, the front notch portion 754 g of the outer peripheral groove 754c in the button lens 754 and the front guide port 766 g formed in the button lower base 766 are used as operating means. It is possible to construct a flow means capable of flowing the fluid flowing around the button lens 754 inside the gaming machine.

Further, a communication space S1 formed between the outside of the front guide port 766 g and the inside of the button frame 752, and / or formed between the outside of the lower tier 710 and the upper tier 712 and the inside of the central sharpened portion 696a. The communication space S2 can form a delay means for delaying the flow of the fluid flowed by the above-mentioned flow means.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, if there is a fluid dropped on the effect button 25, the surface of the button lens 754 inclined forward (player side) flows toward the front side. Then, it flows into the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754. The fluid flowing into the outer peripheral groove 754c flows toward the front side, passes through the front guide port 766g from the front notch portion 754g, and flows into the communication space S1. As a result, the inflow of the fluid into the inside of the gaming machine (inside the precision plate unit 20) is delayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), the communication space S2 (first).
It flows into the storage section 713) and is stored here. In the communication space S2 (first storage unit 713), the fluid accumulates from above the lowermost lower portion 710, and then accumulates on the upper upper portion 712. When the capacity of the fluid is large, after the communication space S2 is filled with the fluid, the fluid further exceeds the upper portion 712, travels behind the upper portion 712, and is the bottom plate portion in the upper plate frame 700. It is on the 701 and can be collected in the space between the front portion 702 and the button base 730. That is, this space constitutes a third storage portion as a delay means for delaying the flow of the fluid.

[Second storage section (water storage section)]
The second storage portions 777a and 777b (water storage units) of the precision plate unit 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. 25 shows a cross-sectional view (a) of the top view of the precision plate unit 20 (similar to FIG. 18 (b)) seen from the front along the line AA, and an enlarged main part of the cross-sectional view (a). It is a part enlarged view (b). Further, FIG. 26 shows an enlarged right side main part (a) showing an enlarged right side of a cross section obtained by cutting the effect button unit 750 and its peripheral portion along the radial direction, and an enlarged left main part showing an enlarged left side. (B) and top views (c) and (d) showing a main part of the button base 730.

As described with reference to FIGS. 20, 21, and 23, the upper plate unit 20 has a front notch portion 754 g formed in the button lens main body 754 and a front guide port formed in the button lower base 766. The 766 g and the front decorative portion 752a of the button frame 752 correspond in position, and the central sharpened portion 696a of the operation panel 690 and the lower portion 710 and the upper portion 712 formed in the upper plate frame 700 are positioned. It is assembled to correspond. The lateral notch 754f formed in the left-right direction of the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754 and the lateral guide port 766i of the button lower base 766 are also formed so as to correspond in position.

As shown in FIG. 22B, the opening wall 695 defining the opening 694a formed in the effect button accommodating portion 694 of the operation panel 690 has an outer peripheral end portion 751b of the button frame 752.
A button frame mounting portion 694c is provided to support the button frame. The button frame mounting portion 694c is formed so as to project radially toward the center of the substantially circular opening 694a. Further, the button frame mounting portion 694c is located on the outer side (left and right) in the radial direction at a position corresponding to (opposing) the lateral notch 754f and the lateral guide port 766i formed in the effect button unit 750 fitted in the opening 694a. A panel-side recess 694b recessed toward the outside in the direction is formed. In the present embodiment, the panel-side recess 694b accommodates a part of the lateral guide port 766i, but the lateral guide port 766i is not accommodated at a radial distance from the panel-side recess 694b so as to widen the flow path of the fluid. You may do it.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 (b) and 26 (a) (see also FIG. 19), the bottom portion 731a of the button base 730 is formed in a concave shape surrounded by a side wall. Also, the bottom 731a
In the central region of the above, the effect button unit 750 is supported, and partition portions 732a and 732b for partitioning the bottom portion 731a are extended from the front side to the back side. In addition, the partition portions 732a and 73
Partitions 732c and 732d extending in the left-right direction are formed so as to partition the space between 2b. The box portion 731c described above has a partition portion 732a, 732b and a partition portion 732c, 7.
It will be formed by 32d.

As a result, in the bottom portion 731a, a bottom surrounding portion 730a is formed between the partition portion 732a and the bottom side wall 732e. Further, a bottom surrounding portion 730b is formed between the partition portion 732b and the bottom side wall 732f.

Further, in the bottom portion 731a, the spring chamber 77 of the button unit base 770 in the effect button unit 750 is provided in each of the bottom surrounding portion 730a and the bottom surrounding portion 730b.
A spring chamber receiving portion 732g that supports 0d is erected upward from the bottom surface of the bottom portion 731a.

On the outside of the bottom side wall 732e on the right side, a pedestal 730c is formed at a position below the upper end of the bottom side wall 732e and higher than the bottom surface of the bottom 731a. On the base 730c,
A pedestal surrounding portion 730e surrounded by a side wall is formed. In the base portion surrounding portion 730e, a right side reinforcing plate mounting portion 731d to which the lower end portion of the right side reinforcing plate 739a is attached is erected upward from the bottom surface of the bottom surrounding portion 730e.

Similarly, a base portion 730d is formed on the outside of the bottom side wall 732f on the left side, and a base portion surrounding portion 730f is formed on the base portion 730d. In the base surrounding part 730f,
The reinforcing plate mounting portion 731e is erected upward from the bottom surface of the base portion surrounding portion 730f.

As shown in FIGS. 25 (b) and 26 (a), on the right side of the effect button unit 750, the inner peripheral end portion 751a inside the opening 752b of the button frame 752 in the radial direction is bent downward. The tip portion thereof comes into contact with the flange portion 754b formed on the button lens main body 754a. Further, the outer peripheral end portion 751b on the outer side in the radial direction comes into contact with the button frame mounting portion 694c formed in the opening portion 694a of the operation panel 690.

Therefore, the side notch 754 formed in the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens main body 754a
f and the outside of the lateral guide port 766i formed in the annular portion 766b of the button bottom base 766,
A communication space S3 is formed between the inside of the button frame 752 attached so as to cover the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens main body 754a. That is, the communication space S3 is provided between the button frame 752 and the portion (lateral guide port 766i, etc.) installed facing the button frame 752.

As described above, the communication space S3 between the movable member (button lens 754) and the fixing member (button frame 752) of the effect button unit 750 is the flow path of the fluid (arrow in FIG. 26A).
Consists of a part of. The communication space S3 is created by pressing the button lens 754 of the player.
The width of the flow path expands as the movable member moves downward from the initial position, making it easier for fluid to flow.

Further, passing between the radial outside of the button bottom base 766 and the panel side recess 694b and the opening wall 695 formed in the operation panel 690, the radial outside of the button unit base 770 and the right side reinforcing plate 739a (and the opening). A communication space S4 connected to the wall 695) is formed. That is, the communication space S4 is provided between the operation panel 690 and the portion (such as the base 766 under the button) installed facing the operation panel 690, and the operation panel 69 is provided.
It is provided between the right side reinforcing plate 739a that abuts on 0 and a portion (button unit base 770 or the like) that is installed facing the right side reinforcing plate 739a.

The communication space S4 also constitutes a part of the flow path of the fluid (arrow in FIG. 26A). Connected space S
Reference numeral 4 is further connected to a base portion surrounding portion 730e in which the right side reinforcing plate mounting portion 731d is formed.

The communication space S4 between the movable member (base 766 under the button) and the fixing member (operation panel 690) of the effect button unit 750 moves the movable member downward from the initial position by pressing the button lens 754 of the player. However, when a fluid is present, the fluid is pushed or pulled into the movable member (base 766 under the button) to facilitate the flow. The communication space S4 between the button unit base 770 and the right side reinforcing plate 739a or the operation panel 690 is fixed and does not change according to the movement of the movable member.

Similarly, on the left side of the effect button unit 750, the side notch 754f formed in the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens main body 754a and the annular portion 76 of the button lower base 766 are also formed.
The outside of the lateral guide port 766i formed in 6b and the outer peripheral surface 754 of the button lens body 754a.
A communication space S5 is formed between the inside of the button frame 752 attached so as to cover d. Movable member (button lens 754) and fixing member (button lens 754) of the effect button unit 750
The communication space S5 between the button frames 752) constitutes a part of the flow path (arrow in FIG. 26B) of the fluid. In the communication space S5, by pressing the button lens 754 of the player, the flow path width is widened according to the movement of the movable member downward from the initial position, and the fluid can easily flow.

Further, passing between the radial outside of the button bottom base 766 and the panel side recess 694b and the opening wall 695 formed in the opening 694a of the operation panel 690, the radial outside of the button unit base 770 and the left side reinforcing plate A communication space S6 connected to the 739b is formed. The communication space S6 is further connected to a base portion surrounding portion 730f in which the left side reinforcing plate mounting portion 731e is formed.

The communication space S6 between the movable member (base 766 under the button) and the fixing member (operation panel 690) of the effect button unit 750 moves the movable member downward from the initial position by pressing the button lens 754 of the player. However, when a fluid is present, the fluid is pushed or pulled into the movable member (base 766 under the button) to facilitate the flow. The communication space S6 between the button unit base 770 and the left side reinforcing plate 739b is
It is fixed and does not change with the movement of the movable member.

According to such a structure, on the side surface portion in the left-right direction of the effect button unit 750,
The side notch portion 754f of the button lens 754 and the lateral guide port 766i formed in the button lower base 766 can flow the fluid flowing around the button lens 754 as an operating means into the inside of the gaming machine. A flow means can be configured.

Further, the communication spaces S3 and S5 formed between the outside of the lateral guide port 766i and the inside of the button frame 752, the communication spaces S4 and S6 formed between the operation panel 690 and the outside of the effect button unit 750, and / Alternatively, the base surrounding portion 730e and the bottom surrounding portion 730f can form a delay means for delaying the flow of the fluid flowed by the above-mentioned flow means.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, if there is a fluid (liquid or the like) that flows while spreading on the surface of the effect button 25, it flows from the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens 754 into the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754. can do. In addition, the operation panel 690
If the amount of fluid (liquid, etc.) that flows down the surface of the effect button accommodating portion 694 is also large,
It may exceed the button frame 752 and enter the outer peripheral groove 754c. The fluid flowing into the outer peripheral groove 754c on the back side of the lateral guide port 766i (behind the dotted line in FIG. 22A) is the circle of the lateral notch 754f and the button bottom base 766 formed in the outer peripheral groove 754c. It passes through the lateral guide port 766i formed in the ring portion 766b and flows into the communication spaces S3 and S5. Furthermore, FIG.
As shown in 6 (a) and 26 (b), the fluid flows into the communication spaces S4 and S6, and FIG. 2
Like the shaded portion of 6 (d), it is stored in the pedestal surrounding portion 730e and the pedestal surrounding portion 730f. Then, as shown in the shaded area of FIG. 26 (c), the capacity of the flowing fluid is the portion surrounding the pedestal portion 7.
If the capacity of 30e and the base surrounding portion 730f is exceeded, the fluid is transferred to the bottom surrounding portion 730.
It can flow into a and the bottom surrounding portion 730b. The partition portions 732a and 732
No fluid flows into the box portion 731c formed by b or the like.

As described above, the pedestal surrounding portion 730e and the pedestal surrounding portion 730f can form the second storage portions 777a and 777b (delaying means) for delaying the flow of the fluid. Further, the bottom surrounding portion 730a and the bottom surrounding portion 730b can form additional storage portions 778a, 778b (delaying means for delaying the flow of the fluid) as buffers for the second storage portions 777a, 777b.

If the volume of the fluid is large, the bottom surrounding portion 730a and the bottom surrounding portion 730b
After the (reservoir 778a, 778b) is filled with the fluid, the fluid becomes the bottom enclosure 73.
The above-mentioned third storage portion (upper plate frame 700) extends beyond the upper end portion of the wall in front of 0a and the bottom surrounding portion 730b, and runs along the front side of the front wall of the bottom surrounding portion 730a and the bottom surrounding portion 730b.
It is on the bottom plate portion 701 and can be collected in the space between the front portion 702 and the button base 730). That is, the third storage portion includes the above-mentioned communication space S2 and the bottom surrounding portion 7.
A water reservoir for a common buffer of 30a and the bottom surrounding portion 730b can be configured.
It should be noted that the pedestal surrounding portion 730e and the pedestal surrounding portion 730f (second storage portions 777a, 777b).
) (The lower part not covered by the reinforcing plates 739a and 739b), the fluid may fall (flow down) to the third reservoir along the surface of the button base 730.

[Fluid discharge port (liquid discharge port)]
A fluid discharge port (liquid discharge port) will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a front view illustrating the discharge port 779. As described above, it flows into the communication space S1 and flows into the communication space S2.
The fluid stored in (first storage unit 713) passes through the communication spaces S3 and S5, and passes through the communication space S4.
, S6, pedestal surrounding portion 730e and pedestal surrounding portion 730f (second storage portion 777)
The fluid stored in a, 777b), or the bottom surrounding portion 730a and the bottom surrounding portion 7
A discharge port 779 for discharging the fluid stored in the 30b (preliminary storage units 778a, 778b) to the outside of the gaming machine may be provided. In the present embodiment, "storing the fluid inside the gaming machine and discharging the stored fluid to the outside of the gaming machine" is included in "delaying the flow of the fluid". The precision plate unit 20 is not provided with a special discharge port 779.
The fluid may be gradually discharged to the outside of the gaming machine from a minute gap between the constituent members (for example, a gap created by the tolerance between the operation panel 690 and the precision plate frame 700).

As shown in FIG. 27, the discharge port 779 is formed at a position closer to the operation handle 24 (position on the right side) in the lower part of the front surface portion 702 of the upper plate frame 700. The outlet 779 is
It is provided so as to face the right side protrusion 29b in the vicinity of the right side protrusion 29b that protrudes on the right side of the lower plate unit 29. The discharge port 779 is a communication space S2 (first storage portion 713) and a base portion surrounding portion 7.
30e, base surrounding portion 730f (second storage portions 777a, 777b), bottom surrounding portion 73
The 0a and the bottom surrounding portion 730b (preliminary storage portions 778a, 778b) are communicated with each other by a flow path formed invisible to the player inside the gaming machine. For example, the connected space S2 (
The flow path (groove) from the first storage portion 713) to the discharge port 779 is the front portion 7 of the precision plate frame 700.
It may be formed invisible on the back side of 02 (dotted line in FIG. 27).

In the present embodiment, the discharge port 779 is formed at a position closer to the operation handle 24 on the front surface portion 702 of the upper plate frame 700, such as the lower plate 23 in which the game ball is stored and the operation panel 69.
This is to prevent the discharged fluid from reaching the switches at 0. If the game ball flows into the game area in a wet state, it also becomes a factor that accelerates the deterioration of members such as nails and the circulation structure of the game ball. Therefore, the discharge port 779 may be located at a position where the discharged fluid does not interfere with the game ball, the operation panel of the game machine, the island equipment, or the like, and is not limited to the above-mentioned position.

Further, the discharge port 779 is provided with a sealing material that can be sealed, and may be configured so that the discharge port can be opened if necessary. Further, the discharge port 779 may be a mechanism that can be opened only by the administrator as needed.

[Sphere flow path unit]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 31, the ball flow path unit 783 arranged on the back side of the front frame 12 will be described. FIG. 28 is a back view (a) of the outer frame unit 17 (or the front frame 12).
) And the top view of the cross section (b). FIG. 29 is an exploded view of the outer frame unit 17 (or the front frame 12). FIG. 30 is an exploded view of the spherical flow path unit 783. FIG. 31 is a back view (a) and a perspective front view (b) of the spherical flow path unit base 786.

The front frame 12 has an external information terminal 71 capable of outputting information about the game machine 10 to an external device (a game hall internal management device such as a hall computer) on the back side, and a game supplied from a supply device installed in the island facility. An upper tank 448 for storing balls, a payout unit 780 for paying out game balls flowing down from the upper tank 448 to the upper plate 21, a payout control device 200 for controlling the payout unit 780, and a power supply for supplying electric power to various devices. The device 400 is provided (FIG. 28 (FIG. 28).
a)).

Further, the front frame 12 also includes an effect control relay board 781, an inter-unit relay board 782, and the like on the back side. The effect control relay board 781 has an effect connection unit and the like connected to the electrical wiring from the effect control device 300. The inter-table relay board 782 is a substrate that is electrically connected to the inter-unit device arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. The table-to-table device is, for example, a card sandwich or a cash sandwich arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. The payout control device 200, the power supply device 400, the effect control relay board 781, and the inter-unit relay board 782 may be configured as one unit (FIG. 29).

As described above, the front frame 12 has a ball launcher 530 and a foul ball catch unit 560 on the front side (FIG. 28 (b)).

The front frame 12 includes a ball flow path unit 783 between the power supply device 400 and the foul ball catch unit 560, and the ball launcher 530 between the payout control device 200 and the ball launcher 530.
A launch control device 784 (launch control board) for controlling the above is provided. The ball flow path unit 783 and the launch control device 784 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (FIGS. 28 (b) and 29).

As will be described later, the ball flow path unit 783 receives the game ball that has flowed down from the out port 30b of the game board 30 and flows it into the out tank. Further, the ball flow path unit 783 is a payout unit 7.
A game ball (prize ball) from 80 can be supplied to the upper plate 21 via the prize ball payout outlet 443, or the upper plate 21 can be supplied.
When the tank is full, the game ball from the payout unit 780 is supplied to the lower plate 23 via the first entrance 461 of the lower plate unit 29.

As shown in FIG. 30, the sphere flow path unit 783 includes a front lid member 785, a sphere flow path unit base 786 that abuts on the front lid member 785 from the rear, and a rear lid member that abuts on the sphere flow path unit base 786 from the rear. 787 and. The ball flow path unit base 786 is sandwiched between the front lid member 785 and the rear lid member 787 from the front and back, and various game ball flow paths are formed inside.

The front lid member 785 has a concave receiving portion 785a into which the prize ball payout outlet 443 of the ball flow path unit base 786 is fitted. Further, as will be described later, in the front lid member 785, out-ball flow paths 785b and 785c are formed by the flow path wall extending on the back surface (FIG. 31 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 30, the ball flow path unit base 786 has a connection passage 786a on the upper left side connected to the lower part of the payout unit 780 and to which a game ball (prize ball) is supplied from the payout unit 780. Further, the ball flow path unit base 786 is an intermediate plate 786 arranged substantially in the middle in the front-rear direction.
Has b. On the front side in front of the intermediate plate 786b, the ball flow path unit base 786 opens upward to the prize ball payout outlet 443 into which the game ball from the connection passage 786a flows in, and the game board 30
The out ball receiving port 786g for receiving the game ball flowing down from the out port 30b and the out sensor 786h for detecting the out ball are provided. The prize ball payout outlet 443 is a rectangular opening when viewed from the front, and opens at the front and the intermediate plate 786b. The out sensor 786h may be used as the out ball detection switch 74 described later.

As shown in FIG. 31A, on the back surface side behind the intermediate plate 786b, the ball flow path unit base 786 has a shelf portion 786c for receiving a game ball (prize ball) from the connection passage 786a and a shelf portion 7.
It includes an overflow passage 786d into which the game ball from the connection passage 786a flows in when the 86c overflows with the game ball. The game ball that has entered the shelf portion 786c flows into the prize ball payout outlet 443. The game ball from the prize ball payout outlet 443 is further supplied to the prize ball entrance 484 of the upper plate 21.
When the upper plate 21 is full (full), the game balls overflow to the shelf portion 786c (overflow), so that the game balls from the connection passage 786a cannot enter the shelf portion 786c and the overflow flow path 786d. (Arrow in FIG. 31 (a)). Overflow flow path 786d
Is formed by a flow path wall extending behind the intermediate plate 786b. The game ball that has passed through the overflow flow path 786d passes through the lower plate 23 through the first inlet 461 of the lower plate unit 29.
Is supplied to.

Further, on the back surface side behind the intermediate plate 786b, the ball flow path unit base 786 has an overflow sensor 786e that detects the collision pressure (ball pressure) of the game ball (overflow ball) in the overflow flow path 786d, and an overflow sensor. A ball pressure receiving member 786f arranged on the left side of the 786e is provided. The ball pressure receiving member 786f is an overflow flow path 78.
The notch at the right end of 6d is faced in a swingable state by the support shaft at the upper end. The overflow sensor 786e sends a signal to the game control device 100 when the ball pressure receiving member 786f is pressed toward the right side by the ball pressure.

Further, the ball flow path unit base 786 includes a special flow path 786i formed substantially parallel to the overflow flow path 786d on the back surface side behind the intermediate plate 786b. For example, the special flow path 786i may be used as a recovery flow path in which the valve of the upper tank 448 is opened to allow the game ball from the upper tank 448 to flow down and collect it to the outside of the game machine 10. The special flow path 786i is also formed by a flow path wall extending behind the intermediate plate 786b.

As shown in FIG. 31B, in the front lid member 785, an upper out-ball flow path 785b and a lower out-ball flow path 785c are formed by a flow path wall extending to the back surface. A game ball (out ball) from the out ball receiving port 786 g flows into the upper out ball flow path 785b. Upper out ball flow path 7
A game ball that has passed through the upper out ball flow path 785b flows into the lower out ball flow path 785c that communicates with the 85b, and is then collected in the out tank. The above-mentioned out sensor 786h (out ball detection switch 74) provided on the ball flow path unit base 786 is arranged at the connection portion between the upper out ball flow path 785b and the lower out ball flow path 785c.

[Visual window]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the viewing window portion 789 provided on the lower right side of the glass frame 15 (front frame unit) will be described. FIG. 32 shows a right side view (a) of the glass frame 15 and a partially enlarged view (b) thereof, and a perspective view (c) and a partially enlarged view (d) of the glass frame 15 as viewed from below.
).

The viewing window portion 789 is a front frame base unit 480 (or a precision plate unit 2) of the glass frame 15.
The back plate 742 (FIG. 19) of the rear member 740 of 0 and the front portion 702 of the precision plate unit 20 (FIG. 1).
9) It is formed between the rear end portions 702c. The viewing window portion 789 is located below the mounting portion 722 of the upper plate unit 20 (upper plate unit main body 680).

The viewing window portion 789 is for visually recognizing the inside of the precision plate unit 20 attached to the glass frame 15 from the right side or the like when the glass frame 15 is opened with respect to the front frame 12. A transparent cover for protecting the inside of the precision plate unit 20 may be fitted in the viewing window portion 789. When the glass frame 15 is closed with respect to the front frame 12, the viewing window portion 789 is closed by the right protruding portion 29b (FIG. 5) of the lower plate unit 29.

Through the viewing window portion 789, the above-mentioned opening / closing lever 733 (FIG. 19) in the upper plate unit 20 and its operation can be visually recognized from the right side. The opening / closing lever 733 moves the opening / closing member 734 in response to the operation of the upper plate operating unit 735. When the opening / closing member 734 is opened, the game ball of the upper plate 21 flows down to the lower plate 23. Even if the opening / closing lever 733 is inside the upper plate unit 20, it can be visually recognized through the viewing window portion 789 by the external light from the right lens member 681 or the light leaked from the LED substrate 721, and the operation of the opening / closing member 734 is confirmed. be able to.

Further, the LED substrate 721 (FIG. 1) in the precision plate unit 20 is passed through the viewing window portion 789.
9) and its light emission operation can be visually recognized from the diagonally lower rear side. The front portion 702 of the upper plate unit 20 and the right lens member 681 are on the right side of the curved bay entrance end portion 480c located on the lower right side of the front frame base unit 480 and the back plate 742 of the upper plate unit 20. It bulges outward from the curved bay entrance end 742c located in. Therefore, the viewing window portion 789
Through, the LED substrate 721 that irradiates the right lens member 681 with light can be visually recognized.

[Protruding effect unit (decorative device)]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34, protrusion effect units provided on both sides of the glass frame 15 (front frame unit), that is, decorative devices 18b and 18c will be described. FIG. 33
Is an exploded view (a) in which the decorative devices 18b and 18c are separated from the glass frame 15, and an exploded view (b) of one of the projecting effect units (decorative device 18b). FIG. 34 is a front view of one of the projecting effect units (decorative device 18b).

As shown in FIG. 33 (a), the decorative devices 18b and 18c are front frame base units 480, respectively.
It is attached to the attachment portions 790a and 790b on both sides in the left-right direction. Decoration device 18
b and 18c are provided on the outside of the vertical plates 482b and 482c of the front frame inner member 482, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 33 (b), the projecting effect unit (decorative device 18b) is combined with the LED substrate 791, the back cover 792, the reflector 793, and the inner lens 79.
4, a side cover 795, and an outer lens 796 are provided.

The LED board 791 has a plurality of (10) LEDs in the left column and a plurality (16) in the right column.
LED 791b is attached to the mounting portion 790a on the right side portion of the front frame base unit 480. The transparent back cover 792 is arranged in front of the LED substrate 791 and is fastened to the reflector 793 and the inner lens 794. In addition, the back cover 792 is
The plurality of recesses 792a at the jagged left end correspond to the plurality of LEDs 791a in the left column. Therefore, the back cover 792 covers a part of the plurality of LEDs 791b in the right column, but does not cover the plurality of LEDs 791a in the left column. The reflector 793 is entirely metal or metal-plated to reflect light and is fastened to the back cover 792. The reflector 793
It has a plurality of (10) openings 793a at positions facing the plurality of LEDs 791a in the left column.

The inner lens 794 is fastened to the back cover 792, and is arranged so as to sandwich the reflector 793 together with the back cover 792. The left surface of the inner lens 794 conforms to the reflector 793 in shape. Further, the inner lens 794 is made of a resin colored in milky white and transmits a little light. The inner lens 794 and the outer lens 796 are fastened to the side cover 795 at the same position. Further, the side cover 795 has a plurality of openings 795a as decorations. The transparent outer lens 796 is the inner lens 794.
And engages with the reflector 793. The outer lens 796 is a reflector 7.
It has a plurality of engagement receiving portions 796a that engage with each of the plurality of engaging portions 793b of 93.

As shown in FIG. 34, the LED 791a in the left column of the LED substrate 791 is a reflector 79.
Since it is located at the opening 793a of No. 3 and is exposed, it can be visually recognized through the transparent outer lens 796. The direct light from the LED 791a in the left column and the reflected light (indirect light) reflected from the LED 791a in the left column by the reflector 793 are directed toward the center side (inside) of the game machine 10 via the transparent outer lens 796. Since it reaches the player, it is possible to produce an effective light emission. Further, since the back cover 792 does not cover the LED 791a in the left column, the light from the LED 791a can pass straight through the opening 793a of the reflector 793 without being refracted by the back cover 792.

On the other hand, the LED 791b in the right column of the LED substrate 791 is covered with the milky white colored inner lens 794 (dotted line in FIG. 34) and is not exposed, so that it cannot be visually recognized. L in the right column
Since the ED791b illuminates the outside of the gaming machine 10 softly through the inner lens 794, the lighting mode is different from that of the LED 791a in the left column, and it is possible to produce an effective light emission in addition to the effect of the LED 791a in the left column.

[Action / effect of the first embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 provided with a display device (for example, a display device 41) capable of executing a predetermined effect includes an operation means (effect button unit 750, operation panel 690, etc.) that can be operated by the player. A flow means (for example, outer peripheral groove 754c, front guide port 766 g, lateral guide port 766i) capable of flowing the fluid flowing around the operating means into the gaming machine, and the flow of the fluid flowed by the flow means. (For example, communication space S2 (reservoir 71)
3), pedestal surrounding portion 730e, 730f (reservoir 777a, 777b), bottom surrounding portion 7
30a, 730b (reservoir 778a, 778b), communication space S1, communication space S3, S4
, S5, S6). The operating means may include a circuit board (for example, LED board 767, relay board 737), and may include, for example, a circuit board.

In such a gaming machine 10, the fluid can be made to flow inside the gaming machine by the flow means, and the fluid that has been flowed into the inside of the gaming machine by the flow means by the delay means. Delay the flow. Therefore, during the game of the player, the fluid flows along the surface of the gaming machine 10 (the surface of the upper plate unit 20 and the like) to the player side, so that the player is distracted by the fluid and the game is played. It is possible to reduce the situation where the interest is reduced.

Further, in such a gaming machine 10, since a fluid such as water does not enter the operating means (effect button unit 750, etc.), a malfunction (failure) of the circuit board (electronic component) in the operating means caused by water leakage or the like occurs. There is no problem that the operation effect related to the game cannot be executed, and the player's interest can be continued. Further, in such a gaming machine 10, a gaming area generated by discharging a fluid such as water to the outside of the gaming machine and causing a dirty gaming ball to invade the inside of the gaming machine (gaming area 32) by touching the fluid. Deterioration of the members and the like in 32 can also be prevented. Furthermore, according to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required to clean the fluid discharged from the gaming machine.

Further, according to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a shielding means (for example, a button frame 752) that shields the fluid flowing around the operating means from the player.

In such a gaming machine 10, even when a fluid is dropped on the operating means during the game of the player, the fluid flowing around the operating means (effect button unit 750) by the shielding means. Is shielded from the player, so that the player does not get distracted by the fluid and detract from the interest.

Further, according to the first embodiment, the delay means is a storage unit for storing at least a part of the fluid (for example, a communication space S2 (storage unit 713), a pedestal surrounding portion 730e, 730f (storage unit 7).
77a, 777b), bottom surrounding portion 730a, 730b (reservoir 778a, 778b))
Have.

In such a gaming machine 10, since the delay means includes a storage unit, at least a part of the fluid can be stored in the storage unit. As a result, even when the capacity of the fluid is large, the flow of the fluid can be significantly delayed, and the player is not distracted by the fluid and loses his or her interest.

Further, according to the first embodiment, the LE in the circuit board (for example, the effect button unit 750).
D board 767, balance display unit 690a arranged on the operation panel 690, ball lending button 690
b, the electronic circuit board 697a for the return button 690c (see FIG. 25), the volume adjustment buttons 690d, 690e, and the electronic circuit board 697b for the cross key 690f (FIG. 25).
(See))) delay means (eg, reservoir 713, reservoir 777a, 777b, reservoir 778)
It is located higher than a, 778b).

In such a gaming machine 10, the fluid is the LED substrate 7 in the effect button unit 750.
The circuit board because it flows toward the delay means located at a position lower than the circuit board such as 67, the electronic circuit board 697a (see FIG. 25) and the electronic circuit board 697b (see FIG. 25) arranged on the operation panel 690. Can be prevented from coming into contact with the fluid.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the effect button unit 750 is inclined forward so that the end portion on the player side is lower than the end portion on the board surface side. Therefore, the fluid dropped on the effect button unit 750 is made to flow toward the player side (front), and is promptly sent to the flow means (front guide port 766 g) connected to the delay means (communication spaces S1 and S2). Can be guided.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, three ribs 776 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b surrounded by the concave protruding portion forming the front guide port 766g in the button lower base 766. Be done. Each of the ribs 776 is formed so as to extend in the vertical direction (from the upper side to the lower side) at substantially equal intervals, and each of the ribs 776 is formed from the upper side to the lower side from the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b. It is formed so that the height is high. Therefore, the fluid easily flows through the rib 776 and flows into the front guide port 766 g.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, in the front portion of the effect button unit 750 in a state where each part of the upper plate unit 20 is assembled, the outside of the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens main body 754 and the button lower base 766. Front guide port 766 formed in the annulus portion 766b of the
The fluid flows into the communication space S1 formed between the outside of g and the inside of the button frame 752 assembled so as to shield the two. After that, the outside of the lower stage portion 710 and the upper stage portion 712 located at the front portion of the upper plate frame 700 in which the button base 730 and the effect button unit 750 (button unit base 770) are housed, and the central sharp portion 69 of the operation panel 690.
The fluid flows into the communication space S2 formed between the inside of 6a and the inside.

The communication spaces S1 and S2 are inside the gaming machine and are shielded from the outside, and the fluid does not flow out from the middle of the communication spaces S1 and S2. Therefore, during the game of the player, the game is played. People will not be distracted by fluids and lose their interest.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the lower portion 710 constituting the first storage portion 713
The bottom surfaces 710a and 710b are formed in a substantially V shape when viewed from the player side. Therefore, it is easy to store the fluid on the lower side of the lower portion 710. In addition, the front plate portion 696 of the operation panel 690
When the central sharpened portion 696a of the above is transparent, the bottom surfaces 710a and 710b of the lower portion 710 are visible to the player. In this case, the bottom surface 7 of the lower portion 710, which is visible to the player.
The 10a and 710b include a right lens base 706 extending to the right of the precision plate frame 700 and a right lens base 706.
It is designed to be connected to the left lens base 707 extending to the left. For this reason, it is configured to have a function of storing fluids but not to spoil the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the width of the upper portion 712 in the left-right direction (partition portion 7).
The distance between 12c and the partition portion 712d) is narrower than the width of the widest portion formed in the left-right direction of the lower stage portion 710 formed in a V shape. Therefore, the fluid flowing down from the upper tier 712 can be quickly flowed into the wide lower tier 710.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the lateral notch 754f formed in the left-right direction of the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754 and the lateral guide port 766i of the button lower base 766 are positioned to correspond to each other. Is formed in. As a result, the fluid can flow not only in the front direction of the effect button unit 750 but also in the lateral direction (left-right direction).

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, on the right side of the effect button unit 750, the outside of the lateral notch 754f of the button lens body 754a and the lateral guide port 766i of the button bottom base 766, and the inside of the button frame 752. It is provided with a communication space S3 formed between and. Further, the outer side of the base 766 under the button in the radial direction and the recess 6 on the panel side of the operation panel 690
A communication space S4 is provided which passes between the button unit base 770 and the radial outer side of the button unit base 770 and is connected to the right side reinforcing plate 739a. Further, a pedestal surrounding portion 730e to which the communication space S4 is connected is provided.

The communication spaces S3 and S4 and the pedestal surrounding portion 730e are regions shielded from the player and are shielded from the outside, so that fluid does not flow out from the middle of the communication spaces S3 and S4. Therefore, during the player's game, the player is not distracted by the fluid and the interest is not reduced.

Further, in such a gaming machine 10, when the capacity of the fluid exceeds the capacity of the base surrounding portion 730e, it can be flowed into the bottom surrounding portion 730a. Therefore, even if the capacity of the fluid is large, the fluid does not flow out to the outside of the gaming machine or the outflow is delayed, so that the player is distracted by the fluid during the game of the player. Does not reduce.

Further, the base portion 730c on which the base portion surrounding portion 730e is formed is configured to provide the right side reinforcing plate mounting portion 731d, and is a portion that is not easily damaged or deteriorated due to water leakage. Further, the bottom surrounding portion 730e is configured to support the button unit base 770. By providing the function of storing the fluid in such a position, even if the fluid is retained inside the gaming machine 10, the gaming ball may be soiled, the circuit board of the gaming machine may be touched, or a member in the gaming area may be used. Can avoid problems such as deterioration.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, as described above, the fluid can be made to flow inside the gaming machine by the flowing means, and is also made to flow inside the gaming machine by the flowing means by the delay means. Delay the flow of fluid. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, the speed at which the fluid flows into the inside of the gaming machine (inside the precision plate unit 20) becomes slow, so that the fluid such as water flows into the circuit board (for example, LED substrate 767, relay board 737). Before reaching the important part such as
The fluid can be evaporated or dispersed. Therefore, it is possible to protect an important part inside the gaming machine from fluids, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered due to a failure of the gaming machine or the like.

The above-mentioned effect is similarly exhibited on the left side of the upper plate unit 20 (effect button unit 750).

[Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 50. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first real, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

[Game board]
The game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. FIG. 35 shows
It is a front view (normal gaming state) of the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a front view (a state suggesting a specific mode) of the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment.
FIG. 37 is a front view (specific gaming state) of the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 35, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 30a as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the game board main body 30a is used.
A game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of a.

A center case (front component) 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, an effect display device (variable display device) that variablely displays (variablely displays) a plurality of identification information.
Display device 41 is arranged. Further, behind the window portion of the center case 40 and in front of the display device 41, a movable accessory 820, a falling accessory 810, and the like are arranged around the display device 41 when viewed from the front.

The display device 41 is provided with, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 via the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or a CRT.

On the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, a plurality of variable display areas (variable display area 610,
615) is provided, and identification information (special symbol) and a character (for example, character 826a (FIG. 40)) that directs a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. others,
Images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

For example, in the central part of the display device 41, there is a change in a special decorative symbol (large symbol) as identification information (large symbol).
The variable display area 610 for displaying ↓↓↓) is displayed. On the right side of the display device 41, in order from the top, the fourth symbol 671 of the special figure 1, the fourth symbol 672 of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660,
Special figure 2 The reserved number display unit 660 and the variable display area 615 are displayed.

The fourth symbol 671 of the special figure 1 indicates whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed. If it is "○", it is being executed, and if it is "x", it is not being executed ( Indicates that there is no hold or suspension). Further, the fourth symbol 672 of the special figure 2 indicates whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. If it is "○", it is being executed, and if it is "x", it is not being executed. Indicates that it is medium (no hold).

The special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 is the hold number of the special figure 1 variable display game described later (the maximum hold number is 4).
) Is displayed. The special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 displays the hold number (maximum hold number is 4) of the special figure 2 variable display game described later. The variation display area 615 displays variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative reduced symbol (small symbol) as identification information.

At the bottom of the display device 41, the hold of the special figure 1 variable display game described later (first start storage) or the hold of the special figure 2 variable display game described later (second start memory) is displayed as a hold display 633. The display unit 630a and the hold digestion area 640 for displaying the variable hold display 633a indicating the hold related to the running variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game) are displayed. In addition, the hold display 633 and the variable hold display 633a are colored according to the expectation of the big hit.
It is possible to produce a notice by changing the shape, pattern, etc. and displaying it.

Further, a mode display unit 674 (first suggestion information) for displaying the effect mode (stage) by character information is displayed on the upper left side of the display device 41. Arbitrary wording is applied to the display of the effect mode according to the game state. For example, in the normal game state (a state in which the game state is not advantageous to the player), "normal mode" is displayed (FIG. 35). ), In a specific gaming state such as a time saving state, "?? mode" is displayed (FIG. 36), and in a special gaming state (big hit, small hit), "tiger mode" is displayed (FIG. 37).

In addition, by operating the effect operation device (the effect button 25), the player intervenes the operation of the player in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out. For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that announces the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory in advance. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device (effect button 25) during non-execution.

The game state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special gaming state is, for example, a time saving state as a specific gaming state, a state in which the probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) is high (probability change state, probability fluctuation state), or a big hit state (big hit state) in a variable display game.
It is a special game state) and a small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There are things that continue until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, a winning device or the like provided with the specific area 86 is provided, and the specific area 8 is provided.
When the game ball passes through No. 6, a probable change state is generated. If a specific type of big hit (probability change big hit, etc.) is won by the big hit symbol random number, the specific area 86 is opened for a long time, the game ball passes reliably, and the probability change state can be entered after the big hit is completed. In this embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, the probabilistic state (high probability state) is assumed to continue until the next big hit occurs.

The gaming machine 10 is configured to launch a gaming ball from a ball launching device 530 into a gaming area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A return valve 814 and a valve sensor 81 are located at the entrance of the game area 32 (the exit of the launch ball guide passage 33).
4a is arranged. The return valve 814 is arranged so that the lower end is a fixed end and the upper end is a free end so that the return valve 814 can rotate.
(Not shown) is attached.

The return valve 814 is brought into contact with the game ball launched from the ball launcher 530 to form the game area 3.
The game ball is introduced into the game area 32 by rotating in the direction of opening the entrance of 2. After that, the return valve 81
No. 4 rotates in the opposite direction due to the urging force when the game ball separates from the return valve 814, and the game area 32
It is designed to block the entrance of. This prevents the game ball introduced in the game area 32 from returning to the ball launcher side.

The valve sensor 814a transmits a detection signal to the game control device 100 each time the return valve 814 rotates in the direction of opening the inlet of the game area 32 (or each time the return valve 814 rotates in the direction of closing the inlet of the game area 32).
Send to. The detection signal is used to count the number of launched balls (or the number of out balls) of the game ball. The detection signal may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 (described later) and used for effect control.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper portion and the right side portion of the center case 40, respectively. Upper effect unit 40c and side effect unit 40d
Consists of a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

Further, in the center case 40, a game ball flowing down the game area 32 is placed in the center case 40.
The inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding to the inside of the warp passage 40e, and the stage portion 40b on which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e can roll are provided.

At a position below the stage portion 40b in the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is a start winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area) 36 that gives a start condition for the special figure variation display game. It is provided. Therefore, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b can easily win the starting winning opening 36. If the game ball wins in the starting winning opening 36, Special Figure 1
The variable display game is executed, but if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, it is treated as a hold (maximum number of holds is 4). Further, just below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30b for collecting the game balls that did not win in the winning opening is provided.

In the game area 32 at the lower left of the center case 40, a general winning opening unit 808 provided with a plurality of general winning openings 35 and a batch display device 50 is arranged. Further, the general winning opening unit 808 is also provided with an out opening 30b. Here, the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is performed by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n provided in the general winning opening 35 (see FIG. 79).
Detected by. The general winning opening unit 808 has a sticker 81 to decorate it.
5 is pasted. The seal 815 will be described later.

The batch display device 50 (see FIG. 39B) is a display device in which eight LED lamps arranged side by side are arranged vertically in four stages and the total number is 32 LED lamps. The batch display device 50 includes, for example, a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display 51) composed of eight LED lamps in the uppermost row and displaying a special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and a second row from the top. 2nd special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 2 display 5) that displays the special figure 2 fluctuation display game composed of 8 LED lamps.
2) and.

Further, the batch display device 50 is composed of the 5th to 7th LED lamps from the left at the bottom, and has a variation display unit (general map display 53) for displaying a normal map variation display game, and a second row from the bottom. It is composed of the first and second LED lamps from the left of the special figure 1 variable display game start (
Special figure 1 holding display unit 54 for notifying the number of stored items, and the third and fourth LED lamps from the left in the second row from the bottom. The special figure 2 holding display unit 55 and the like are provided.

Further, the batch display device 50 is composed of the seventh LED lamp from the left in the second stage from the bottom, and notifies that it is right-handed (when it should be right-handed) or left-handed (normal time). 1
A second game status display unit that is composed of a game status display unit 57 (first game status display) and the rightmost LED lamp in the second row from the bottom and lights up when a time reduction state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time reduction state. It is composed of 58 (second game status indicator) and the LED lamp arranged on the far right at the bottom, and displays that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. 3 Game status display unit 59 (3rd game status display, probability status display unit) and 1 from the left at the bottom
It is composed of the fourth to fourth LED lamps, and has a round display unit 60 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, the upper limit of the number of rounds).

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by the variable display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to the case where the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are configured by an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs in this way, and may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

In addition, when executing variable display, all LED lamps turn on and off all (all LE).
Simultaneous blinking of D), circular lighting (lights on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals from any one LED lamp), or lighting and extinguishing (blinking) by a predetermined number of LED lamps among a plurality of LED lamps. ) Or by circular lighting.

Even in the normal map display 53, the variable display game is played by all the LEs constituting the normal map display 53.
It is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the D lamp is repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the normal figure display 53 can be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 arranged in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 has a design (
Lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that execute variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguishing display as the fourth special symbol described later, and start (hold) storage number notification of each special figure variation display game It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED). The lamp display device 80 is the effect control device 3.
It is controlled by 00 (described later).

The lamp display unit 1 (top LED) and the lamp display unit 2 (second LED from the top) blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. While the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the normal figure display 53 of the batch display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display unit 3 (third special figure 1 hold LED 1 from the top) and the lamp display unit 4 (fourth special figure 1 hold LED 2 from the top) are in the special figure 1 depending on the combination of the off state, the lit state, and the blinking state.
The number of holds (the number of first start storage) is displayed. Similarly, the lamp display unit 5 (the fifth special figure 2 from the top)
The hold LED 1) and the lamp display unit 6 (the lowermost special figure 2 hold LED 2) display the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) according to the combination of the off state, the on state, and the blinking state. The lamp display unit 3-6 ends the display of the number of holds due to the occurrence of a big hit, but when it is not in the big hit state (
In the display device 41 (including the case where the reach described later occurs), the number of holds is displayed.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a flow path unit 802, a large winning opening unit 800, a general electric unit 804, and a large winning opening unit 806 are provided in this order from the top.

The flow path unit 802 forms a flow path including the normal drawing start gate 34, and causes the game ball to flow down to the large winning opening unit 800 regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34. .. Here, inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 79) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. Then, when the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

The large winning opening unit 800 is a combination of a general winning opening 35, a special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening solenoid 39b, opening / closing door 39c (blade member 914a in FIG. 72)), a specific area 86, and the like. .. In the large winning opening unit 800, the game ball flowing down from the flow path unit 802 wins a prize in the general winning opening 35 or flows down the flow path leading to the special variable winning device 39. Here, the special variable winning device 39 is normally closed, and the game ball flowing down the flow path is caused to flow down to the general electric unit 804. However, when the result mode of the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable display game is in the special gaming state (big hit), or when the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game described later is in the special gaming state (big hit, small hit), it is predetermined. The time is open and the game ball is in a state where it can win a prize in the special variable winning device 39, and further has a configuration in which a specific region 86 can be won with a predetermined probability. The details of the large winning opening unit 800 will be described in the fourth embodiment.

The game control device 100 can detect the passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V prize) via a sensor (specific area switch 72 (V switch, FIG. 72)) or the like, and when the V prize is detected, the big hit ends. It is confirmed that the state will shift to the probable change state later, and the effect control device 300 described later will be used.
Information indicating that there was a V prize (command to pass through a specific area, etc.) is transmitted to. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify the V prize on the display device 41 or the like.

The Fuden unit 804 forms a flow path that includes the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2, second starting winning area), and the game ball that did not win the normal variable winning device 37 is a large winning opening. Let it flow down to unit 806. Here, the normal variable winning device 37 opens the movable member 37b for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) when the result of the above-mentioned normal fluctuation display game is a hit, and the game ball can be won. Then, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37, the special figure 2
The variable display game is executed, but if the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, it is treated as a hold (maximum number of holds is 4).

The large winning opening unit 806 forms a flow path including the special variable winning opening device 38 (large winning opening solenoid 38b, sliding opening / closing door 38c), and is a game ball that did not win the special variable winning opening device 38. Is flowed down to the out opening 30b directly below the starting winning opening 36. Here, the special variable winning device 38 is normally closed, and the game ball does not win. However, when the result mode of the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable display game becomes a special gaming state (big hit) (or when the result mode of the above-mentioned special figure 2 variable display game becomes a special gaming state (big hit, small hit)), it is predetermined. The time is open and the game ball is ready to win the special variable prize device 38.

The RUSH lamp 812 (second lighting means) is arranged above the large winning opening unit 806 and on the left side of the general electric unit 804. As the RUSH lamp 812, for example, a lamp capable of full-color lighting is applied. Further, the RUSH lamp 812 is a production control device 30.
It is controlled by 0, and the lighting state (including color change) changes based on the game state. Especially, R
The USH lamp 812 lights up (blinks) so that, for example, the characters "RUSH" appear when a probable change state (a state in which a small hit rush (small hit RUSH) described later can occur) occurs (FIG. 37). Here, the characters "↓ RUSH ↓" (or "RUSH") of the RUSH lamp 812 may be printed on the surface of the RUSH lamp 812. The RUSH lamp 812 is
Multiple illuminants (or "RUSH") arranged to form the letters "↓ RUSH ↓" (or "RUSH")
It may be configured by (LED etc.). By displaying "↓" next to "RUSH", it is possible to surely draw attention to the large winning opening unit 806 in which the small hit rush is occurring.

The movable accessory 820 has an arc-shaped shape as a whole and is provided with the accessory lamp 820a (first light emitting means), and is a accessory that is controlled and moved by the effect control device 300 according to the gaming state. In the initial state (normal gaming state), the movable accessory 820 is arranged at a position covering the left side of the display device 41, for example, as shown in FIG. 35. At this time, the accessory lamp 82
0a is arranged on the back side of the warp passage 40e, and has a light emitting mode for decorating the warp passage 40e from the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the movable accessory 820 includes an upper guide member 954 (FIG. 41) arranged on the left side of the movable accessory 820 and a lower guide member 9 arranged below the movable accessory 820.
By sliding along 56 (FIG. 41), it moves in an arc. Movable accessory 820
The structure of is described later.

As described above, when the accessory lamp 820a is arranged in FIG. 35, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged at a position on the back side of the warp passage 40e and is used to display an effect of decorating the warp passage 40e. On the other hand, the accessory lamp 820a moves according to the movement of the movable accessory 820. For example, when the movable accessory 820 moves to an intermediate position as shown in FIG. 36, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged at the lower part of the display device 41 and is used for displaying the effect using the effect button 25 as described later. Further, for example, when the movable accessory 820 moves to the final position as shown in FIG. 37, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged at the lower right of the display device 41 as described later, and the variation display of the variation display game and the variation display game. It is used to display the result (missing, small hit or big hit). That is, the accessory lamp 82
The 0a moves its position according to the gaming state, and uses different light emitting modes to produce different purposes. Since the RUSH lamp 812 is lit when the accessory lamp 820a (movable accessory 820) is arranged as shown in FIG. 37, the RUSH lamp 81 is lit.
It is possible to suggest a probable change state not only by lighting 2 but also by the position of the accessory lamp 820a (movable accessory 820).

The falling accessory 810 is an accessory having a longitudinal direction in the left-right direction in the initial state, and its right side portion is pivotally supported and can be rotated by a motor and a gear. Therefore, the falling accessory 810 can be rotated by driving the motor with the right side as the fixed end and the left side as the free end, and the position where the left side portion of the falling accessory 810 overlaps the display device 41 when the motor is driven in the positive direction. By rotating to, and driving the motor in the opposite direction, it can rotate in the opposite direction and return to the initial state. The motor is controlled by the effect control device 300. An opening 810a is provided on the left side of the falling accessory 810.
Is formed, and various decorations (see FIG. 40) can be attached to the opening 810a.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the normal map variation display game, and the special map variation display game will be described in detail.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a gaming ball from the ball launching device 530 toward the gaming area 32 through the launching ball guide passage 33. The launched game ball is in the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32.
Starting gate 34, general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 3
7 or the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are won, or the game flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, 39, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning opening is a payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21 through.

The normal figure start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 79) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal map variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

When the normal map fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map fluctuation display game has already been played and the normal map fluctuation display game has not ended, or when the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, it is normal. When the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, the storage number is added (+1) if the normal drawing start storage number is less than the upper limit number.

The hit determination random value for determining the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game is stored in the normal map start memory, and when the hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal map variation display is performed. The game is a hit and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal map fluctuation display game is executed by the normal map display 53 provided in the batch display device 50. The normal identification information 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (normal figure) is lit and a deviation when the normal identification information (normal figure) is off, and the normal identification information fluctuates by blinking the LED. The display is performed, and after a predetermined variation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal figure random value extracted when passing through the normal figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the normal symbol displayed on the normal figure display 53 stops in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, by driving the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 79), the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 is converted into an open state. Winning is allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 79) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 79). The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is the special figure 2. It is detected as a winning ball for starting a variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

When the start winning ball of the special figure variation display game is detected, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, each variation pattern random value, and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as the special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times). The stored number of the special figure start prize memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display unit 54 and the special figure 2 hold display unit 55 for notifying the start prize number of the batch display device 50, and the display device 4
It is also displayed on the display screen of 1.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 is a special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory.
Run a variable display game.

The special figure 1 variable display game (1st special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (2nd special figure variable display game) have identification information (identification information) on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. This is performed by displaying the special symbol (special symbol) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the predetermined result mode.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called simultaneous variable machine, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be put into an execution state at the same time (both) independently of each other. If a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game (there is no small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game in this embodiment), the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result. do. When a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result.

If a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the running special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. In this case, the measurement of the fluctuation time by the special figure 1 game processing timer is interrupted, and the special figure 1
Derivation of the result of the variable display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) can be postponed, and the interrupted special figure 1 variable display game can be restarted after the small hit operation related to the special figure 2 variable display game is completed. ..

Further, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 by right-handed in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game starts to fluctuate, but basically fluctuates for a long time (long fluctuation, for example, 10 minutes). During this period, if a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game, the game will be forcibly removed and stopped.

Further, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game in the display device 41, for example, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third). It is performed by starting the variable display (scroll display) in the order of the special symbol), stopping the variable symbols in order after a predetermined time, and displaying the result of the special symbol variable display game. Further, on the display device 41, various effects such as the appearance of characters are displayed in order to improve the interest. Moreover,
In the decorative special figure variation display game, the lamp display device 8 is used as another decorative special pattern (identification information).
In the lamp display units 1 and 2 of 0, the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) fluctuates due to the repetition (blinking) of the lighting display and the extinguishing display. The fluctuation display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 is stopped by "turning off" in the case of a miss and "lighting" in the case of a big hit or a small hit after a predetermined time from the start. In the display device 41, the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) is displayed as the fourth symbol 671 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 672 of the special figure 2.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game in the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be executed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. Further, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game may be in an execution state (executed state) at the same time.

When the game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and the jackpot state (
It becomes a special game state). Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b (FIG. 7).
By energizing (see 9), the large winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the large winning opening provided in the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 opens wide until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, the player can acquire many game balls. Granted.

When the game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. As a result, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and a small hit state is established. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

At this time, the special variable winning device 38 and the special variable winning device 39 are the large winning opening solenoid 38.
b. By energizing the large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 79), the large winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time. Since the full opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state), the game that the player can acquire in the small hit state than in the big hit state. The value (number of balls acquired) is small. In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be referred to as the first special gaming state, and the small hit state may be referred to as the second special gaming state.

In the present embodiment, in the small hit state, only the special variable winning device 38 operates and only the lower large winning opening is opened, but in the small hit state, both the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are used. It may be configured to operate and open both the lower prize opening and the upper prize opening.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state, the small hit RUSH (rush) state in which small hits frequently occur due to the special figure 2 variation display game is obtained. Then, in the small hit rush, the special variable winning device 38 is opened at a high frequency. Even in the short time state, the small hit RU
A configuration that is in an SH (rush) state is also possible.

Here, the difference between a big hit and a small hit will be described.

A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38, 39 is set. The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. note that,"
The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has the meaning of.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, it is special by setting the small hit flag. The variable winning devices 38 and 39 are opened.

After the end of the big hit state, if there is a V prize during the big hit state, it shifts to a probable change state, and if there is no V prize, it shifts to a normal gaming state or the like. On the other hand, after the end of the small hit state (shorter time than the big hit state), the game returns to the original gaming state before the start of the small hit state. Although the jackpot probability is low in the jackpot state, the jackpot probability before the start of the small hit state is maintained in the small hit state (the probability state does not change in the small hit state). Therefore, the small hit rush state in which small hits occur frequently continues from the start of the probability variation state to the occurrence of the big hit state (until the result of the special figure fluctuation display game becomes the big hit result), and the big hit probability throughout the small hit rush state. Is maintained at a high probability (probability fluctuation state).

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but the special figure variation display games are not executed at the same time. Is set.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the start port 1 switch 36 in the start winning port 36 is not particularly limited.
a, Starting port 2 switch 37a, gate switch 34a, winning port switch 35a, large winning opening switch 43 (lower large winning opening switch 38a, upper large winning opening switch 39a, FIG. 79), specific area in the normal variable winning device 37. The switch 72 (V switch, FIGS. 72, 79) is provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and is a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. (Hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used (FIG. 79). Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like is a machine. Microswitches with similar contacts can be used (FIG. 7).
9).

The details of the game control related to the game (variable display game, etc.), the effect control related to the effect, and the game control device 100 for executing the game control and the effect control device 300 for executing the effect control are based on the block diagram and the flowchart. Will be described later in the fifth embodiment.

[Arrangement of accessory lamps, lighting mode of accessory lamps and RUSH lamps]
As shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, in the present embodiment, the mode display unit 674, the RUSH lamp 812, and the large winning opening unit 806 displayed on the display device 41 are substantially diagonal lines (from the upper left to the lower right) of the game board 30. They are arranged so as to be lined up on a virtual line 822 (broken line in FIG. 37) forming a line). In particular, in the special variable winning device 38, a sliding opening / closing door 38c for opening / closing the large winning opening is arranged on the virtual line 822 (FIG. 37). The return valve 814 is arranged so that at least its tip overlaps with the virtual line 822 by rotating.

The accessory lamp 820a is in a normal gaming state (FIG. 35) and a specific gaming state (excluding the probable change state).
(FIG. 36), it is arranged at a position separated from the virtual line 822. At this time, the RUSH lamp 812 is basically turned off. In the normal game state and the specific game state (excluding the probability change state), the accessory lamp 820a may be turned on for the production as shown in FIG. 36.

As shown in FIG. 35, the accessory lamp 820a is the effect control device 3 in the normal gaming state.
It lights up based on the control of 00 to decorate the warp passage 40e. For example, when the game ball wins in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the variable display game described later is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 36, when a specific gaming state (excluding a probable change state) such as a time saving state occurs, a mode display unit 674 with "?? mode" is displayed in the upper left portion of the display device 41, and a movable accessory is displayed. The 820 moves to an intermediate position so that the accessory lamp 820a is arranged at a position substantially at the center of the lower part of the display device 41. Further, the accessory lamp 820a and the display device 41 are provided for the effect by the effect control device 300.

For example, in the center of the display device 41, there is a display saying "Turn off by button operation" and a display in which the characters "PUSH" displayed below it are surrounded by an ellipse, which promotes the operation of the effect button 25. Information 618a is displayed. At this time, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged at a position directly below the operation promotion information 618a, and all the LED lamps (7) constituting the accessory lamp 820a are turned on as an initial state. Further, at a position between the operation promotion information 618a of the display device 41 and the accessory lamp 820a, the remaining number information 618b indicating the remaining number of LED lamps to be turned off such as "7 more" is displayed.

Each time the player presses the effect button 25 in the above state, the LED lamps constituting the accessory lamp 820a are turned off one by one, and the remaining number indicated by the remaining number information 618b is also reduced by one. .. Then, when all the LED lamps are turned off, the display device 41 and the accessory lamp 820 are turned off.
A, the upper effect unit 40c, the side effect unit 40d, the falling accessory 810, and the like are used to perform an arbitrary effect.

As shown in FIG. 37, in the probable change state (a state in which a small hit rush can occur), the accessory lamps 820a are arranged so as to line up on the virtual line 822. At this time, the RUSH lamp 81
2 emits light (suggested light emission) to suggest that it is in a probable change state (a state in which a small hit rush can occur). At this time, the accessory lamp 820a (movable accessory 820) suggests a probable change state depending on its operating position, but the probable change state (a state in which a small hit rush can occur) is caused by the same light emission mode as the RUSH lamp 812. You may suggest.

Further, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37, the variable display game using the accessory lamp 820a is started (FIG. 38). Then, when the result of the variable display game is a small hit, the accessory lamp 820a is stopped and displayed, but for example, the RUSH lamp 812 blinks during the small hit state. Further, when a big hit occurs, the accessory lamp 820a is stopped and displayed, and for example, the RUSH lamp 812 emits light in a color different from that in the probable change state during the big hit state. The RUSH lamp 812 emits blue light in a probabilistic state and emits yellow light or red in a jackpot state, for example.
It emits light in the order of seven colors (rainbow colors) of orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple.

The RUSH lamp 812 and the accessory lamp 820a may be constantly lit (either with the same emission color, the emission color of the same system (similar) with each other, or the emission color completely different from each other) as long as the probability variation state is maintained. Then, the blinking may be performed in accordance with a predetermined time interval (for example, the timing at which the effect control device 300 receives the detection signal transmitted from the valve sensor 814a), and the emission color may be changed.

In the probabilistic state, at least the accessory lamp 820a, the RUSH lamp 812, and the big winning opening unit 806 are lined up on the virtual line 822, and the player can win the big winning opening unit 806 with a small hit (or big hit). The line of sight is easier to direct.

At this time, in the display device 41, in addition to the above-mentioned mode display unit 674 "tiger mode", RUS
Suggested light emission regarding the probabilistic state of the H lamp 812 and the accessory lamp 820a is displayed on the virtual line 822. As a result, the player can use the mode display unit 674, the accessory lamp 820a, and the RUSH.
The lamp 812 recognizes the existence of the virtual line 822, and the line of sight is easily directed to the large winning opening unit 806 arranged on the virtual line 822.

Further, when the small hit state is reached and the large winning opening 38 is opened, the effect image 617 (specific image) is displayed on the virtual line 822. The effect image 617 is, for example, a virtual line 82.
2 A movie (which may be a still image) showing the movement of sparks violently scattered in the direction along the top is applied.
For example, it is displayed in conjunction with the opening time of the large winning opening 38. As a result, the player recognizes the existence of the virtual line 822 by the mode display unit 674, the effect image 617, the accessory lamp 820a, and the RUSH lamp 812, and the line of sight is drawn to the large winning opening unit 806 arranged on the virtual line 822. It will be easier to face.

Further, in the display device 41, an arrow image 619 (second suggestion information) indicating the direction in which the large winning opening unit 806 is arranged is displayed on the virtual line 822 in conjunction with the display of the effect image 617. The arrow image 619 may be a still image, but may be displayed as a moving image moving toward the grand prize opening unit 806 along the virtual line 822. As a result, the player's line of sight can be reliably directed to the large winning opening unit 806.

Further, the RUSH lamp 812 may be arranged on the opposite side of the accessory lamp 820a with the large winning opening unit 806 sandwiched between them. That is, the RUSH lamp 812 is used as the big winning opening unit 806.
Place it on the virtual line 822 at the lower right of the corner, and place the big prize opening unit 806 on the accessory lamp 820a.
It may be arranged so as to be sandwiched between the RUSH lamp 812 and the lamp 812. As a result, the accessory lamp 820
By turning on a and the RUSH lamp 812, the big winning opening unit 806 sandwiched between them
Can be noticed. Further, the large winning opening unit 806 and the RUSH lamp 812 may be integrated, whereby the RUSH lamp 812 can be turned on to draw attention to the large winning opening unit 806.

[Variable display mode of accessory lamp]
FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram showing a lighting mode of the accessory lamp 820a, FIG. 38 (a) shows a lighting mode in which the lighting portion circulates during fluctuations, and FIG. 38 (b) shows two lighting states alternately during fluctuations. FIG. 38 (c) shows a repeating lighting mode in which the lighting portion changes so as to draw a figure 8 at the time of fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 38, the accessory lamp 820a is a centrally arranged LED lamp 823a.
And a plurality of (six in this embodiment) LED lamps 823b arranged around the LED lamps 823a. The LED lamp 823a and the LED lamp 823b are preferably those capable of full-color lighting.

As a display pattern of the variable display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (a), one of a plurality of LED lamps 823b is turned on first, and the LED lamp 823b is turned off and clockwise (or clockwise). The adjacent LED lamp 823b is lit (counterclockwise), and by repeating this, the LED lamp 823a is displayed by circulating lighting in which the lighting circulates around the LED lamp 823a. At this time, the number of circulations may be once or a plurality of times. Then, if the result of the variable display game is out of order (a small hit is acceptable), only the LED lamp 823a is lit and L
All ED lamps 823b are turned off. On the other hand, when the result of the variable display game is a small hit (may be off), the LED lamp 823a is turned off and all the LED lamps 823b are turned on. Further, when the result mode of the variable display game is a big hit, the LED lamps 823a and the LED lamps 823b are all lit, or all are blinking and lit in synchronization.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), the variable display game may be displayed by alternately lighting the LED lamps 823a and the LED lamps 823b alternately. The result is shown in FIG.
It is the same as the case of 8 (a). Then, when the next variable display game is played, the LED lamps 823a and the LED lamps 823b may all be turned off for a predetermined short time so that the start and end of the variable display game can be clarified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (c), the variable display game may be displayed by circular lighting in which the lighting position is moved so as to draw a horizontal figure 8 around the LED lamp 823a. The result mode is the same as in the case of FIG. 38 (a).

A full-color LED can be applied to the LED lamp 823a and the LED lamp 823b. In this case, the above-mentioned circulation lighting is the lighting of the LED lamp 823a and the LED lamp 823b.
Instead of turning off the lights, the lighting mode may be such that a specific emission color circulates in a state where the LED lamps 823a and the LED lamps 823b are all lit. For example, one LED lamp is lit with a yellow emission color, all the remaining LED lamps are lit with a blue emission color, and the LED lamp 823a and the LED lamp 823b are lit so that the yellow lighting moves to the next LED. It may be a lighting mode in which the lights are circulated in between.

In the case of the above-mentioned alternating lighting, the LED lamp 823a and the LED have two different emission colors.
The lighting mode may be such that the lamps 823b alternately emit light. For example, LED lamp 823
The lighting mode may be such that a is lit with a blue emission color and the LED lamp 823b is lit with a yellow emission color alternately.

Further, as for the result aspect, the LED lamp 823a and the LED lamp 823b are all lit, and if the LED lamp 823a is off, the LED lamp 823a is lit with a specific emission color and the LED lamp 8 is lit.
23b lights up in a light emitting color other than the specific light emitting color, and if it is a small hit, the LED lamp 823b
The lighting mode may be applied in which the LED lamp 823a is lit with a specific emission color and the LED lamp 823a is lit with an emission color other than the specific emission color. For example, in the case of off, the LED lamp 823a lights up in the yellow emission color, the LED lamp 823b lights up in the blue emission color, and in the case of a small hit, LE.
The lighting mode may be such that the D lamp 823a is lit with a blue emission color and the LED lamp 823b is lit with a yellow emission color.

Further, the variable display game may be played not only in the probabilistic state shown in FIG. 37 but also in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 35 and the time saving state (specific mode state) shown in FIG. 36, but at least the fluctuation in the probabilistic state. The execution time (variable time) of the display game is set shorter than the execution time in the normal gaming state. As a result, for example, when a small hit rush is occurring, the variable display game can be played quickly to enhance the rush feeling, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The execution time (minimum fluctuation time, maximum fluctuation time, average fluctuation time) is, for example, (1.2 seconds, 2 seconds, 1.6 seconds) in the normal gaming state and (0.5 seconds, 0.5 seconds) in the time saving state. 1 second, 0.7
5 seconds), and in the probable change state (small hit rush state), it can be set to (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 0.75 seconds). The maximum fluctuation time in the normal game state is the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (described later).
In the case of, for example, 10 minutes may be set. Further, in the case of reach, the maximum fluctuation time may be as long as several tens of seconds.

[Seal to decorate the general winning opening unit]
FIG. 39 (a) is a schematic view of the general winning opening unit 808 and the batch display device 50, and is shown in FIG. 39.
(B) is a detailed view of the batch display device 50, FIG. 39 (c) is a schematic view of a sticker 815 for decorating the general winning opening unit 808, and FIG. 39 (d) is a position information 8 displayed on the sticker 815.
Schematic diagrams of 19a, 819b and related information 817 are shown, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the general winning opening unit 808 (unit) includes a plurality of general winning openings 35 (winning openings), an out opening 30b, and a batch display device 50, and includes a lower left of the game area 32. (Left of the starting winning opening 36). In the present embodiment, the general winning opening 35 is incorporated in the unit, but the starting winning opening 36, the special variable winning devices 38, 39, and the like may be incorporated.

Further, the general winning opening unit 808 has a shape in which the front wall 808a covers the general winning opening 35 and the out opening 30b, and the lower portion follows the boundary of the game area 32.

The front wall 808a may be transparent or opaque, but when it is opaque, the portion overlapping the batch display device 50 is made transparent so that the batch display device 50 can be visually recognized. Further, a sticker 815 (decorative portion) for decorating the general winning opening unit 808 is attached to the front wall 808a.

As shown in FIG. 39 (c), the outer shape of the seal 815 is formed to follow the shape of the front wall 808a. The seal 815 may be transparent or opaque, but if it is opaque, a transparent portion 815a (which may be an opening) is provided at a position overlapping the batch display device 50. Even when the seal 815 is transparent, it is preferable to provide an opening in a portion overlapping the batch display device 50. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the batch display device 50 is difficult to see due to the reflection of light on the surface of the sticker 815. Further, it is possible to prevent dust from adhering between the seal 815 (adhesive portion) and the batch display device 50.

Further, the seal 815 displays position information 819a and 819b (general winning opening position information) indicating the position of the general winning opening 35 and position information 818a (out opening opening position information) indicating the position of the out opening 30b.

As shown in FIG. 39 (d), the position information 819a and 819b have, for example, a rectangular frame and a form in which the character "IN" is arranged inside the rectangular frame, and the position where the character "IN" is arranged is generally used. It shows that it is a winning opening 35. Further, the position information 818a also has, for example, a rectangular frame and a form in which the character "OUT" is arranged inside the rectangular frame, and indicates that the position where the character "OUT" is arranged is the out opening 30b. The area within the frame of the position information 818a, 819a, 819b may be transparent or opaque except for characters.

On the sticker 815, related information 817 (round information) listing the display modes of the number of jackpot rounds (the duration of the jackpot, the upper limit of the number of rounds) displayed by the round display unit 60 is displayed. Related information 817 is a rectangular frame with 16 rounds (probability change) and 16 rounds (probability change) from the left.
(Normal), 8 rounds, 2 rounds of lighting mode are displayed in a horizontal row.

Correspondingly, as shown in FIG. 39B, emphasis information that emphasizes (suggests) that the transparent portion 815a of the seal 815 is the round display portion 60 at the position corresponding to the round display portion 60. 815b is displayed. As shown in FIG. 39B, the highlight information 815b may have a rectangular frame shape surrounding the round display unit 60, or may have an underline shape drawn under the round display unit 60. Further, on the seal 815, the emphasis information 815b
An arrow 815c connecting the and related information 817 is displayed, and the highlighted information 815b and the related information 817 are displayed.
It is suggested that and corresponds. Therefore, the player can clearly determine which round this time is by comparing the lighting information displayed in the frame of the emphasis information 815b with the related information 817.

Further, the seal 815 has patterns 816a, 816b, 81 that decorate the entire seal 815.
6c is displayed. The patterns 816a, 816b, and 816c have, for example, a star-shaped frame shape. Each pattern can be arbitrarily displayed as long as the visibility of the batch display device 50, the related information 817, and the like can be ensured. For example, the pattern 816a overlapping the related information 817 is displayed in such a manner that a part thereof is covered with the related information 817. Further, the pattern 816a overlapping the transparent portion 815a is displayed so that the portion overlapping the transparent portion 815a (collective display device 50) disappears. The pattern 816b is displayed on the position information 818a at a position that does not overlap with the character "OUT". The pattern 816c is on the position information 819a and 819b and is "
It is displayed at the position where the characters "IN" are placed inside.

Since the sticker 815 of the present embodiment displays the winning opening position information (position information 819a, 819b) and the related information 817, the player can pay attention to it. Further, since the related information 817 is displayed on the sticker 815, the content of the special gaming state can be easily understood.

Further, the sticker 815 of the present embodiment is a sticker 81 that decorates the general winning opening unit 808.
Related information 817 suggesting the lighting mode of the round display unit 60 is displayed in 5. As a result, the general winning opening unit 808 can be applied to other models by applying the sticker 815 reflecting the related information 817 to other models having different related information 817.
The versatility of the general winning opening unit 808 can be enhanced.

By the way, since the general winning opening unit 808 is arranged in the game area 32, it is necessary to change the sticker that decorates the general winning opening unit 808 as the model changes (specs and motifs of the model change). It is essential to change to a sticker that matches the design of the object and board. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sticker 8 for decorating the general winning opening unit 808
15 displays the lighting mode of the number of rounds of the batch display device 50 as related information 817. As a result, by changing the sticker 815, both the display of the number of rounds and the decoration that matches the motif (the patterns 816a, 816b, 816c are different decorations that are not star-shaped (☆)) can be changed together, and as a result. The structure of the general winning opening unit 808 can be left as it is, and can be reused only by changing the seal 815, and the cost can be reduced. The batch display device 50 does not have to be mounted on the general winning opening unit 808, and even in this case, the player can be made to pay attention to the sticker 815 by displaying the related information 817 on the sticker 815. ..

More specifically, for example, (1) the same batch display device 5 as it is when used for a model having the same model motif but different specifications (small number of rounds, for example, only two).
A general winning opening unit 808 including 0 is used: In this case, since it is not necessary to have four LED lamps indicating the number of rounds, for example, a sticker (not shown, for example) that makes the left two invisible (difficult to see). A black sticker) may be attached from above and reused. As a result, the general winning opening unit 808 can be used in common, which leads to cost reduction. Further, the two LED lamps may be made to emit light only when the power is turned on so as to be invisible (difficult to see), and may function as LED lamps for confirming whether or not the power is on. At that time, at least the red light emission of the LED lamp, which is difficult to see due to the sticker (not shown), is made visible to some extent.

Further, for example, when the two LED lamps are made invisible as in (2) and (1), the highlight information 815b (for example, when the shape is a rectangular frame shape (□)) that emphasizes the number of rounds is also a black seal. Paste (not shown) so that you can see that the LED lamps to be emphasized are the two LED lamps on the right: This makes the emphasis information 815b look like the left half is missing, so the left half is You will be able to emphasize the other right half without emphasizing.

[Arrangement of movable and falling accessories in each mode]
FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the accessory unit and the falling accessory unit, the display mode in the display device, and the like, and FIG. 40 (a-1) shows an example in the normal gaming state, FIG. 40 (a). -2)
40 (b) shows an example in which the falling accessory unit operates in the state of FIG. 40 (a-1).
-1) is an example when suggesting a specific mode, and FIG. 40 (b-2) is shown in FIG. 40 (b-1).
40 (c-1) is an example of the case where the falling accessory unit operates in the state of FIG. 40 (c-1), and FIG. 40 (c-2) is an example of the case of the probabilistic state. An example of the case where the falling accessory unit operates in the state is shown.

As shown in FIG. 40 (a-1), in the normal gaming state (initial state), the movable accessory 820
Is arranged so as to cover the left side of the display device 41 as an initial position, the falling accessory 810 is arranged so as to cover a part of the upper side of the display device 41, and the upper left position of the display device 41 is "normal mode".
The mode display unit 674 composed of the characters and characters is displayed. Further, for example, there is no reservation in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the fourth symbol 671 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 672 of the special figure 2 are displayed as "x" (variable display game not executed). FIG. 2 Hold number display unit 660 and special figure 2 Hold number display unit 66
0 is "0", and the stop symbol "123" is displayed in the variable display area 615. It is also possible to configure the mode display unit 674 not to be displayed in the normal gaming state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (a-2), for example, when the variable display game of special figure 1 (variation display area 610 is omitted) is started, the fourth symbol 671 of special figure 1 is "○" (special). The variable display game of FIG. 1 is being executed), the fourth symbol 672 of the special figure 2 is displayed as “x” (the variable display game of the special figure 2 is not executed), and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 is “1”. , And the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 is displayed as “0”, and the identification information is variablely displayed in the variable display area 615.

At this time, with the execution of the variable display game (or with the occurrence of reach), the falling accessory 81
0 falls (rotates by a predetermined angle). However, the falling accessory 810 does not interfere (collide) with the movable accessory 820. Further, the falling accessory 810 is a character 826 displayed on the display device 41.
Cover a. However, an opening 810a is formed in the falling accessory 810 so that the character 826a can be visually recognized from the opening 810a. For example, if the result of the variable display game is out of order, the falling accessory 810 returns to the initial position.

As shown in FIG. 40 (b-1), when the mode display unit 674 is in a specific gaming state such as a time saving state so as to display the wording "?? mode", the accessory lamp 820a is the display device 41.
The movable accessory 820 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position so as to be arranged in front of the lower center of the. When the movable accessory 820 moves in this way, the movable accessory 820 interferes with the falling accessory 810 (
There is no collision). Further, in the upper center of the display device 41, for the purpose of raising attention to the “?? mode”, for example, a specific display 826b composed of the word “heat” is displayed. also,
Lens 810b (convex lens or Fresnel lens) in the opening 810a of the falling accessory 810
Is fitted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (b-2), the falling accessory 810 falls in the same manner as described above. At this time, the lens 810b overlaps with the specific display 826b and enlarges the character of "heat". For example, when the specific gaming state ends, the movable accessory 820 and the falling accessory 810 return to their initial positions. Note that the operation promotion information 618a (FIG. 36) can be applied instead of the specific display 826b, and the lens 810b may enlarge the operation promotion information 618a to prompt the button operation.

As shown in FIG. 40 (c-1), in the probable change state, the mode display unit 674 displays the word "tiger mode", the RUSH lamp 812 lights up, and the right instructing "right-handed". The hitting instruction display 620 is displayed at a position on the right side of the display device 41. Further, the movable accessory 820 moves from the intermediate position (or the initial position) to the final position so that the accessory lamp 820a is arranged at a position adjacent to the RUSH lamp 812 on the lower right side of the display device 41. There is. The final position may be the maximum position where the movable accessory 820 can move farthest from the initial position. When the movable accessory 820 moves in this way, the movable accessory 820 drops the accessory 810.
Does not interfere (collide) with. Further, at the final position of the movable accessory 820, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged so as to line up on the virtual line 822 (broken line in FIG. 37) in which the mode display unit 674, the RUSH lamp 812, and the large winning opening unit 806 are arranged. Has been done.

Further, a character 826a (which may be different from the character 826a in FIG. 40 (a-1)) is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41 for the purpose of increasing attention to the “tiger mode”. Further, a light guide plate 810c is fitted in the opening 810a of the falling accessory 810, and the light guide plate 801a is a figure in the shape of sunglasses (may be another) that can be visually recognized by reflecting the light from the light source of the light guide plate 810c. It has 827. Here, as described above, the mode display unit 6
74, the accessory lamp 820a, and the RUSH lamp 812 are in the same straight line (virtual line 8 in FIG. 37).
22) Placed on top.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 40 (c-2), the falling accessory 810 falls in the same manner as described above as an effect with high expectation of a big hit. At this time, the light guide plate 810c overlaps with the character 826a, and the figure 827 overlaps with the "eyes" of the character 826a, so that the character 8
26a forms a display mode as if wearing sunglasses. That is, the display content displayed on the display device 41 and the display content displayed on the falling accessory 810 are combined to form one display content (character). For example, when the production with high expectation of a big hit is completed, the movable accessory 820 and the falling accessory 810 return to the initial positions, respectively, but the movable accessory 820
Is maintained in the final position.

When the probabilistic state ends and the normal game state is reached, the movable accessory 820 returns to the initial position. On the other hand, even if the special figure fluctuation display game becomes a small hit and shifts to the small hit state during the probability change state, the small hit state ends in a short time, so that the movable accessory 820 may be maintained at the final position. Suitable. In addition, the special figure fluctuation display game becomes a big hit during the probable change state, and the probable change state ends and the big hit state (
In the case of shifting to the special game state), the movable accessory 820 may return to the initial position if the number of rounds of the jackpot (upper limit of the number of rounds) is large, or is maintained at the final position if the number of rounds of the jackpot is small. You may.

In addition, not limited to the above, when the expectation of a big hit of a variable display game is high (that is,
By vibrating the movable accessory 820 (under predetermined conditions), the accessory lamp 820a can be turned on.
Even in the probabilistic state, the mode display unit 674, the RUSH lamp 812, and the large winning opening unit 806 may be deviated from the same straight line (virtual line 822 in FIG. 37) on which the large winning opening unit 806 is arranged. also,
The falling accessory 810 may be lengthened so that the light guide plate 810c and the character 826a are arranged on the virtual line 822 of FIG. 37 when the falling accessory 810 falls.

In any of the above modes, the movable accessory 820 and the falling accessory 810 do not interfere with each other, and the right-handed instruction display 620, the fourth symbol 671 of the special figure 1, and the fourth symbol 672 of the special figure 2 ,
The special figure 2 hold number display unit 660, the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660, and the variable display area 615 are not hidden by the movable accessory 820 or the falling accessory 810, and these are visible. However, the mode display unit 674 can change the display position depending on the game state and the state of the movable accessory 820 and the falling accessory 810, and may overlap with the movable accessory 820 or the falling accessory 810.
In addition, although the effect mode was such that the falling accessory 810 falls after the specific display 826b and the character 826a are displayed on the display device 41, conversely, after the falling accessory 810 has fallen, the specific display 826b and the character 826a are displayed on the display device 41. May be displayed as an effect mode.

[Structure of movable accessory]
FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the movable accessory 820. In the movable accessory 820 (accessory unit) of the present embodiment, the movable accessory main body 950 and the movable accessory 820 are mounted on the game board 30 (not shown in FIG. 41).
With a base member 952 for attaching to the movable accessory body 952, an upper guide member 954 that guides the upper part of the movable accessory main body 950 (decorative member 960), and a lower guide member 956 that guides the lower part of the movable accessory main body 950 (decorative member 960). It is configured.

The movable accessory main body 950 has an upper movable portion 970 that can move in the vertical direction and a lower movable portion 982 that can move in the left-right direction. Further, the movable accessory main body 950 includes an upper slide guide member 976 that defines the movable range of the upper movable portion 970 and a lower slide guide base member 978 (lower slide guide member 979) that defines the movable range of the lower movable portion 982. It has an L-shaped outer shape due to the upper slide guide member 976 and the lower slide guide base member 978 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 42).

The movable accessory main body 950 has a decorative member 960 that operates as a link mechanism between the upper movable portion 970 and the lower movable portion 982 by being rotatably attached to the upper movable portion 970 and the lower movable portion 982, respectively. .. Further, the decorative member 960 includes a guide member 964a (pin) that contacts the upper guide member 954 and a guide member 964b (pin) that contacts the lower guide member 956.

The base member 952 is an integral body of a vertical portion 952a extending in the vertical direction to which the upper slide guide member 976 and the like are connected, and a horizontal portion 952b extending in the horizontal direction to which the lower slide guide base member 978 is attached. It has an L-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front.

The upper guide member 954 has a guide surface 95 extending in the vertical direction with which the guide member 964a comes into contact.
It is a member having 4a. The lower guide member 956 is a member provided with a guide surface 956a extending in the left-right direction in contact with the guide member 964b. Guide surface 954a and guide surface 956a
Are arranged so as to be in the same position in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 10, and the guide surface 95 is as described later.
Each of the curved surface shape is such that the 4a and the guide surface 956a form one curved surface (see FIG. 45 and the like).

Boss-shaped screw holes 978a (two places) are arranged in the lower slide guide base member 978, and are connected at positions facing the screw holes of the lower guide member 956 (in the figure, they are connected by broken lines. The insertion holes 956b (two places) are arranged in the insertion holes 956b (not shown), and the movable accessory main body 950 and the lower guide member are formed by inserting a screw (not shown) into the insertion hole 956b and screwing it into the screw hole 978a. 956 is connected. Further, a boss-shaped screw hole 954b is arranged at the lower portion of the upper guide member 954, and the screw hole 954b of the lower guide member 956 is provided.
An insertion hole (not shown) is arranged at a position corresponding to, and the upper guide member 954 and the lower guide member 956 are connected by inserting a screw (not shown) into the insertion hole and screwing it into the screw hole 954b. To.

Here, the decorative member 960 changes its inclination angle while sliding along the longitudinal direction of the lower slide guide member 979 as described later. However, the decorative member 960
Is arranged at a position different from the guide surface 954a and the guide surface 956a in the front-rear direction, and does not interfere with the guide surface 954a and the guide surface 956a even if the decorative member 960 moves.

FIG. 42 is a detailed exploded perspective view of the movable accessory 820. As shown in FIG. 42, the movable accessory main body 950 is composed of a decorative member 960, an upper movable portion 970, a lower movable portion 982, and the like.

The decorative member 960 includes a decorative base member 961, an LED substrate 962, and a decorative front plate 963. The decorative member 960 has a form in which the LED substrate 962 is accommodated from the opening of the decorative base member 961 and the opening of the decorative base member 961 is closed by the decorative front plate 963, and the decorative base member 961 and the decorative front plate are closed. 963 forms the outer shape of the decorative member 960.

The decorative base member 961 has an accommodating portion 961a capable of accommodating the LED substrate 962. Further, a rotary shaft 961b rotatably supported by the bearing portion 970b described later is arranged on the upper side of the back surface of the accommodating portion 961a, and a rotary shaft 961c rotatably supported by the bearing portion 982a described later on the lower side. Is placed.

Further, on the upper part of the decorative base member 961, a support portion 961 for supporting the guide member 964a is provided.
d (dowel hole) is arranged, and a support portion 961e (dowel hole) for supporting the guide member 964b is also arranged at the lower part.

The guide member 964a has a pin shape whose base end is fitted into the support portion 961d, and the side surface of the pin comes into contact with the guide surface 954a and is slidable with respect to the guide surface 954a (FIG. 41). Similarly, the guide member 964b has a pin shape whose base end is fitted into the support portion 961e, and the side surface of the pin comes into contact with the guide surface 956a and is slidable with respect to the guide surface 956a (FIG. 41). ..

Further, as another form, the guide member 964a is a shaft portion (which is fitted into the support portion 961d).
It has a dowel) and a roller portion rotatably supported by a shaft portion (dowel), and the roller portion is in contact with the guide surface 954a and can be rolled (sliding) with respect to the guide surface 954a (slide). Figure 4
1). Similarly, the guide member 964b has a shaft portion (dowel) fitted into the support portion 961e and a dowel.
It has a roller portion that is rotatably supported by a shaft portion (dowel), and the roller portion is in contact with the guide surface 956a and can be rolled (sliding) with respect to the guide surface 956a (FIG. 41).

The LED substrate 962 has a large number of LED lamps 962a arranged on the entire surface of the decorative front plate 963 side, and a part of the LED lamp 962a is the LED lamp 823a (FIG. 38) and the LED lamp of the accessory lamp 820a. It is 823b (FIG. 38).

The decorative front plate 963 is, for example, made of a translucent material as a whole, and the LED substrate 9
The light from the LED lamps arranged in 62 can be transmitted to some extent. also,
Decorative lamp 820a (LED lamp 823a and LED lamp 823b) of the decorative front plate 963
) Is formed at a position facing the window portion 963a (opening or transparent portion), and the window portion 9 is formed.
The light of the accessory lamp 820a can be reliably visually recognized from 63a.

The upper movable portion 970 has an upper slide guide member 976, a rack gear member 967, and a base guide member 966 as members fixed to the base member 952. In addition, the upper movable part 97
Reference numeral 0 includes a drive source 968, an upper movable portion main body 970a, a relay movable board 972, a wiring guard member 974, a relay movable board holding member 971 and the like as members that can move in the vertical direction.

The upper slide guide 976 includes a rail 976a extending in the vertical direction and a slider 976b sliding along the longitudinal direction of the rail 976a. The rail 976a has a plurality of insertion holes 976c that communicate with a plurality of screw holes 952c formed in the vertical portion 952a.
The rail 976a is fixed to the vertical portion 952a by inserting a screw (not shown) into each insertion hole 976c and screwing the screw into the screw hole 952c.

The rack gear member 967 is a member extending in the vertical direction, and is arranged so that the linear gear 967a faces the pinion gear 968a described later. The rack gear member 967 is formed with insertion holes 967b through which screws (not shown) are inserted at a plurality of positions (4 locations) different from each other in the longitudinal direction thereof. On the other hand, in the vertical portion 952a, a plurality of boss-shaped screw holes 952d formed at positions different from the insertion holes 976c in the left-right direction are arranged. Screw hole 9
52d communicates with the insertion hole 967b on a one-to-one basis. Therefore, the rack gear member 967 is
With the insertion hole 967b and the screw hole 952d communicating with each other, a screw (not shown) is inserted into the insertion hole 967b, and a screw (not shown) is screwed into the screw hole 952d to fix the screw to the vertical portion 952a.

The base guide member 966 is a member extending in the vertical direction, and is an upper movable portion main body 970a (
The sliding portion 970d) abuts and slides. Further, the base guide member 966 is provided with insertion holes 966a through which screws (not shown) are inserted at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. On the other hand, the boss-shaped screw hole 952e is located at the mounting position of the base guide member 966 of the vertical portion 952a (the position different from the mounting position of the upper slide guide 976 and the rack gear member 967).
Are arranged in pairs (the screw holes at the bottom are not shown). Therefore, the base guide member 966
Is fixed to the vertical portion 952a by inserting a screw (not shown) into the insertion hole 966a and screwing a screw (not shown) into the screw hole 952e in a state where the insertion hole 966a and the screw hole 952e are communicated with each other. ..

The upper movable portion main body 970a is integrated with the bearing portion 970b and the mounting portion 970c. The bearing portion 970b rotatably supports the rotary shaft 961b attached to the decorative base member 961. The attachment portion 970c is attached to the slider 976b of the upper slide guide member 976. As a result, the upper movable part main body 970a has a slider 97.
It moves up and down according to the slide operation of 6b. Further, the sliding portion 970d abuts on the front surface of the game machine 10 of the base guide member 966 and is slidable in the vertical direction with respect to the base guide member 966.

A drive source 968 (motor) equipped with a pinion gear 968a is attached to the upper movable portion main body 970. The drive source 968 is fixed to the upper movable portion main body 970 by being screwed (at two places) to the upper movable portion main body 970.

The drive source 968 rotates and drives a circular pinion gear 968a, and the pinion gear 968a engages (meshed) with the gear 967a of the rack gear member 967. Therefore, when the drive source 968 is driven, the pinion gear 968a rotates and moves along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the rack gear member 967 without slipping, so that the upper movable portion main body 9
70 moves up and down.

At this time, the slider 976b attached to the upper movable portion main body 970 slides in the vertical direction along the longitudinal direction of the rail 976a, and the sliding portion 970d of the upper movable portion main body 970 abuts on the base guide member 966 and slides in the vertical direction. do. Therefore, since the upper movable part main body 970 is in a two-point support state by the rail 976a and the base guide member 966 at different positions, the displacement other than the vertical direction is restricted, and the upper movable part main body 970 shakes in the horizontal direction (front-back direction, left-right direction). It can move up and down without (without the pinion gear 968a falling off the gear 967a). For example, when the drive source 968 is driven in the forward rotation, the upper movable portion main body 970 is lowered, and when the drive source 968 is driven in the reverse rotation, the upper movable portion main body 970 is raised.

Further, a relay movable board 972 (wiring guard member 974, relay movable board holding member 971) is attached to the upper movable portion main body 970. The relay movable board 972 is electrically connected to, for example, the effect control device 300, the drive source 968, and the LED board 962 (accessory lamp 820a), and drives the drive signal based on the signal transmitted from the effect control device 300. It is transmitted to 968, and a signal representing the lighting pattern of the LED lamp is transmitted to the LED substrate 962 (accessory lamp 820a).

As a mounting member for the relay movable board 972, a wiring guard member 974 and a relay movable board holding member 971 are used. The relay movable board holding member 971 sandwiches the relay movable board 972 together with the wiring guard member 974 from the width direction of the relay movable board 972, and is screwed to the wiring guard member 974 with the relay movable board 972 sandwiched (two places). ).
The wiring guard member 974 is a member for preventing the wiring (not shown) or the like connected to the relay movable board 972 from coming into contact with another portion due to the movement of the upper movable portion main body 970 and being disconnected.
Further, the wiring guard member 974 is in a state where the relay movable board holding member 971 is screwed (
The relay movable board 972 is sandwiched) and screwed (at two places) to the upper movable portion main body 970.

The lower slide guide base member 978 is attached to the horizontal portion 952b of the base member 952, and a plurality of screw holes (not shown) are arranged on the side surface facing the horizontal portion 952b. On the other hand, an insertion hole 952f communicating with the screw hole is arranged in the horizontal portion 952b. Therefore, the lower slide guide base member 978 is fixed to the horizontal portion 952b by inserting a screw (not shown) into the insertion hole 952f and screwing it into the screw hole.

The base end of the lower slide guide base member 978 is the vertical portion 952a of the base member 952.
Although it is on the side close to, the urging member unit 981 described later is attached to the base end.

Further, the lower slide guide base member 978 has an inclined surface 978b whose tip is on the side far from the vertical portion 952a, but which is gently inclined from the base end side of the lower slide guide base member 978 toward the tip side at the time of attachment.

A lower slide guide member 979 (rail) is attached to the inclined surface 978b. A plurality of insertion holes 979a are formed along the longitudinal direction on the bottom surface of the lower slide guide member 979.
A screw hole 978c is formed at a position of the inclined surface 978b facing the insertion hole 979a, and a screw (
The lower slide guide member 979 is fixed to the lower slide guide base member 978 (inclined surface 978b) by screwing the lower slide guide member 979 into the screw hole 978c with the insertion hole 979a (not shown) inserted.

The lower movable portion 982 is attached to the lower slide guide base member 978. The lower movable portion 982 supports the bearing portion 982a that rotatably supports the rotary shaft 961c arranged on the decorative base member 961 and the bearing portion 982a, and supports the bearing portion 982a in the longitudinal direction of the lower slide guide member 979. A slide portion 982b that can slide diagonally in the vertical direction (guide is possible) and a slider 982c that is a base of the slide portion 982b and is attached to the lower slide guide member 979 and can slide along the longitudinal direction of the lower slide guide member 979. And prepare.

In the above configuration, when the drive source 968 is driven in the normal direction and a descending force is applied to the upper movable portion main body 970, the upper movable portion main body 970 transmits the force to the decorative base member 961 via the rotating shaft 961b. By the way, the decorative base member 961 has an upper movable portion main body 970 and a lower movable portion 9
It is rotatably attached to 82 and functions as a link mechanism for transmitting force between the upper movable portion main body 970 and the lower movable portion 982. Therefore, when the decorative base member 961 receives a force from the drive source 968, the upper movable portion main body 970 (bearing portion 970b) and the lower movable portion 982 (bearing portion 9) are received.
Rotating with respect to 82a), the upper movable part main body 970 moves downward in the vertical direction, and the lower movable part 98
2 moves toward the tip end side of the lower slide guide member 979. At this time, the decorative base member 961 (decorative member 960) is tilted from an upright state by moving the upper portion downward in the vertical direction and the lower portion toward the tip end side of the lower slide guide member 979. On the contrary, when the drive source 968 is driven in reverse and an ascending force is applied to the upper movable portion main body 970, the upper movable portion main body 970, the lower movable portion 982 and the decorative base member 961 perform the reverse operations as described above.

In order to reliably perform the above operation, in the initial state (normal gaming state), the rotary shaft 961c is located on the tip side of the slide guide member 979 below the position where the rotary shaft 961c is vertically below the rotary shaft 961b (bottom dead center of the link mechanism). It is necessary to design the decorative base member 961 so that it is arranged at the displaced position.

FIG. 43 is an exploded view of the urging member unit 981 constituting the movable accessory main body 950. As shown in FIG. 43, the urging member unit 981 includes a spring-shaped urging member 981b, a front cover member 981c that supports the urging member 981b in such a manner that the urging member 981b is wound, and a front cover member. Arranged at the rear of 981c, the urging member 981b together with the front cover member 981c
981g of the rear cover member 981g, the urging base member 981i attached to the lower slide guide base member 978, and the integral 981a of the front cover member 981c, the urging member 981b, and the rear cover member 981g. And a pin 981m that rotatably supports the integral body 981a to the urging base member 981i by penetrating the urging base member 981i.

For example, a Conston spring is applied to the urging member 981b, and the feeding direction thereof coincides with the longitudinal direction of the lower slide guide member 979. Further, the urging member 981b is preferably one having a substantially constant restoring force (urging force) regardless of the amount of feeding, and the number of turns can be arbitrarily applied. The tip of the urging member 981b is connected to the lower movable portion 982 (see FIG. 44).

The front cover member 981c includes a cylindrical portion 981d around which the urging member 981b is wound and a cylindrical portion 9.
It is coaxially attached to the side surface of the 81d (front side of the gaming machine 10) and has a flange portion 981e having a diameter larger than that of the cylindrical portion 981d. The base end of the urging member 981b is connected to the cylindrical portion 981d. The rear cover member 981g has the same shape as the flange portion 981e, and is coaxially connected to the cylindrical portion 981d. Further, the flange portion 981e and the rear cover member 981
An insertion hole 981f and an insertion hole 981h through which the pin 981m is inserted are formed at the center of each of g.

The tip of the pin 981 m is a male screw 981n, and the male screw 981n is a female screw 98.
It is designed to be screwed into 1p. Further, the urging base member 981i is formed with an insertion hole 981j and an insertion hole 981k through which the pin 981m is inserted. Therefore, the integral body 981a is housed in the urging base member 981i, the pin 981m is inserted into the insertion hole 981j, the insertion hole 981f, the insertion hole 981h, and the insertion hole 981k, and the male screw 981n is screwed into the female screw 981p. The urging member unit 981 is constructed.

When the urging member 981b is pulled in this state, the urging member 981b is unwound from the integral 981a and the integral 981a rotates. Then, when the urging member 981b is freed in this state, the urging member 981b is wound around the integral body 981a by its own restoring force, and at this time, the integral body 981a rotates in the opposite direction due to the restoring force.

44 is a perspective view showing the operation of the lower movable portion 982 that guides the movement of the movable accessory main body 950, FIG. 44 (a) shows the case where the urging member 981b is in the initial state, and FIG. 44 (b) shows the case where the urging member 981b is in the initial state. The case where the urging member 981b is extended is shown respectively.

As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the lower movable portion 982 is in the initial state (normal gaming state).
It is arranged on the base end side of the lower slide guide member 979. Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the lower movable portion 982 can be moved to the tip end side of the lower slide guide member 979. In this case, in the lower movable portion 982, the slide portion 982b is the bearing portion 982a and the decorative member 9.
By receiving the force from the drive source 968 (and the load of the decorative member 960 and the upper movable portion 970) via the 60, the lower slide guide member 979 can be moved to the tip end side. Further, the urging member 981b is fed out from the one piece 981a to generate a restoring force.

On the other hand, when the drive source 968 is stopped, the lower movable portion 982 can return to the proximal end side by the restoring force of the urging member 981b. However, a load is applied to the lower movable portion 982 so as to slide toward the tip from the decorative member 960 (and the upper movable portion 970). Further, the lower slide guide member 979 is inclined toward the tip end direction, and the lower movable portion 982 is subjected to a force to slide toward the tip end side due to its own weight.

Therefore, it is preferable to design the restoring force of the urging member 981b so as to coincide with the force of sliding in the tip direction. As a result, even if the drive source 968 is stopped, the lower movable portion 98
2 can stay in the stopped position of the drive source 968. Then, by rotating the drive source 968 in the reverse direction, the lower movable portion 982 and the decorative member 960 (and the upper movable portion 970) can be returned to the initial positions, and the burden on the drive source 968 at that time can be reduced. Can be done. Therefore, the lower movable portion 982 can be smoothly slid on the lower slide guide member 979 by driving the drive source 968 in the forward rotation and the reverse rotation.

By the way, the lower movable portion 982 is placed in the intermediate position (FIG. 47, FIG. 48) and the maximum position (FIG. 49, FIG. 50).
) May be performed. As the effect, for example, in order to pretend that the small hit rush (probability change state) is completed, the movable accessory 820 is intentionally moved from the maximum position (final position, see FIG. 37) corresponding to the small hit rush (probability change state) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 37). (See FIG. 36), but in reality, the small hit rush has not ended yet, so there is a "gase effect" that immediately returns to the maximum position. In such a production, the movable accessory 820 (lower movable part 982)
) Is not smooth (because the restoring force is not constant depending on the position of the movable accessory 820 if it is a normal spring), the movement will be detected as a "gase effect".
However, if the movement is smooth as described above, the result can be hidden until the movement is completely completed, and the effect can be watched to the end.

The restoring force of the urging member 981b (the force for returning the urging member 981b to the base end side) is a force that slides toward the tip by the load of the decorative member 960 (and the upper movable portion 970) and the own weight of the lower movable portion 982. It is also preferable to design the force so as to be larger than (the force that pulls the urging member 981b toward the tip side). As a result, when the drive source 968 is stopped, the lower movable portion 982 and the decorative member 960 (and the upper movable portion 970) can be smoothly returned to the initial positions by the urging force of the urging member 981b.

[Operation of the movable accessory body]
FIG. 45 is a front view (initial position) of the movable accessory main body 950. FIG. 46 is a back view of FIG. 45. FIG. 47 is a front view (intermediate position) of the movable accessory main body 950. 48, 47
It is a back view of. FIG. 49 is a front view (maximum position, final position) of the movable accessory main body 950. FIG. 50 is a back view of FIG. 49.

The operation of the movable accessory main body 950 will be described. First, the initial positions shown in FIGS. 45 and 46 (
In the normal gaming state (see FIG. 35), the upper movable portion 970 is arranged at the highest position, the lower movable portion 982 is arranged on the base end side of the lower slide guide member 979, and the decorative member 960 stands up in the longitudinal direction. It is arranged in (the state where the inclination angle is the largest).

Here, the guide surface 954a has a vertically standing surface as a whole, but has a shape curved toward the tip end side of the lower slide guide member 979 at the lower part. Further, the guide surface 956a has a shape forming substantially the same curved surface as the guide surface 954a in the region adjacent to the guide surface 954a, and has an inclined surface (curved surface) inclined like the lower slide guide member 979 in the intermediate region. However, it has a curved surface that rises so that the inclination increases as it advances to the tip in the tip region. The guide member 964a is in contact (or point contact) with the guide surface 954a, and the guide member 964b is in contact (or point contact) with the guide surface 956a.

In the above arrangement, when the drive source 968 is driven in the normal direction, the upper movable portion 970 (upper movable portion main body 970a) is lowered, and the lower movable portion 982 is moved to the upper movable portion 970 via the decorative member 960 (link mechanism). It receives a force from (upper movable portion main body 970a) and moves to the tip side of the lower slide guide member 979. At that time, the guide member 964a slides (or rolls) downward on the guide surface 954a, and the guide member 964b slides (or rolls) toward the tip end side of the lower slide guide member 979 on the guide surface 956a, whereby the decorative member 960 The tilt angle of is decreasing.

Further, the rotation shaft 961b rotates with respect to the upper movable portion 970 based on the change in the inclination angle, and the rotation shaft 961c also rotates with respect to the lower movable portion 982 based on the change in the inclination angle. Further, the urging member 981b is extended from the urging member unit 981 by the amount that the lower movable portion 982 moves toward the tip end side of the lower slide guide member 979.

Next, at the intermediate position shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 (for example, in the time saving state, see FIG. 36), the guide member 964b is in contact (or point contact) with the intermediate region of the guide surface 956a. on the other hand,
The guide member 964a is separated from the guide surface 954a. In this state, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged in front of the lower center of the display device 41 (see FIG. 36).

Then, at the maximum position (probability variation state, see FIG. 37) shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the guide member 964b is in contact (or point contact) with the tip region of the guide surface 956a. Along with this, the rotating shaft 961c (bearing portion 982a) rises in the slide portion 982b. In order to reliably perform this operation, the slide portion 982b needs to be formed so that its longitudinal direction is inclined toward the tip end side of the lower slide guide member 979 with respect to the normal line of the lower slide guide member 979.
In this state, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged in front of the lower right end of the display device 41 (see FIG. 37).

In the arrangement of FIGS. 47-50, when the drive source 968 is stopped, the movement of the upper movable portion 970, the lower movable portion 982, and the decorative member 960 is stopped, but as described above, when the drive source 968 is stopped, respectively. Can stay in the position of. Further, when the drive source 968 is driven in reverse, the upper movable portion 970, the lower movable portion 982, and the decorative member 960 can be returned to the initial positions, respectively.

[Action / effect of the second embodiment]
According to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 that generates a special gaming state (big hit, small hit) when the result of the game (variable display game) becomes a special result operates in the special gaming state. A possible variable winning device (large winning opening unit 806), a first light emitting means (feature lamp 820a) capable of emitting light in response to a special gaming state, and a specific gaming state (probability changing state) different from the special gaming state. A second light emitting means (RUSH lamp 812) that performs suggestive light emission suggesting that it is a (small hit rush generation possible state)) is provided, and the first light emitting means (accessory lamp 820a) is a second light emitting means (2nd light emitting means). When the RUSH lamp 812) emits suggested light, the variable winning device (large winning opening unit 806) and the second light emitting means (RUSH lamp 812)
It is characterized in that it is arranged on a virtual line 822 including a line connecting to and.

As a result, the change in the gaming state and the place to be watched at that time (special variable winning device 38) can be determined.
The accessory lamp 820a, the RUSH lamp 812, and the large winning opening unit 806 make it easy for the player to grasp (through the virtual line 822 that the player can recall).

In the second embodiment, the execution time of the game (variable display game) when the second light emitting means (RUSH lamp 812) emits light is the execution time of the game (variable display game) in the normal gaming state different from the special gaming state. Characterized by being shorter than. As a result, for example, when a small hit rush is occurring, the variable display game can be played quickly to enhance the rush feeling, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the second embodiment, a display device 41 capable of displaying a predetermined effect is provided, and the display device 41 can display a specific image (effect image 617) according to a special gaming state, and the specific image (effect image 617) can be displayed. Is displayed on the virtual line 822. As a result, the player can use the effect image 617, the accessory lamp 820a, the RUSH lamp 812, (
The existence of the virtual line 822 is recognized by the mode display unit 674) as an option, and the virtual line 8 is recognized.
It becomes easier to direct the line of sight to the large winning opening unit 806 (special variable winning device 38) arranged on the 22.

In the second embodiment, the display device 41 can display the first suggestion information (mode display unit 674) suggesting that the probability of entering the special gaming state is high in conjunction with the suggestion light emission (suggested light emission in the probable change state). The first suggestion information (mode display unit 674) is displayed on the virtual line 822. As a result, the player can use the mode display unit 674, the accessory lamp 820a, and R.
The USH lamp 812 (optional effect image 617) recognizes the existence of the virtual line 822, and the line of sight is easily directed to the large winning opening unit 806 (special variable winning device 38) arranged on the virtual line 822.

In the second embodiment, the display device 41 is linked to the suggested light emission (suggested light emission at the time of a small hit), and the second suggestion information (arrow image) suggesting the direction in which the variable winning device (large winning opening unit 806) is arranged. 619) can be displayed, and the second suggestion information (arrow image 619) is displayed on the virtual line 822. As a result, the player's line of sight can be seen in the large winning opening unit 806 (
It can be reliably directed to the special variable winning device 38).

In the second embodiment, the first light emitting means (accessory lamp 820a) is the second light emitting means (RU).
The SH lamp 812) is characterized in that it emits light according to a light emitting mode related to the light emitting mode. As a result, the accessory lamp 820a can support the suggestion of the small hit rush by the RUSH lamp 812, and the line of sight can be easily directed to the large winning opening unit 806 (special variable winning device 38).

In the second embodiment, the second light emitting means (RUSH lamp 812) is characterized in that it emits light in a light emitting mode different from the suggested light emitting in the special gaming state (big hit). This makes it possible to distinguish between the suggestion of a small hit rush and the suggestion of a big hit.

In the second embodiment, the second light emitting means (RUSH lamp 812) is arranged on the opposite side of the variable winning device (large winning opening unit 806) of the first light emitting means (accessory lamp 820a). It is a feature. As a result, the accessory lamp 820a and the RUSH lamp 812 are turned on, so that the large winning opening unit 806 (special variable winning device) sandwiched between them can be noticed.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment includes a unit (general winning opening unit 808) having a winning opening (general winning opening 35), and is special when the result of the game (variable display game) becomes a special result. In the gaming machine 10 that generates a gaming state, a unit (general winning opening unit 8)
On the front of 08) is a decorative part (seal 81) that decorates the unit (general winning opening unit 808).
5) is provided, and the sticker 815 displays general winning opening position information (position information 819a, 819b) indicating the position of the winning opening (general winning opening 35) and related information 817 related to the special gaming state. It is characterized by being.

As a result, the sticker 815 displays the winning opening position information (position information 819a, 819b) and the related information 817, so that the player can pay attention to it. Further, since the related information 817 is displayed on the sticker 815, the content of the special gaming state can be easily understood.

Further, the general winning opening unit 808 can be applied to other models by applying the sticker 815 reflecting the related information 817 to other models having different related information 817, and the general winning opening unit 808 can be applied to other models. Can increase the versatility of.

In the second embodiment, the unit (general winning opening unit 808) includes a batch display device 50 that displays the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 so as to be visible from the front of the unit (general winning opening unit 808). The related information 817 is characterized in that it is information regarding a display mode of the batch display device 50. Thereby, the game state displayed by the batch display device 50 can be grasped from the related information 817.

In the second embodiment, the related information 817 is characterized in that it is information regarding the duration (round) of the special gaming state. As a result, the round information displayed by the batch display device 50 can be grasped from the related information 817.

In the second embodiment, the seal 815 is characterized in that a region overlapping with the batch display device 50 is opened when the unit (general winning opening unit 808) is viewed from the front surface. As a result, the sticker 815 can be attached to the front surface of the unit (general winning opening unit 808) without impairing the visibility of the batch display device 50. Further, even when the seal 815 is transparent, it is preferable to open a portion overlapping with the batch display device 50. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the batch display device 50 is difficult to see due to the reflection of light on the surface of the sticker 815. Further, it is possible to prevent dust from adhering between the seal 815 (adhesive portion) and the batch display device 50.

In the second embodiment, the seal 815 is characterized in that the area overlapping with the batch display device 50 when the unit (general winning opening unit 808) is viewed from the front is transparent.
As a result, the sticker 815 can be attached to the front surface of the unit (general winning opening unit 808) without impairing the visibility of the batch display device 50.

In the second embodiment, the seal 815 has related information 817 in the batch display device 50.
It is characterized in that the emphasis information 815b that emphasizes the position where the lighting display is performed is displayed. As a result, the lighting display portion (round display unit 60) corresponding to the related information 817 can be reliably grasped in the batch display device 50.

In the second embodiment, the unit (general winning opening unit 808) includes an out opening 30b into which an out ball flows, and the seal 815 displays out opening position information (position information 818a) indicating the position of the out opening 30b. It is characterized by being done. This allows the unit (
The position of the out opening 30b in the general winning opening unit 808) can be grasped.

In the second embodiment, the seal 815 is characterized by having a shape that follows the outer shape of the front surface of the unit (general winning opening unit 808). As a result, the seal 815 unit (
Positioning before attachment to the general winning opening unit 808) can be easily performed.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 70. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments,
The same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

[Game control device and production control device]
FIG. 51 is a rear view of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, the gaming machine 1
A game control device 100 (main board) is arranged at the lower part of the back surface of 0. Game control device 10
0 is covered with a transparent case 100a so that it can be visually recognized from the outside of the case 100a.

Further, on the back surface of the game machine 10, on the game control device 100 (main board) or on the game control device 1
A setting key switch 93 and a RAM initialization switch 112 are arranged adjacent to 00.
The setting key switch 93 can be operated by opening the lid portion 93a.

In the game machine 10, the setting is changed by turning on the power with the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on, for example, on the performance display device 152 (FIG. 79) mounted on the game control device 100. The current probability setting value is displayed, and the probability setting value can be changed by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112, which is also used as the setting value change switch. Then, by turning off the setting key switch 93, the setting variable state ends, and the performance display device 152 (FIG. 79) is also turned off. Further, by turning on the power with the setting key switch 93 turned on and the RAM initialization switch 112 turned off, the setting confirmation state is set, the current probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 152, and the setting key switch 93 is pressed. By turning it off, the setting confirmation state ends, and the performance display device 152 also turns off.

The effect control device 300 is arranged on the upper part of the back surface of the gaming machine 10. Production control device 300
Is housed in a transparent sub-board box 841, and the sub-board box 841 is attached to the back surface of the gaming machine 10.

[Sub-board box configuration]
FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the sub-board box 841 that houses the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. 52, the sub-board box 841 is the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 8.
It accommodates 40. The ROM board 840 stores information related to the effect content of the effect control device 300, and stores information unique to each model of the gaming machine 10.

The sub-board box 841 is a box lower member 842 attached to the back surface of the gaming machine 10.
And, while engaging with the box lower member 842, the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840
A box upper member 843 (first case member) that forms an internal space 841a together with a box lower member 842 (second case member), and a fastening screw 858 that fastens the box lower member 842 and the box upper member 843. Fastening screw 8 attached to the box upper member 843
A cover member 859 (caulking member) for concealing 58 is provided.

A plurality of insertion holes 844a are formed on the outer edge of the effect control device 300, and a screw 844b is inserted into the insertion holes 844a. A plurality of insertion holes 844a are also formed in the ROM board 840, and the screw 844b is inserted into the insertion holes 844a.

Further, the effect control device 300 is arranged with the socket 844c, and the ROM board 840 is arranged with the connector 840a to be fitted into the socket 844c. And connector 840
a is fitted into the socket 844c, and the integrated object of the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840 is attached to the box lower member 842. The mounting positions of the socket 844c and the connector 840a may be interchanged with each other.

The box lower member 842 is a tray-shaped member having an opening on the side facing the box upper member 843, and is a member to which the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840 are mounted. The box lower member 842 is provided with a screw hole 842a at a position facing the insertion hole 844a arranged in the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840.

Therefore, with the insertion hole 844a and the screw hole 842a communicating with each other, the screw 844b is inserted into the insertion hole 844a and screwed into the screw hole 842a, whereby the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840 are attached to the box lower member 842. Be done.

A plurality of ribs 842b (convex portions) that abut on the effect control device 300 and the ROM substrate 840 are arranged on the box lower member 842. The rib 842b directly abuts on the substrate while avoiding interference with the device arranged on the effect control device 300 and the device arranged on the ROM substrate 840 (see FIG. 55). As a result, it is possible to reduce the bending of the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840 after mounting.

The box upper member 843 is a tray-shaped member having substantially the same outer shape as the box lower member 842 and having an opening on the side facing the box lower member 842. A large number of ventilation holes 843a are formed in the box upper member 843 to release heat generated from the effect control device 300 to the outside. Further, a notch 8 is provided at a position corresponding to the outer circumference of the ROM board 840 of the box upper member 843.
43b is formed. The ROM board 840 can be taken out by cutting the box upper member 843 with a nipper or the like following the notch 843b. Pachinko machine 10
In the development stage of the above, since the ROM substrate 840 may be taken out frequently, the notch 843b is provided in consideration of work efficiency. Of course, during normal use, the ventilation holes 843
It plays the same role as a.

A display area 843c is provided on the surface of the box upper member 843, and a sticker or an information display board on which the specifications of the gaming machine 10 and the like are described are arranged in the display area 843c.

The box lower member 842 and the box upper member 843 are configured to engage with each other. The upper part of the box lower member 842 is provided with two first engaged portions 845, and the upper part of the box upper member 843 is provided with two first engaged portions 846. The first engaged portion 845 has a claw shape that extends upward from the box lower member 842 and is bent in a direction away from the box upper member 843 from an intermediate position. The first engaging portion 846 is a box upper member 8
It has an engaging hole 846a that extends from the upper part of the box 43 toward the box lower member 842 and is inserted and engaged with the first engaged portion 845.

Further, a second engaged portion 847 is provided at the lower portion of the box lower member 842, and the box upper member 8 is provided.
A second engaging portion 848 is also provided in the lower part of the 43. The second engaging portion 848 is the second engaged portion 847.
It can be deformed so that it can be detachably fitted into the. The second engaged portion 847 is also the second.
It is provided with a space for deforming the second engaging portion 848 in order to disengage the engaging portion 848.

The engagement between the box upper member 843 and the box lower member 842 is first performed in the engagement hole 846a of the first engaging portion 846 with the box upper member 843 tilted with respect to the box lower member 842.
The engaged portion 845 is inserted (engaged), and in that state, the box upper member 843 is inserted into the first engaging portion 84.
It is rotated around 6 so that it faces the box lower member 842 and the second engaging portion 848.
May be engaged with the second engaged portion 847. On the contrary, when disengaging, the second engaging portion 84
The box upper member 843 may be rotated (turned up) in the opposite direction around the first engaging portion 846 in a state where the 8 is deformed and disengaged from the second engaged portion 847.

The box lower member 842 includes a plurality of back engaging portions 842c that engage with the back surface of the gaming machine 10 (FIGS. 55 and 56).

FIG. 53 is a front view of the box upper member 843 to which the cover member 859 is attached.
FIG. 54 is a partial detailed view of FIG. 53 (enlarged view of the portion surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 53).
54 (a) is a diagram when the cover member 859 is not provided, and FIG. 54 (b) is a diagram when the cover member 859 is attached. FIG. 55 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 53 and a partial detailed view thereof. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 53, which is a view when the cover member 859 is attached, and is a partial detailed view thereof.

The box lower member 842 and the box upper member 843 have a configuration in which the box lower member 842 and the box upper member 843 after engagement are fastened to each other. The box lower member 842 includes a lower fastening portion 849 (FIG. 53) extending downward from the lower portion of the box lower member 842 and opening on the side facing the box upper member 843. The box upper member 843 extends downward from the lower part of the box upper member 843, and has an upper fastening portion 852 provided with an accommodating portion 853 for accommodating a cover member 859 described later on the opposite side of the box lower member 842 from the lower portion. FIG. 52) is provided.
Then, the lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 are fastened to each other by the fastening screw 858 (fastening means) (FIG. 53, FIG. 54 (a)).

The lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 are a box lower member 842 and a box upper member 84.
When 3 engages with each other, they overlap each other, and the box lower member 842 and the box upper member 84
A partition space 851 (FIG. 55) different from the internal space 841a formed by 3 is formed. Fastening screws 858 can be accommodated in this partition space 851.

The lower fastening portion 849 is provided with a screw hole 850 (fastening means) (FIGS. 55 and 56), and the upper fastening portion 852 is provided with an insertion hole 854 (fastening means) (FIGs. 55 and 56). Also, screw holes 850
And the insertion hole 854 communicates with each other when the lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 overlap. Therefore, the lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 are fastened to each other by introducing the fastening screw 858 from the accommodating portion 853 side of the upper fastening portion 852, inserting it into the insertion hole 854, and further screwing it into the screw hole 850. (FIG. 55, 56).

A cover member 859 (FIG. 54) that covers the fastening screw 858 is attached to the upper fastening portion 852 in order to prohibit access to a tool (driver or the like) for releasing the fastening of the fastening screw 858.

As shown in FIG. 53 and the like, in the present embodiment, the lower fastening portions 849 are arranged in pairs (as the first lower fastening portion and the second lower fastening portion), and the upper fastening portion 852 is also (first) correspondingly. It is arranged in pairs (as the upper fastening part and the second lower fastening part), but each has a shape that is inverted on the left and right when viewed from the front. Correspondingly, the cover member 859 attached to one of the upper fastening portions 852 (first upper fastening portion) and the cover member 859 attached to the other (second upper fastening portion) of the upper fastening portion 852 are left and right when viewed from the front. Has an inverted shape. In addition, the upper fastening portion 852
A partition space 851 (first partition space) is formed by overlapping one of the lower fastening portions 849 (first lower connecting portion) facing the one (first upper fastening portion), and the other of the upper fastening portions 852. (2nd
The partition space 851 (second partition space) is formed by overlapping the other (second lower fastening portion) of the lower fastening portion 849 facing the upper fastening portion (see FIGS. 53 and 55).

It is possible to fasten only one of the pair of lower fastening portions 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 with the fastening screw 858, and to realize the fastening of the box upper member 843 and the box lower member 842 without fastening the other. can. At that time, the fastening screw 858 may be accommodated in the partition space 851 formed in the other of the pair of lower fastening portions 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 (see FIG. 55).

As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the accommodating portion 853 has a shape that follows the outer shape of the cover member 859 as described later. A fixing portion 8 having an insertion hole 854 formed in the bottom of the accommodating portion 853.
54a is provided. Screw hole 850 (FIG. 5) with the fastening screw 858 inserted through the insertion hole 854.
By screwing it into 2) and fixing the fixing portion 854a to the lower fastening portion 849, the accommodating portion 853
(Upper fastening portion 852) can be fastened to the lower fastening portion 849.

Further, through holes 855 are formed in the upper and lower portions of the fixed portion 854a at the bottom of the accommodating portion 853. Further, from the upper inner wall and the lower inner wall of the accommodating portion 853, the third engaged portion 856 extends so as to cover a part of the through hole 855 when viewed from the front, and the third engaged portion 856 is provided.
Extends toward the bottom of the containment section 853 (FIG. 55).

[Construction of cover member]
The cover member 859 has an outer shape having a rectangular lid portion 860 when viewed from the front and a notch 861 (FIG. 54 (b)) protruding outward on one side of the lid portion 860, and has a center of the lid portion 860. Has a circular opening 862. Correspondingly, as described above, the accommodating portion 853 is provided with an outer shape (cover portion 860 and notch 861) of the cover member 859 and an inner wall having a shape following the uneven shape. The peripheral edge of the lid portion 860 (and the notch 861) is covered with the cover member 85.
When 9 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 853, it comes into contact with the peripheral edge of the accommodating portion 853. As a result, the accommodating portion 8
The rattling of the cover member 859 housed in 53 can be reduced. In addition, the cover member 859 (
By attaching the notch 861 to the lid portion 860), the orientation of the cover member 859 with the accommodating portion 853 can be determined (FIG. 54 (b)).

FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the cover member 859. FIG. 58 is a back view showing the mounting surface of the cover member 859. FIG. 59 is a front view of the cover member 859. FIG. 60 is a left side view of the cover member 859. FIG. 61 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG. 62
Is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIGS. 58 and 59.

The accommodating portion 8 is provided on the mounting surface (the surface facing the accommodating portion 853) of the cover member 859 (cover portion 860).
A pair of third engaging portions 863 (engaging portions) that engage with the 53 side are arranged (FIGS. 57, 58,
FIG. 60). The third engaging portion 863 is arranged in pairs so as to be line-symmetrical (back-to-back) with the opening 862 sandwiched from the vertical direction (may be the left-right direction). The third engaging portion 863 is a member extending in the normal direction of the mounting surface, and is provided with a wedge portion 863a at the tip thereof, which protrudes from the other portions of the third engaging portion 863 and has an arrow-shaped side surface. (Fig. 60).

Correspondingly, the accommodating portion 853 includes a third engaged portion 856 as described above (FIG. 55). The third engaged portion 856 is arranged in pairs so as to engage with the third engaging portion 863 from the outside, and is inclined to abut on the wedge portion 863a of the third engaging portion 863 when the cover member 859 is attached. It has a surface 856a.

The third engaging portion 863 and the third engaged portion 856 are each deformable ().
FIG. 68). The width of the fixed portion 854a is preferably shorter than the distance between the third engaging portion 863 on one side and the third engaging portion 863 on the other side. As a result, the third engaging portion 863 is brought into the third position.
By abutting (pressing) the engaged portion 856, the pair of third engaged portions 863 can be easily deformed in the direction of approaching each other (direction approaching the fixed portion 854a), and the third engaging portion can be easily deformed. Part 8
Engagement between 63 and the third engaged portion 856 can be easily performed.

On the contrary, the third engaged portion 856 in the direction in which the tip portions of the pair of third engaged portions 856 are separated from each other.
And / or by deforming the third engaging portion 863 so that the wedge portions 863a of the pair of third engaging portions 863 approach each other, the third engaging portion 863 (wedge portion 863a).
And the third engaged portion 856 can be disengaged. Therefore, the third engaging portion 863 is
It is detachably engaged with the third engaged portion 856.

Fitting portions 864A, 864B, 864C, 864D (FIGS. 57 and 58) to be fitted on the accommodating portion 853 side are arranged on the mounting surface of the cover member 859 (cover portion 860). Correspondingly, the accommodating portion 853 includes fitting portions 857A, 857B, 857C, 857D into which the fitting portions 864A-864D are fitted (FIG. 54 (a)). Fitting part 8
By fitting the 64A-864D into the fitted portions 857A-857D, respectively, it is possible to reduce the rattling of the cover member 859 after the third engaging portion 863 engages with the third engaged portion 856. The fitting portion 864A is designed to be wider than the other fitting portions 864B-864D, and the fitting portion 857A is also designed to be wider than the other fitting portions 857B-857D. As a result, the accommodating portion 8 of the cover member 859 is similar to the notch 861.
The orientation of the attachment with respect to 53 can be determined.

Further, on the mounting surface of the lid portion 860, the reinforcing portion 865A for connecting the fitting portion 864A and the fitting portion 964B to reinforce the rigidity of both, and the fitting portion 864C and the fitting portion 864D are connected to reinforce the rigidity of both. A reinforcing portion 865B is provided (FIGS. 57 and 58).

The opening 862 has a diameter larger than that of the fastening screw 858, and is formed so as to accommodate the fastening screw 858 inside when viewed from the front with the cover member 859 housed in the accommodating portion 853. .. Then, as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the opening 862 is provided with cutting portions (first cutting portion 866, second cutting portion 867) so as to cover at least a part of the opening 862. The cut portion opens the opening 862 by cutting itself.

The cut portion passes through the center of the opening 862 and extends in the vertical direction (may be inclined), and is connected to the upper end and the lower end of the inner wall of the opening 862 (FIG. 57, FIG. 57).
58, 59, 61) and the first cut portion 86 when viewed from the front facing the opening 862.
The second cutting portion 867 connected to the first cutting portion 866 in an arrangement orthogonal to (intersecting) with 6 (FIG. 57, FIG.
58, 59, 62), and the opening 862 is covered with a cross shape (FIG. 57, 58) by the first cutting portion 866 and the second cutting portion 867. The second cutting portion 867 is arranged so as to project toward the front side of the lid portion 860 (the side opposite to the side on which the third engaging portion 863 is arranged) (FIG. 6).
0, FIG. 62), connected to the lid portion 860 at a position that is the outer periphery of the opening 862 (FIG. 59, FIG. 62).

The cutting portion (first cutting portion 866, second cutting portion 867) covers the front of the fastening screw 858 so that the driver or the like cannot access the fastening screw 858 to prevent fraud. but,
When repairing or replacing the effect control device 300 or the ROM board 840, it is necessary to cut the cut portion to open the opening 862 and remove the fastening screw 858. The cut portion is cut by a cutting means such as nippers.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61, it is preferable that the thickness of the first cut portion 866 is formed to be thinner than the thickness of the lid portion 860. As a result, the first cutting portion 866 can be easily cut. Further, as shown in FIG. 62, it is also preferable to form a groove 867b from the mounting surface (back surface) side in the second cut portion 867. As a result, the second cutting portion 867 can be easily cut by cutting the portion where the groove 867b is formed. Here, the shape of the groove 867b is arbitrary, and as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, a concentric circle may be formed with the opening 862. If the cutting strength of the cutting means such as nippers is sufficient, the thickness of the first cutting portion 866 may be the same as the thickness of the lid portion 860, and the groove 867b of the second cutting portion 867 may be omitted. ..

63 is a view showing the cutting area 866a of the first cutting portion 866 of the cover member 859, FIG. 63 (a) is a front view, and FIG. 63 (b) is a back surface (mounting surface) view. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the cutting region 867a of the second cutting portion 867 (and the first cutting portion 866) of the cover member 859, where FIG. 64 (a) is a front view and FIG. 64 (b) is a back surface (mounting). Surface) It is a figure.

When cutting the cut portion, for example, as shown in FIG. 63, it is preferable to first cut the cutting region 866a of the first cutting portion 866 using a cutting means such as nippers, and then FIG. 64. As shown in, it is preferable to cut the cutting region 867a (groove 867b) of the second cutting portion 867. Alternatively, conversely, the cutting region 867a of the second cutting portion 867 may be cut, and then the cutting region of the first cutting portion may be cut. In either case, the cut piece 868 (FIG. 67 (a)) separated by cutting the first cut portion 866 and the second cut portion 867 is on the front side of the lid portion 860 due to the components of the second cut portion 867. Since there is a large weight on the cut piece 868, the cut piece 868 has a lid 8
It is possible to avoid falling to the front side of the 60 and falling to the mounting surface side. As a result, the cut piece 86
8 can enter the partition space 851 (FIG. 55) and avoid the complexity of taking it out. Of course, by cutting out the cut piece 868 with the portion to be the cut piece 868 supported in advance by the operator, it is possible to more reliably prevent the cut piece 868 from entering the depth of the accommodating portion 853.

[Cover member mounting process]
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an attachment process of the cover member 859, FIG. 65 (a) shows a process of attaching the fastening screw 858, and FIG. 65 (b) shows a state before attaching the cover member 859. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an attachment process of the cover member 859, FIG. 66 (c) shows a state in which the cover member 859 is being attached to the box upper member 843, and FIG. 66 (d) shows a state in which the cover member 859 is attached to the box upper member. The state attached to 843 is shown respectively.

The attachment process of the cover member 859 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the lower fastening portion 849 (box lower member 842) and the upper fastening portion 852 (box upper member 843).
The lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 are fastened to each other by inserting the fastening screw 858 into the insertion hole 854 of the upper fastening portion 852 and screwing it into the screw hole 850. And FIG. 65
As shown in (b), the cover member 859 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 853.

As shown in FIG. 66 (c), when the cover member 859 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 853, the wedge portion 863a of the third engaging portion 863 constituting the cover member 859 becomes the inclined surface 85 of the third engaged portion 856.
It abuts (presses) on 6a, the third engaging portion 863 applies stress to the third engaged portion 856 due to the so-called wedge effect, and the pair of third engaged portions 856 are deformed in a direction away from each other. .. On the other hand, the third engaging portion 863 receives a drag force (stress) from the third engaged portion 856, and the pair of third engaging portions 863 are deformed in a direction in which they approach each other. While performing such deformation, the third engaging portion 863 (wedge portion 86)
3a) proceeds toward the through hole 855.

As shown in FIG. 66 (d), when the wedge portion 863a enters the through hole 855 and the wedge portion 893a passes through the third engaged portion 856, it enters the third engaged portion 863 and the third engaged portion 856. The applied stress is released, and the wedge portion 863a engages with the tip portion of the third engaged portion 856. As a result, the cover member 859 is attached to the upper fastening portion 852 in such a manner that it is accommodated in the accommodating portion 853. Further, at this time, the fitting portion 864A-864D is the fitting portion 857A-857D.
The peripheral edge of the lid portion 860 (and the notch 861) abuts on the peripheral edge of the accommodating portion 853 (see FIG. 54 (a), FIG. 58).

[Cover member removal process]
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a step of removing the cover member 859, FIG. 67 (a) shows a step of cutting the cut portion, and FIG. 67 (b) shows a step of removing the fastening screw 858. Figure 6
8 is a diagram showing a removal process of the cover member 859, and FIG. 68 (c) is a diagram showing the cover member 85.
FIG. 68 (d) shows a state in which 9 is being removed from the box upper member 843, as shown in FIG. 68 (d).
Is removed from the box upper member 843, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the first cut portion 866 and the second cut portion 867 are cut to take out the cut piece 868, and the opening 862 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), a screwdriver or the like is introduced from the opening 862 and the fastening screw 858 is used.
The lower fastening portion 849 (box lower member 842) and the upper fastening portion 852 (box upper member 843) are separated from each other.

As shown in FIG. 68 (c), the third engaging portion 863 and the third engaged portion 856 are deformed and the wedge portion 863a is taken out from the through hole 855. At this time, for example, the wedge portions 863a of the pair of third engaging portions 863 are deformed so as to approach each other, and / or the pair of third engaged portions 856 are deformed so as to approach each other.
The wedge portion 863a may be disengaged from the tip portion of the third engaged portion 856 by deforming the tips thereof so as to be separated from each other, and the wedge portion 863a may be pushed toward the lid portion 860 in that state.
As a result, the wedge portion 863a comes into contact with the inclined surface 856a of the third engaged portion 856. Then, when the wedge portion 863a is further pushed toward the lid portion 860, the deformation of the third engaged portion 856 becomes smaller.

As shown in FIG. 68 (d), when the wedge portion 863a is continuously pushed in, the third engaging portion 863
The third engaged portion 856 returns to its original shape, and the wedge portion 863a is separated from the third engaged portion 856, so that the used cover member 859 is separated from the accommodating portion 853 (upper fastening portion 852). do. Then, when refastening, the cover member 859 may be newly prepared and the box lower member 842 and the box upper member 843 may be reused to perform the steps shown in FIGS. 65 and 66.

[First modification of the cover member]
FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view of a first modification of the cover member 859. Cover member 8 of the first modification
The 59a has the same outer shape as the cover member 859 (see FIG. 62), but the portion of the cover member 859a corresponding to the second cut portion 867 is an extension portion 869. Extension part 869
Is connected to the first cut portion 866 in a state orthogonal to (crossed) like the second cut portion 867. However, unlike the second cut portion 867, the lid portion 8 is in contact with the lid portion 860 in a state of being unconnected (not connected) to the lid portion 860 at a position on the outer periphery of the opening portion 862, or at predetermined intervals.
It is separated from 60.

As a result, only a part of the first cutting portion 866 and the extending portion 86 are cut only by cutting the first cutting portion 866.
Since the cut piece 870 formed by 9 is formed and separated from the lid portion 860, the work efficiency is improved. Further, since the length of the extending portion 869 constituting the cutting piece 870 is longer than the diameter of the opening 862, it is possible to prevent the cutting piece 870 from entering the inside of the cover member 859a.

[Second modification of the cover member]
70 is a second modification of the cover member 859, FIG. 70A is a front view, and FIG. 70B is a front view.
) Is a back view. The cover member 859b of the second modification has a configuration in which the first cutting portion 866 and the second cutting portion 867c are connected in the opening 862. The second cut portion 877c is orthogonal to (intersects) the first cut portion 866 and has both ends connected to the left and right inner walls of the opening 862, and is opened in a cross shape by the first cut portion 866 and the second cut portion 867c. It covers part 862. In this modification, by cutting the cutting region 866a and the cutting region 867d, the cutting piece 871 may enter the inside of the cover member 859b, but the cutting piece 871 does not get in the way when the cover member 859b is removed. Can also apply the second modification.

In the second modification, the opening 862 is covered with a cross shape, but other than the cross shape, any other shape may be used as long as a gap is left in the opening 862 for the tip of a cutting means such as nippers to enter. For example, the configuration may be such that three first cut portions 866 (or second cut portions 867c) are connected to the opening 862 in a state where they intersect each other at 120 degrees. Further, for example, one first cutting portion 866 and two second cutting portions 867 may be connected to the opening 862 in a state where they intersect each other at 120 degrees.

[Action / effect of the third embodiment]
According to the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the first case member (box upper member 843) and the second
In the gaming machine 10 having a substrate (effect control device 300) housed in the (sub-boarding box 841) internal space 841a formed of the case member (box lower member 842), the first
Fastening means (insertion hole 854, screw hole 850, fastening screw 858) for fastening the case member (box upper member 843) and the second case member (box lower member 842), and the first case member (
The cover member 859 is provided with a cover member 859 arranged so as to engage with the box upper member 843) and to cover the fastening means (insertion hole 854, screw hole 850, fastening screw 858).
Is detachably engaged with the first case member (box upper member 843).

Conventionally, the cover member (cover member 859) is replaced with the board box (sub-board box 841).
) (When the cover member covers the fastening means (fastening screw 858, etc.) again)
There is a problem that it is costly because the entire board box to which the cover member is attached after cutting (opening) is replaced. Further, when the opened board box is refastened by the fastening means, the cover member is in a cut (opened) state, which is vulnerable in terms of security and may be fraudulent.

However, with the above configuration, the first case member (box upper member 843) and the second case member (box lower member 842) can be reused by removing the cover member 859, so that the cost can be suppressed. In addition, the first case member (box upper member 843)
When the second case member (box lower member 842) is fastened again by the fastening means, the fastening means can be covered by the new cover member 859 after that, so that the substrate (effect control device 3) can be covered.
It is possible to prevent an illegal operation for 00) and suppress the cost.

In the third embodiment, the cover member 859 has fastening means (insertion hole 854, screw hole 850).
, The opening 862 is provided at a position facing the fastening screw 858), and the opening 862 is provided with the opening 8.
It is characterized by having a cutting portion (first cutting portion 866, second cutting portion 867, 867c) which is arranged so as to cover at least a part of 62 and opens the opening 862 by being cut.
As a result, the cutting portion prohibits the access of the means (driver or the like) for releasing the fastening of the fastening means (fastening screw 858). Further, since the cutting portion (first cutting portion 866, second cutting portion 867, 867c) covers the opening 862, leaving a gap for the tip of the means for cutting the cutting portion (nippers or the like) to enter, the cutting portion of the cutting portion. Cutting can be easily performed.

In the third embodiment, the cutting portion is arranged so as to intersect the first cutting portion 866 having both ends attached to the inner wall of the opening 862 and the first cutting portion 866 when the opening 862 is viewed from the front. The cover member 859 (cover portion 860) and the second cutting portion 867 connected to the first cutting portion 866 are provided, and the second cutting portion 867 is a fastening means (insertion hole 85) for the cover member 859.
4. It is characterized in that it is connected to the opposite surface (front surface) of the surface (mounting surface) facing the screw hole 850 and the fastening screw 858).

Conventionally, when the cover member is cut, a part of the cover member (the portion to be cut and removed) falls into the board box or out of the board box, resulting in poor efficiency of the cutting work.

However, with the above configuration, the cutting portion can be realized with a simple configuration, and the first cutting portion 86 can be realized.
The cut piece 868 that cuts and separates 6 and the second cutting portion 867 falls to the front side due to the weight of the second cutting portion 867. Therefore, it is not necessary to take out the cut piece 868 without the cut piece 868 falling inside the cover member 559, and the direction in which the cut piece 868 falls can be predicted, so that the complexity of the work can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, the groove 867b is formed at the cutting position of the second cutting portion 867. As a result, the second cutting portion 867 can be easily cut.

In the third embodiment, the cutting portion extends from the first cutting portion 866 having both ends connected to the inner wall of the opening 862 and the first cutting portion 866 so as to intersect the first cutting portion 866, and both ends are described above. It is characterized by comprising a second cutting portion 867c connected to an inner wall. As a result, the cut portion can be realized with a simple configuration.

In the third embodiment, the cutting portion is arranged so as to intersect the first cutting portion 866 whose both ends are connected to the inner wall of the opening 862 and the first cutting portion 866 when the opening 862 is viewed from the front. At the same time, it is connected to the first cutting portion 866, and the cover member 859 (cover portion 860).
The extension portion 869, which is in a non-connected state, is provided, and the extension portion 869 is a cover member 859.
(Cover 860) is characterized in that it is arranged on the opposite surface (front surface) of the surface (mounting surface) facing the fastening means (insertion hole 854, screw hole 850, fastening screw 858).

As a result, only a part of the first cutting portion 866 and the extending portion 86 are cut only by cutting the first cutting portion 866.
Since the cut piece 870 formed by 9 is formed and separated from the lid portion 860, the work efficiency is improved. Further, since the length of the extending portion 869 constituting the cutting piece 870 is longer than the diameter of the opening 862, it is possible to prevent the cutting piece 870 from entering the inside of the cover member 859a.

In the third embodiment, the cover member 859 includes an engaging portion (third engaging portion 863), and the first case member (box upper member 843, upper fastening portion 852) is an engaged portion (third covered portion). Engagement part 8
56) is provided, and the cover member 859 is provided with the first case member (box upper member 843, by engaging the engaging portion (third engaging portion 863) with the engaged portion (third engaged portion 856). Upper fastening part 852)
The engaged portion (third engaged portion 863) and the engaged portion (third engaged portion 856) are deformable in a direction of disengaging each other at the time of engagement. It is characterized by.
This makes it possible to realize a removable cover member 859 with a simple configuration.

In the third embodiment, the cover member 859 includes a fitting portion 864A-864D.
The first case member (upper fastening portion 852) includes a fitting portion 857A-857D, and the fitting portion 864A-864D is characterized in that it is fitted into the fitting portion 857A-857D at the time of engagement. As a result, the rattling of the cover member 859 after the third engaging portion 863 is engaged with the third engaged portion 856 can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, the first case member (upper fastening portion 852) is the cover member 8 when engaged.
The housing portion 853 capable of accommodating the 59 is provided, and the peripheral edge of the cover member 859 (the lid portion 860) is in contact with the peripheral edge of the accommodating portion 853 at the time of engagement. As a result, the rattling of the cover member 859 housed in the housing portion 853 can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, a notch 861 is formed on the peripheral edge of the cover member 859 (cover portion 860), and the accommodating portion 853 is formed following the outer shape of the peripheral edge of the cover member 859 (cover portion 860) including the notch 861. It is characterized by being done. As a result, the orientation of the cover member 859 with the accommodating portion 853 can be determined.

In the third embodiment, a partition space 851 different from the internal space 841a is provided between the first case member (upper fastening portion 852) and the second case member (lower fastening portion 849), and the fastening means is a fastening means.
A screw (fastening screw 858) for fastening the first case member (upper fastening portion 852) and the second case member (lower fastening portion 849) is provided, and the screw (fastening screw 858) can be accommodated in the partition space 851. It is characterized by that. As a result, even when the fastening screw 858 is not used for fastening, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw 858 from being lost by accommodating it in the partition space 851.

In the third embodiment, the first case member (box upper member 843) is the first upper fastening portion (
The second upper fastening portion 852) and the first upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852) are arranged at different positions.
Includes an upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852). The second case member (box lower member 842) is
It includes a first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849) and a second lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849) arranged at a position different from that of the first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849). The first upper fastening portion (box upper member 843) and the second case member (box lower member 842) are engaged with each other.
The upper fastening portion 852) and the first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849) face each other, and the second upper fastening portion and the second lower fastening portion face each other. The screws are the first screw (fastening screw 858) that fastens the first upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852) and the first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849), and the second upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852). ) And a second screw (fastening screw 858) for fastening the second lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849). The partition space 851 is a first partition space (partition space 851) formed by overlapping a first upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852) and a first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849).
), And a second partition space (partition space 851) formed by overlapping the second upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852) and the second lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849). Then, with the first screw (fastening screw 858) housed in the first partition space (partition space 851), the second screw (fastening screw 858) is used to fasten the second upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852) and the second lower fastening portion. It is possible to fasten the portion (lower fastening portion 849), or the second screw (fastening screw 858) is connected to the second partition space (partition space 8).
In the state of being housed in 51), the first upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 85) is used by the first screw (fastening screw 858).
2) and the first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849) can be fastened.

With the above configuration, the cover member 859 can be attached to both upper fastening portions 852 with the fastening screw 858 housed in one partition space 851. When the board (effect control device 300) is taken out for inspection or the like, the cover member 859 attached to the other upper fastening portion 852 is opened and the fastening screw 858 used for fastening is removed to remove the board (effect). The control device 300) and the fastening screw 858 housed in one of the partition spaces 851 can be taken out. After that, when refastening, the unopened cover member 859 attached to one of the upper fastening portions 852 is temporarily removed from the upper fastening portion 852, and both upper fastening portions 852 and the lower fastening portion 849 are fastened by the fastening screw 858. An unopened cover member 859 can be attached to one of the upper fastening portions 852 while fastening each. That is, one partition space 85
By storing the fastening screw 858 in 1, even if you open it once, you can fasten it again.
It is possible to carry out from one inspection to re-fastening without replacing both cover members 859, and it is possible to reduce costs.

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 78. The fourth embodiment relates to the details of the configuration of the upper winning opening unit 800 (V attacker, large winning unit). The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 71 is an exploded view of the game board 30, the control base unit 813, and the like.

The configuration of the game board 30 is as described above (see FIG. 35 and the like), but the game board 30 has a housing unit 3.
In addition to the large winning opening unit 800 housed in 0f, it also has a decorative member 831 arranged on the center side (here, the left side) of the game board of the large winning opening unit 800. The decorative member 831 is an opaque member on which a character or the like is drawn, and even if the housing of the large winning opening unit 800 is transparent on the center side of the game board (here, the left side), the player can see from the center side of the game board. Grand prize opening unit 80
Make the inside of 0 invisible. The central portion 831a located at the center of the decorative member 831 in the vertical direction is arranged so as to face the large winning opening unit 800 and cover it from the center side of the game board. The upper 831b and the lower 831c in the vertical direction of the decorative member 831 may be arranged so as to face the flow path unit 802 and the general electric unit 804 and cover them from the center side of the game board, respectively.

The control base unit 813 is attached to the back surface of the game board 30. The control base unit 813 includes a falling accessory 810 (described above), a movable accessory 820 (described above), and a control unit 83.
0 and a logo member 832. The control unit 830 has a substantially box-like shape and has a predetermined depth in the front-rear direction, and accommodates a falling accessory 810 (described above), a movable accessory 820 (described above), a logo member 832, and the like. The control unit 830 integrally includes a back plate 830a as a bottom, an upper plate 830b, a right plate 830c, a left plate 830d, and a lower plate 830e as walls.
The back plate 830a has an opening 8 for making the display screen of the display device 41 (FIG. 35) visible.
30f is formed, and a display device 41 (FIG. 35) is attached to the back surface of the opening 830f. Further, a game control device 100 and an effect control device 300 are arranged on the rear side of the control unit 830 (FIG. 51).

The falling accessory 810 is attached to the control unit 830 at a position facing the upper plate 830b. The movable accessory 820 is attached to the control unit 830 at a position facing the left plate 830d and the lower plate 830e. The logo member 832 is attached to the control unit 830 at a position facing the lower plate 830e on the back side behind the movable accessory 820. A logo (characters) such as the model name of the gaming machine 10 is displayed on the logo member 832, and the logo is visible to the player through the transparent lower portion (above the stage portion 40b) of the center case 40 (above the stage portion 40b).
See FIG. 35).

FIG. 72 is an exploded view of the large winning opening unit 800 (V attacker, large winning unit).

The large prize opening unit 800 has a large entrance unit base 902 and a large entrance unit base 902.
An intermediate member 904 arranged behind the lower left part of the above, and a movable part drive mechanism 906 partly arranged adjacent to the right side of the intermediate member 904 behind the lower right part of the large entry unit base 902.
The general winning opening discharge unit 908 located behind the right center of the Oiri unit base 902 and substantially above the movable portion drive mechanism 906, and the Oiri splash unit drive mechanism 910 arranged substantially behind the intermediate member 904. , A transparent front decorative member 91 arranged in front of the Oiri unit base 902.
2. The large winning opening splash portion 914 (wing member), which is driven by the large entry splash portion drive mechanism 910 and opens and closes the blade member 914a, is provided.

Further, the large winning opening unit 800 has a winning opening switch 35a for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general winning opening 35 and a large winning opening switch 43 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the large winning opening 902h.
(Upper grand prize opening switch 39a, large entry count switch), specific area switch 72 (V switch) that detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 86 (V winning opening), and specific area switch 72 (V switch) that has passed through the large winning opening 902h. A residual ball discharge port switch 73 (detection means, residual ball switch) for detecting a game ball that has not passed through the region 86 as a residual ball is provided. The large winning opening 902h may be defined as an inlet portion (FIG. 72, 74) opened and closed by the blade member 914a of the first inflow path 917 (FIGS. 75 and 77) described later, and the large winning opening is also defined as a large winning opening. It may be defined as an opening (FIG. 72, 75) of the switch 43 (39a).

The large winning opening unit 800 is a combination of the large winning opening unit base 902, the intermediate member 904, and the general winning opening discharge unit 908 to form a specific area switch 72 (specific area 86), a residual ball discharge port switch 73, and a first described later. A housing including the inflow route 917 (and the second inflow route 918) is configured, and the housing includes a general winning opening 35 and a distribution channel for game balls that have won a prize in the general winning opening 35. As a result, the entire unit is miniaturized and the occupied area for the game area 32 (
Volume) can be reduced.

The large entry unit base 902 is a flow path forming member, and by being attached so as to cover the front decorative member 912 from the front, various flow paths of the game ball (upper left flow path 902a, which will be described later in FIGS. 74 and 76, right). The upper flow path 902b, the lower right flow path 902d, etc.) are formed. For this reason, the large-entry unit base 902 has a plate-shaped back surface portion 902f and a back surface portion 902 provided at various locations.
It has a flow path wall 902 g extending in the front-rear direction from f. Further, the flow path constituent portion 904c of the intermediate member 904 is attached from the rear to form the lower left inner flow path 902c.

The large entry unit base 902 has a passage frame 902k (a part of the flow path wall 902g) that forms a passage for a game ball that has passed or has passed through the specific area 86. The passage frame 902k has a rectangular cross section perpendicular to the front-rear direction, and is rectangular when viewed from the front. A specific area switch 72 is inserted and attached in the passage frame 902k, and an opening of the specific area switch 72 (corresponding to the specific area 86) is arranged in the passage frame 902k. On the back surface portion 902f of the large entry unit base 902, the winning opening switch 35a, the large winning opening switch 43, and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 are arranged so as to face each other from the rear. The large entry unit base 902 has a general winning opening 35 at the upper portion, and the winning opening switch 35a is arranged behind the general winning opening 35.

From the upper part of the large winning unit base 902, the winning opening switch 35a and the large winning opening switch 43
, The specific area switch 72 and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 are provided in order. The opening through which the game ball of the large winning opening switch 43 passes is vertically overlapped on the rear portion of the specific area switch 72 and the front portion of the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 (see FIGS. 75 and 77). ..

The large entry unit base 902 is a rod-shaped magnetic sensor 90 of the general winning opening discharge unit 908.
It has an insertion hole 902e into which 8a is inserted, and also has a shaft portion 914 of a large winning opening splash portion 914.
It has a through hole 902i through which b penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a guide hole 902j in which the guide 914c of the large winning opening splash portion 914 is slidably guided. Further, in the large-entry unit base 902, an LED substrate 902 m having a plurality of LEDs is mounted on the back surface portion 902f. LED
The LED on the board 902m is used when the specific area switch 72 is detected (V prize).
It may emit light. It should be noted that the translucent front decoration 911 (FIGS. 74 and 7) having a different color and pattern from the front decoration member 912 at a position corresponding to the opening on the front surface of the specific area 86 of the large entry unit base 902.
6) may be attached.

The intermediate member 904 includes an LED substrate 904a having a plurality of LEDs on the upper portion, a through hole 904b through which the shaft portion 914b of the large winning opening splash portion 914 penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a flow path constituent portion provided in front of the LED substrate 904a. 904c and. The inside of the flow path constituent portion 904c is the lower left inner flow path 902c, and the large winning opening switch 43 is arranged below the flow path constituent portion 904c. At the lower part of the intermediate member 904, an opening is arranged rearward, and a residual ball discharge port switch 73 is attached. The LED of the LED substrate 904a can irradiate the lower left inner flow path 902c with light, and may emit light when detected by the large winning opening switch 43.

As will be described later, when the blade member 914a of the large winning opening splash portion 914 is in the open state, the upper left flow path 902a or the upper right flow path 902b above the large winning opening splash portion 914 and the large winning opening 902h ( The game ball that has flowed down (see FIG. 74) and passed through the large winning opening 902h passes through the lower left inner flow path 902c and is detected by the large winning opening switch 43. After that, the game ball detected by the large winning opening switch 43 is detected by the specific area switch 72 or the remaining ball ejection port switch 73 (detecting means) according to the position of the movable member 906a of the movable portion drive mechanism 906 (the detection means). Figure 7
4-See Figure 77). When the blade member 914a of the large winning opening splash portion 914 is closed.
The game ball flowing down the upper left flow path 902a or the upper right flow path 902b enters the lower right flow path 902d.

The movable portion drive mechanism 906 includes a movable member 906a, a lever solenoid 906b (86b) (first driving means) as a drive source for driving the movable member 906a, and a lever solenoid 906.
Lever 9 that converts the force in the front-rear direction of the shaft portion of b into the force in the left-right direction and transmits it to the movable member 906a.
It is provided with 06c (first link mechanism). Further, the movable part drive mechanism 906 is a lever 906.
A partition portion 906d arranged to the left of c and a branch portion 9 arranged further to the left of the partition portion 906d.
It is provided with 06e and a support portion 906f arranged below the branch portion 906e. Branch 906
A gap portion 906 g is formed between e and the support portion 906f, and a specific region switch 72 is inserted from the front and a residual ball discharge port switch 73 is inserted from the rear into the gap portion 906 g (FIG. 75). , See FIG. 77).

As will be described later, the branch portion 906e has an inclined surface 915 (front upper end surface) inclined forward, and the game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 43 can be sent to the front specific area 86. (See FIGS. 75 and 77). A first inflow path 917 (FIGS. 75 and 77) for inflowing the game ball into the specific region 86 is formed from the opening of the large winning opening switch 43 to the flow path on the inclined surface 915. Further, the branch portion 906e has a rear upper end surface 916 slightly inclined rearward on the rear side of the inclined surface 915. A second inflow path 918 (FIGS. 75 and 77) is formed on the rear upper end surface 916 to allow the game ball to flow into the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 (detection means).

The movable member 906a is arranged above the branch portion 906e in the normal position (initial position), and does not exist above the branch portion 906e when retracted to the right side of the partition portion 906d and moved to the operating position. When the movable member 906a is in the normal position above the branch portion 906e, the game ball is obstructed by the movable member 906a and cannot enter the first inflow path 917 on the inclined surface 915.
Enter the second inflow route 918 (see FIG. 75). On the other hand, when the movable member 906a is in an operating position not above the branch portion 906e, the game ball can enter the first inflow path 917 on the inclined surface 915 without being disturbed by the movable member 906a. See FIG. 77). In this way, the movable member 906a is arranged at the branch position with the second inflow path 918 in the first inflow path 917. In the present embodiment, the branch position, that is, the position of the tip portion (or the vicinity thereof) of the movable member 906a in the normal position is below the opening of the large winning opening switch 43, but is not limited thereto.

The general winning opening discharge unit 908 is provided with a magnetic sensor 908a as a part of a plurality of magnetic sensor switches 61 (FIG. 79) for detecting fraud. The magnetic sensor switch 61 is
It penetrates the insertion hole 902e of the large entry unit base 902 and penetrates the large entry unit base 902.
It is possible to detect fraud by a magnet to the big winning opening 902h or the like.

Further, the general winning opening discharge unit 908 has a winning opening switch mounting portion 908c to which the winning opening switch 35a is attached, and the winning opening switch 35a is provided on the upper portion of the front plate 908d. The general winning opening discharge unit 908 is a general winning opening discharge passage 908b for discharging a game ball.
The game ball that has passed through the winning opening switch 35a flows down along the front plate 908d and passes through the general winning opening discharge passage 908b from the entrance 908e. In addition, Oiri unit base 90
The flow path forming member on the rear side of the back surface portion 902f of 2 and the front plate 908 of the general winning opening discharge unit 908.
A flow path of the game ball is formed by d.

The front plate 908d of the general winning port discharge unit 908 is provided substantially to the right of the LED substrate 904a of the intermediate member 904. General winning port discharge passage 9 of the general winning port discharge unit 908
08b is provided substantially above the lever solenoid 906b (86b) of the movable portion drive mechanism 906.

The large winning portion drive mechanism 910 includes a shaft hole portion 910a to which the shaft portion 914b of the large winning portion splash portion 914 (wing member) is attached, and a splash portion driving solenoid 910b (second drive means, large winning opening) which is a drive source. The solenoid 39b), the plate-shaped front surface portion 910c arranged facing the rear of the LED substrate 904a of the intermediate member 904, and the vertical force of the fly portion drive solenoid 910b are used as the rotational force in the board surface direction of the game board 30. A cam mechanism 910d (second link mechanism) for conversion is provided.

The front decorative member 912 has an arcuate opening 912a for maintenance, which is arranged substantially in front of the large winning opening splash portion 914. A rod-shaped object can be inserted into the arc-shaped opening 912a, and ball clogging (ball biting) due to the blade member 914a of the large winning opening splash portion 914 can be eliminated. The front decorative member 912 is a rectangular parallelepiped inside of the passage frame 902k of the large entry unit base 902 so that the player can visually recognize the passage of the game ball at the opening of the specific area switch 72 (corresponding to the specific area 86). The portion corresponding to is at least transparent, but only the portion may be transparent or may be entirely transparent. Further, the front decoration member 912 may be provided with the translucent front decoration 911 (FIGS. 74 and 76) as described above in the portion corresponding to the inside of the rectangular parallelepiped shape of the passage frame 902k.

The large winning opening 914b includes a blade member 914a for opening and closing the large winning opening 902h, a shaft portion 914b connected to the shaft hole portion 910a of the large winning opening drive mechanism 910, and a large winning unit base 90.
A guide 914c that moves along the guide hole 902j of 2 is provided. As described above, the shaft portion 914b has a through hole 902i of the large entry unit base 902 and a through hole 9 of the intermediate member 904.
It is connected to the shaft hole portion 910a through 04b. Further, the blade member 914a rotates in the board surface direction of the game board 30 with the shaft portion 914b extending in the front-rear direction as a rotation axis.

[Operation of Oiri splash part drive mechanism]
FIG. 73A is a perspective view showing the operation of the large entry splash unit drive mechanism 910 of the large winning opening unit 800, FIG. 73A (a) shows the initial state, and FIG. 73A (b) shows the V switch or the remaining ball switch. The state in which the ball can be entered (the state in which the large winning opening switch 43 (39a) can be entered) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 73A, the fly section drive solenoid 9 constituting the large entry splash section drive mechanism 910.
Reference numeral 10b is to move the rod 910e extending in the vertical direction up and down with the vertical direction as the drive direction. The fly unit drive solenoid 910b maintains the state in which the rod 910e is extended downward during non-driving as shown in FIG. 73A (a), and is pulled upward during driving as shown in FIG. 73A (b). The splash part drive solenoid 910b is provided with an urging spring (not shown) inside, and when the drive of the splash part drive solenoid 910b is stopped, the rod 910e is drawn downward by the urging force by the urging spring (not shown), but it is driven. Then, the rod 91 is driven by a stronger driving force than the urging force.
Pull 0e upward.

The cam mechanism 910d is a cam 910f that rotates the shaft hole portion 910a coaxially with the shaft portion 914b.
A connection portion 910h connected to the tip of the rod 910e and having a slide hole 910i extending in the left-right direction at a position facing the cam 910f, and a connection portion 910 from the cam 910f.
It has a rod 910 g that extends toward h and enters the slide hole 910i. The rod 910 g is transferred to the inner wall on the upper side and the inner wall on the lower side of the slide hole 910i, and the slide hole 91
It can move in the left-right direction with respect to 0i.

In FIG. 73A (a), the cam 910f is in the longitudinal direction (radial direction of the shaft portion 914b).
Is arranged at an angle inclined downward (for example, 45 degrees), and in FIG. 73A (b), the longitudinal direction thereof is arranged at an angle inclined upward (for example, 45 degrees). Therefore, when the fly unit drive solenoid 910b is driven, the cam 910f is connected to the connection portion 9 via the rod 910 g.
It is pulled up by 10h and rotates at a predetermined rotation angle (for example, 90 degrees) from a downwardly inclined angle to an upwardly inclined angle. At this time, the blade member 914a also rotates at the same rotation angle as the cam 910f.

At this time, the rod 910g rotates according to the rotation of the cam 910f, and the slide hole 91
It moves in the left-right direction with respect to 0i. More specifically, when the cam 910f starts to rotate from the initial position shown in FIG. 73A (a), the rod 910g is displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the slide hole 910i according to the left-right displacement (cosine component) of the cam 910f. The displacement of the rod 910g becomes maximum when the longitudinal direction of the cam 910f becomes horizontal. And the cam 910 as it is
When f continues to rotate, the displacement of the rod 910 g decreases, and when the maximum rotation position shown in FIG. 73A (b) is reached, the rod 910 g returns to the original position.

As described above, the fly unit drive solenoid 910b has a vertical direction as a drive direction. As a result, the fly unit drive solenoid 910b (rod 9) is affected by vibration or impact from the front direction.
The 10e) does not displace to rotate the blade member 914a, and the large-filled splash portion drive mechanism 910 is resistant to vibration and impact.

If the displacement of the rod 910g in the left-right direction when the cam 910f is rotated is small and the splash portion drive solenoid 910b can tolerate the displacement, the rod 910g and the slide hole 9 are used.
The cam 910f may be pin-coupled to the connection portion 910h by omitting 10i.

[Operation of moving part drive mechanism]
FIG. 73B is a plan view of the movable portion drive mechanism 906 of the large winning opening unit 800, and is a plan view of FIG. 7.
3B (a) shows a state in which the remaining ball switch can be entered (initial state), and FIG. 73B (b) shows a state in which the V switch can be entered (a winning state).

As shown in FIG. 73B, the lever solenoid 906b (which constitutes the movable part drive mechanism 906)
In 86b), the rod 906k extending in the front-rear direction is moved back and forth with the front-rear direction as the drive direction. The lever solenoid 906b is a rod 9 when not driven as shown in FIG. 73B (a).
The state in which 06k is extended forward is maintained, and the 06k is pulled back when driven as shown in FIG. 73B (b). The lever solenoid 906b is provided with an urging spring (not shown) inside, and the lever solenoid 9 is provided.
When the driving of 06b is stopped, the rod 906k is fed forward by the urging force by the urging spring (not shown), but when it is driven, the rod 906k is pulled back by the driving force stronger than the urging force.

In this way, by setting the drive direction of the lever solenoid 906b (86b) constituting the movable portion drive mechanism 906 to the front-rear direction, it is possible to secure a visible area of the game ball on the front surface of the large entry unit base 902. At the tip of the rod 906k, there is a connection part 906m.
Is placed.

The movable member 906a has an insertion hole 906n (FIGS. 75 and 77) that follows the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape of the movable member 906a.
It is inserted into the partition portion 906d provided with the above, and its longitudinal direction can be moved in the left-right direction. As a result, the movable member 906a is not displaced due to vibration or impact from the front direction.
The movable member 906a is resistant to vibration and impact. Further, the movable member 906a is shown in FIG. 73B (a).
In the initial state (normal position, initial position) shown in FIG. 73B, the tip portion thereof is extended from the insertion hole 906n and arranged above the branch portion 906e, but in the drive state (operating position) shown in FIG. 73B (b), The tip portion penetrates into the insertion hole 906n.

The lever 906c includes a pin coupling portion 906h pin-coupled to the main body of the movable portion driving mechanism 906 with the vertical direction as an axis. The lever 906c is a movable member 90 from the pin coupling portion 906h.
A first arm 906i extending toward 6a and a second arm 906j extending from the pin coupling portion 906h toward the connecting portion 906m are provided, and the first arm 906i and the second arm 906j have an L-shaped shape substantially orthogonal to each other. Have.

Although not shown, a slide hole (similar to the slide hole 910i) having an opening extending in the front-rear direction is provided at a position overlapping the first arm 906i of the movable member 906a from the vertical direction, and the first arm 906i is provided. A rod (similar to the rod 910 g) that enters the slide hole is provided at a position facing the slide hole. Similarly, a slide hole having an opening extending in the left-right direction at a position where the second arm 906j of the connection portion 906 m overlaps from the vertical direction (slide hole).
(Similar to the slide hole 910i), and a rod (similar to the rod 910g) that enters the slide hole is provided at a position of the second arm 906j facing the slide hole.

Therefore, when the lever solenoid 906b (86b) is driven in the state of FIG. 73B (a), the rod 906k and the connecting portion 906m are moved to the lever solenoid 906b (86b) side (rear).
Attracted to.

At this time, the second arm 906j receives a force that is pulled backward from the connecting portion 906m via a rod (not shown) connected to the second arm 906j, but the rod (not shown) receives a force.
It is possible to move in the left-right direction by a slide hole (not shown) of the connecting portion 906 m. Therefore, the second arm 906j can rotate around the pin coupling portion 906h, and the rotational power accompanying the rotation can be transmitted to the first arm 906i.

The rod of the first arm 906i (not shown) that has entered the slide hole (not shown) of the movable member 906a.
(Not shown) can transmit the rotational force received from the second arm 906j to the movable member 906a, but the rod (not shown) can move in the front-rear direction by the slide hole (not shown). .. Therefore, the first arm 906i can transmit the left-right component of the rotational force received from the second arm 906j to the movable member 906a with almost no resistance.

Therefore, when the lever solenoid 906b (86b) is driven in the state of FIG. 73B (a), the lever 906c rotates about the pin coupling portion 906h and inserts the movable member 906a as shown in FIG. 73B (b). It can be moved in a direction of being retracted into the hole 906n. Further, when the drive of the lever solenoid 906b (86b) is stopped in this state, the rod 9 is caused by the urging force of the urging spring (not shown) provided in the lever solenoid 906b (86b).
The 06k and the connection portion 906m are extended toward the front surface, and the lever 906c rotates in the opposite direction.
The movable member 906a can be moved in the direction of extending from the insertion hole 906n to the branch portion 906e.

When the lever 906c is rotated, the displacement of the first arm 906i in the front-rear direction is small.
If the movable member 906a can tolerate the displacement, the first arm 906i may be pin-coupled to the movable member. Similarly, if the displacement of the second arm 906j in the left-right direction is small and the lever solenoid 906b (86) can tolerate the displacement, the second arm 906j is connected to the connecting portion 9.
It may be pin-coupled to 06 m.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the movable portion drive mechanism 906 (lever solenoid 906b (8).
By driving 6b)), the movable member 906a is moved to an operating position outside the first inflow path 917. As a result, when the drive of the movable part drive mechanism 906 is stopped, the movable member 906a is always used.
Is arranged at a normal position in the first inflow path 917, it is possible to prevent the game ball from unexpectedly winning a prize in the specific area switch 72.

Here, the branch portion 906e (specific region 86) has a width (width in the left-right direction) that is about the diameter of the game ball and allows the game ball to pass through (see FIG. 74). Therefore, the lever solenoid 90
At the time of driving 6b (FIG. 73B (b)), the movable member 906a has at least the insertion hole 90.
It is necessary to be in a state of being almost accommodated on the right side from 6n (a state of being deviated from the first inflow path 917).

On the other hand, when the lever solenoid 906b is stopped (FIG. 73B (a)), the movable member 90
If the distance between the tip of the left side (branch portion 906e side) of 6a and the left end of the branch portion 906e (which is the bottleneck width to the specific region 86) is at least smaller than the diameter of the game ball.
It is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball into the specific area 86 (first inflow path 917).

Therefore, it is preferable that the feeding amount of the movable member 906a is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, for example, about the radius of the game ball (see FIG. 74). As a result, the lever solenoid 90
Since the feeding amount of 6b can be shortened, the power consumption of the lever solenoid 906b can be reduced.

The shape of the large winning opening unit 800 including the movable member 906a may be a shape that is horizontally inverted when viewed from the front direction. In this case, when the large entry fly section drive mechanism 910 is driven, the movable member 906a moves to the left and is arranged outside the first inflow path, and the large entry splash section drive mechanism 9
When the drive of 10 is stopped, the movable member 906a moves to the right and is arranged in the first inflow path 917.

[Inflow route of game balls in the big winning opening unit]
FIG. 74 is a front view of the large winning opening unit 800 and is a diagram showing a V switch entry prohibition state. FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 74. FIG. 76 shows the large winning opening unit 800.
It is a front view of the above, and is the figure which shows the V switch entry possible state. FIG. 77 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 76.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 76, the large entry unit base 902 includes an upper left channel 902a, an upper right channel 902b, and a general winning opening 35 as channels into which the game ball flows. The game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 35 as described above passes through the winning opening switch 35a and is discharged to the outside from the general winning opening discharge passage 908b (FIGS. 72 and 75).

At the confluence position of the upper left flow path 902a and the upper right flow path 902b of the large entry unit base 902,
The blade member 914a is arranged. The blade member 914a (broken line) closes the large winning opening 902h in the initial state (for example, the normal gaming state). Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the upper left flow path 902a or the upper right flow path 902b does not win a prize in the large winning opening 902h, and the lower right flow path 90
It flows to 2d and is discharged to the outside.

On the other hand, as described above, when the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game is a special result (big hit), or when the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game is a special result (big hit, small hit), the blade member 914a The (solid line) rotates and the large winning opening 902h is opened for a predetermined time, so that the game ball can win the large winning opening 902h.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 77, the path of the game ball that has won the prize in the large prize opening 902h is such that it flows down along the inclined surface of the blade member 914a and flows into the large winning opening switch 43 (39a). By passing through 43 (39a) and falling, it reaches the branch portion 906e, flows down along the inclined surface 915 inclined in front of the branch portion 906e, flows into the specific area switch 72 (specific area 86), and flows into the specific area switch 72 (specific area 86). First inflow path 91 that passes through 72 and discharges to the outside
There are seven.

Further, as another path, the movable member 906a arranged between the large winning opening switch 43 (39a) and the branch portion 906e branches from the first inflow path 917, and the inclined surface 906p inclined to the rear of the movable member 906a. A second inflow path 918 that flows down according to the rear upper end surface 916, flows into the residual ball discharge port switch 73, passes through the residual ball discharge port switch 73, and is discharged to the outside.
There is.

The first inflow path 917 is arranged so as to face the front surface from the branch point with the second inflow path 918, and the specific area switch 72 (specific area 86) is arranged at a position facing the front surface. As a result, the visibility of the specific area switch 72 (V switch) can be ensured.

In the initial state shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the movable member 906a is extended onto the branch portion 906e. At this time, the opening through which the game ball of the large winning opening switch 43 (39a) passes faces the inclined surface 906p of the movable member 906a when viewed from above. Therefore, the big winning opening switch 4
The game ball that has passed through 3 (39a) abuts on the movable member 906a and is introduced into the second inflow path 918, flows down to the rear upper end surface 916 according to the inclined surface 906p of the movable member 906a, and presses the remaining ball discharge port switch 73. It will pass.

In the drive state shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the movable member 906a is not arranged on the branch portion 906e. At this time, most of the opening through which the game ball of the large winning opening switch 43 (39a) passes faces the inclined surface 915 of the branch portion 906e. Therefore, the big winning opening switch 43 (
The game ball that has passed through 39a) abuts on the branch portion 906e and continues to stay in the first inflow path 917, flows down along the inclined surface 915 of the branch portion 906e, and passes through the specific region switch 72.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 75 and 77, the movable member 906a has a cross-sectional shape (shape seen from the left-right direction) of a chevron shape (or a triangular shape), and an inclined surface having one side inclined rearward. It has 906p. As a result, the movable member 906a can be formed with a simple shape. Further, the insertion hole 906n is opened in a shape that follows the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape of the movable member 906a. As a result, rattling during operation of the movable member 906a can be reduced.

By the way, the movable part drive mechanism 906 (lever solenoid 9) that drives the movable member 906a.
06b (86b)) and the large entry fly section drive mechanism 910 that drives the large entry fly section 914
(Splash unit drive solenoid 910b (39b)) are each controlled by the game control device 100 (see FIG. 79). Then, the game control device 100 synchronizes the drive of the movable portion drive mechanism 906 with the drive of the large input splash portion drive mechanism 910. Specifically, when a specific type of jackpot (probability variation jackpot, etc.) is won with a predetermined probability, the jackpot drive mechanism 910 is driven and movable in the predetermined (for example, the first) jackpot round. Unit drive mechanism 90
6 is driven (see the fifth embodiment). In this case, the movable unit drive mechanism 906 is driven at the same time as the large input splash unit drive mechanism 910 is driven, or the movable unit drive mechanism 906 is driven immediately before the large input splash unit drive mechanism 910 is driven.

As a result, the movable portion drive mechanism 906 is not driven after the large entry splash portion drive mechanism 910 is driven, so that the movable member 906a is driven at the timing when the game ball passing through the large winning opening 902h passes through the movable member 906a. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that the movable member 906a bites the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 76, the LED substrate 902 m is the large winning opening unit 800.
It is arranged in front of the specific area 86, but is arranged on the right side of the specific area 86. As a result, the LED substrate 902m does not impair the visibility of the specific area 86. Also LED
Since the substrate 902m is not arranged on the back surface (rear) of the specific area switch 72, L.
The ED board 902m does not prevent the game ball from passing through the specific area switch 72.

In the large winning opening unit 800, the attachment position (first inflow path 917) of the specific area switch 72 (specific area 86) and the attachment position (second inflow path 918) of the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 may be exchanged. .. In this case, when the movable portion drive mechanism 906 is driven, the movable member 906a is arranged in the first inflow path 917, the game ball flows into the specific area switch 72, and when the drive of the movable portion drive mechanism 906 is stopped, the movable member 906a is the first inflow route 91
7 The game ball is arranged outside and flows into the remaining ball discharge port switch 73. As a result, the gaming machine 1
The game form of 0 can be easily changed.

[Action / effect of the fourth embodiment]
According to the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10 provided with the specific area 86 into which the gaming ball can flow in the special gaming state generated when the result of the game (variable display game) becomes a special result. A detection means (residual ball discharge port switch 73) capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through a region that can flow in in a special gaming state and is different from the specific region 86 (specific region switch 72), and a gaming machine 10. The movable member 906a is movable in the left-right direction, and includes a specific area 86 (specific area switch 72) and a movable member 906a arranged upstream of the detection means (remaining ball discharge port switch 73), and the movable member 906a is provided in the left-right direction. The game ball can flow into the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72) by operating in one direction, and the detection means (residual ball discharge port switch 73) by operating the movable member 906a in the other direction in the left-right direction. It is characterized in that a game ball can flow into the switch.

In a conventional gaming machine, there is a movable member that operates to flow a game ball into a specific area (specific area 86) and that operates in the front-rear direction. When vibration or impact is applied to the movable member from the front of the gaming machine, the movable member may be displaced at an unintended timing and the gaming ball may flow into a specific area. On the other hand, it is conceivable to provide a detection means for detecting vibration, impact, etc. (illegal activity) from the front of the gaming machine, but it is costly. Furthermore, by moving the movable member in the front-back direction, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the machine has passed a specific area (V switch), but it is vulnerable to vibrations and shocks from the front of the gaming machine, making it vulnerable to fraud. It will be an opportunity.

However, with the above configuration, since the moving direction of the movable member 906a is the left-right direction, the movable member 906a is not displaced by vibration or impact from the front direction, and is resistant to vibration or impact. Therefore, by avoiding an unintended displacement of the movable member 906a, the movable member 906
The gaming machine 10 is resistant to cheating against a.

In the fourth embodiment, the first inflow path 917 for flowing the game ball into the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72) is provided, and the movable member 906a operates in one direction and the first inflow path 917.
The game ball can flow into the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72) by being arranged outside, and the detection means (residual ball discharge port) by operating in the other direction and being arranged in the first inflow path 917. It is characterized in that a game ball can flow into the switch 73). As a result, the movable member 906a
The inflow destination of the game ball can be changed by the simple operation of.

In the fourth embodiment, the movable member 906a includes a second inflow path 918 that branches from the middle of the first inflow path 917 and causes the game ball to flow into the detection means (remaining ball discharge port switch 73), and the movable member 906a is the first inflow path. The game ball can flow into the first inflow path 917 by being arranged at a branch position with the second inflow path 918 in the 917, operating in one direction and being arranged outside the first inflow path 917, and in the other direction. By operating in the first inflow path 917 and arranging the game ball in the first inflow path 917, the game ball is placed in the first inflow path 9.
It is characterized by forming a path (a path formed by the inclined surface 906p of the movable member 906a) to flow from 17 into the second inflow path 918. As a result, the inflow destination of the game ball can be reliably changed by the simple operation of the movable member 906a.

In the fourth embodiment, the first inflow path 917 is arranged so as to face the front surface of the gaming machine 10 from the branch position (with the second inflow path 918). As a result, the visibility of the specific area switch 72 (V switch) can be ensured.

In the fourth embodiment, the upper surface of the movable member 906a is provided with an inclined surface 906p inclined toward the second inflow path 918. As a result, the movable member 90 has a simple configuration.
The game ball can flow from 6a into the second inflow path 918.

In the fourth embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the movable member 906a is triangular or chevron-shaped, and is characterized by including a side related to the inclined surface 906p. Thereby, the movable member 906a can be constructed with a simple shape.

In the fourth embodiment, the first drive means (movable part drive mechanism 906) for operating (driving) the movable member 906a is provided, and the first drive means (movable part drive mechanism 906) drives the movable member 906a. It is characterized in that it is moved out of the first inflow path 917. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from unexpectedly flowing into the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72).

In the fourth embodiment, the drive direction of the first drive means (movable part drive mechanism 906) is the front-rear direction of the game machine 10, and the first drive means (movable part drive mechanism 906) left and right the force in the front-rear direction. It is characterized in that it is connected to the movable member 906a via a first link mechanism (lever 906c) that converts a force in a direction. As a result, for example, the first driving means (moving part driving mechanism 90)
It is possible to secure a visible area of the game ball arranged in front of 6) (front of the large winning opening unit 800).

In the fourth embodiment, the width of the first inflow path 917 is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball and is a size in which the game ball can be distributed, and the moving length of the movable member 906a is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Is also characterized by being short. As a result, power consumption and driving time (moving time of the movable member 906a) can be reduced by shortening the driving length (stroke length) of the first driving means (movable portion driving mechanism 906).

In the fourth embodiment, the game ball is detected (when the mounting positions of the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72) and the detection means (remaining ball discharge port switch 73) are exchanged).
A movable member 906a is provided with a first inflow path 917 for flowing into the remaining ball discharge port switch 73).
Can flow into the detection means (remaining ball discharge port switch 73) by operating in one direction and being arranged outside the first inflow path 917, and operates in the other direction to allow the game ball to flow into the first inflow path 917. It is characterized in that a game ball can flow into a specific area 86 (specific area switch 72) by being arranged inside. As a result, the gaming mode of the gaming machine 10 can be easily changed.

In the fourth embodiment, in the special gaming state, a wing member (large winning opening splash portion 914) that rotates in the direction of the board of the game machine 10 so as to introduce the game ball into the first inflow path 917, and a wing member (
A second drive means (large entry fly section drive mechanism 910) for rotating the large winning opening splash section 914) is provided, and the drive direction of the second drive means (large entry splash section drive mechanism 910) is the gaming machine 10. The second drive means (large input splash part drive mechanism 910) is a wing member (large) via a second link mechanism (cam mechanism 910d) that converts a force in the vertical direction into a rotational force in the board surface direction. Winning mouth splash part 91
It is characterized in that it is connected to 4). As a result, the second drive means (large entry fly section drive mechanism 910) and the wing member (large entry fly section 914) are not displaced by vibration or impact from the front surface, so that fraud from the outside can be prevented. It can be avoided.

In the fourth embodiment, in the special gaming state, a wing member (large winning opening splash portion 914) that rotates in the direction of the board of the game machine 10 so as to introduce the game ball into the first inflow path 917, and a wing member (
The second drive means (large entry splash part drive mechanism 910) for rotating the large prize opening splash part 914), the first drive means (movable part drive mechanism 906), and the second drive means (large entry fly part drive mechanism 910). ) Is provided, and the game control means (game control device 100) drives the first drive means (movable part drive mechanism 906) to the second drive means (large entry). It is characterized in that it synchronizes with the drive of the splash unit drive mechanism 910).

This makes it possible to prevent the movable part drive mechanism 906 from being driven after the large entry fly part drive mechanism 910 is driven, and the game ball that has passed through the large prize opening 902h is a movable member 906.
It is possible to avoid a problem that the movable member 906a is driven at the timing of passing through a and the movable member 906a bites the game ball.

In the fourth embodiment, a housing (large entry unit base 90) including a specific area 86 (specific area switch 72), a detection means (remaining ball discharge port switch 73), and a first inflow path 917.
2. Intermediate member 904 and general winning port discharge unit 908 are combined), and the housing is
Distribution channel of game balls that have won the general winning opening 35 and the general winning opening 35 (general winning opening discharge passage 90)
8b) is provided. As a result, the entire unit is downsized and the game area 32
The occupied area (volume) can be reduced.

In the fourth embodiment, the large winning opening unit 800 may be associated with the effect described in the second embodiment. FIG. 78 is a front view of the gaming board of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, and is FIG. 37.
It is a figure at the time of transitioning from the state shown in (2) to a special game state. As shown in FIG. 78, the probabilistic state (
When a big hit (special game state) occurs from a small hit rush (a state in which a small hit rush can occur), an arrow image 619a that intersects (orthogonally) the virtual line 822 instead of the arrow image 619 and the effect image 617, as shown in FIG. 78. Can be displayed. The arrow image 619a is, for example,
It has an arrow shape that extends toward the large winning opening unit 800 (V attacker) with the position overlapping the virtual line 822 as the base end and the tip points to the large winning opening unit 800 (V attacker). Further, in conjunction with the display of the arrow image 619a, for example, promotion information 619b composed of the word "aim" can be displayed. The promotion information 619b is displayed at substantially the same position as, for example, the effect image 617. By displaying in this way, the object to be watched by the player when shifting from the probabilistic state to the special gaming state is switched from the large winning opening unit 806 to the large winning opening unit 800, and the player is watching in the probabilistic state. Large prize opening unit 800 (V) in the part that was
Since the display related to the attacker) is displayed, the player does not miss these displays and can easily recognize that he / she has been instructed to "aim at the large winning opening unit 800 (V attacker)".

In FIG. 78, since a specific type of big hit (probability change big hit, etc.) has occurred and the probability change state (a state in which a small hit rush can occur) is reached even after the end of the special gaming state, the mode display unit 674 (
The first suggestion information) is left in the "tiger mode" so as to notify the probability change state (small hit rush) after the end of the special game state. That is, in FIG. 78, the mode display unit 674 (first suggestion information) keeps displaying the effect mode related to the "tiger mode" even when the probabilistic change state is changed to the special gaming state. In addition, if the probable change state does not occur after the end of the special game state, or regardless of the game state after the end of the special game state, the display of "tiger mode" is deleted and "tiger mode" is displayed at the time of the transition. Arbitrary words such as "tiger bonus" may be displayed at the position to inform that the player is in a special gaming state.

Since the effect of the arrow image 619a and the promotion information 619b in FIG. 78 is effective when a V prize is generated immediately after the start of the special gaming state, V is used in the first jackpot round.
It is preferable to drive the movable member 906a so that a prize can be won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable member 906a may be driven in a round other than the first big hit round.

[Fifth Embodiment]
A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 111. A fifth embodiment relates to the configuration of the game control device 100 and the details of the game control, and the configuration of the effect control device 300 and the details of the effect control. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fourth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

[Game control device]
FIG. 79 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. The game machine 10 is a game control device 1.
The game control device 100 is provided with 00 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls the game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111.
It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
The U) 111 includes an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operating clock of a CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. The electronic components such as the game control device 100 and the solenoid and the motor driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from the DC32V voltage. , Game microcomputer 11
A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. The control signal generation unit 430 and the like are provided.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate board or integrally with the game control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 43 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By setting 0, it is possible to exclude from the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data supplied to the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. RAM
When the initialization switch 112 is pressed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated.
Based on this, the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RA in the payout control device 200
A process for forcibly initializing the information stored in M is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1.
It is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 makes it possible to change the probability set value (set value) according to the setting related to the game condition (game) by turning it on by the rotation operation of the operator or the like. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operation of the operator. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting a winning probability such as a big hit probability or a small hit probability, but other game conditions (such as production) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are
A setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (probability setting value) related to the game condition is configured. In addition to the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the setting value changing switch, or may provide a dedicated setting value changing switch.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 or adjacent to the game control device 100, so that the front frame 12 (
It is placed in a position that cannot be operated (a position that cannot be accessed) unless the main body frame) is opened.
That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power failure recovery, power recovery), the gaming machine 10 sets a probability setting value according to the on / off state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined in, for example, 6 steps, and the probability setting value 1 (setting 1) is defined.
), Probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most disadvantageous setting for the player, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed by the operator, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area is set to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1).
→ Setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → Setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → Setting value 3 (setting value 3)
Setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → ... is changed as follows. In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch. For convenience of explanation, the work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work setting value and the probability setting value are the same. They may be treated as the same in the numerical range (that is, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (the work setting value and the probability setting value are set to the same numerical value).

Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value changing switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability setting value. Moreover, the probability setting value is not limited to 6 steps. Then, the performance display device 152 in which the display probability setting value corresponding to the selected work setting values 0 to 5 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display. Etc. are displayed.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and RA that can be read and written at any time
It is provided with M (random access memory) 111c.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values during game control. Information about the game (game information) is stored, and the stored information is stored even if a power failure occurs. Is a possible retention and storage means. As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state, and fluctuations before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. When the special result mode is adopted, the gaming state is advantageous for the player (special gaming state).
At the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed in the gaming machine 10
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the conditions for the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas are satisfied (for example, the same identification information). (However, the special result mode is excluded) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a system (type) of reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode) is different (expectations are different), normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP)
2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set.
The expected degree (expected value) of the jackpot increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, the reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur as compared with the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a big hit random number for determining a big hit in a special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining a big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining a small hit symbol. With a random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining fluctuation patterns in symbol random numbers and special figure fluctuation display games (including the execution time of fluctuation display games in various reach and fluctuation display without reach). , Equipped with a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit. ing.

Further, the CPU 111a is the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the start storage number. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, CPU 11
1a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the payout ball. Control to pay out.
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit 600, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal starting gate 34, and a starting port 1 in the first starting winning opening 36. Switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37 (normal variable winning device), winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38
, 39 big winning opening switch 43 (lower big winning opening switch 38a, upper big winning opening switch 39a
), The high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V.
An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided, in which a negative logic signal such as the above is input and converted into a 0V-5V positive logic signal.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. Specific area switch 72
Detects the passage of a game ball (V winning) into a specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball discharge port that discharges the game ball from the special variable winning devices 38, 39. The out ball detection switch 74 may detect only the game ball passing through the out port 30b, or may detect all the game balls launched into the game area and finished the game.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. ..

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, or the out ball detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126.

Further, the second input port 123 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. Vibration sensor 6 that detects signals from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the switch 63, front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., and vibration of the game machine 10.
The signal from 5 is input.

Further, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is an enable signal CE by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 by the gaming microcomputer 111.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. Overflow switch signal, touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, RAM initialization switch 1
A first input port 122 is provided which takes in the signal from 12 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (full) in the lower plate 23. The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) detecting the radio wave, and the payout busy signal is in a state where the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal indicating whether or not.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and is also output to the output unit 13.
It is supplied to each port of 0. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows.

Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is used for each port 122, 123 of the input unit 120.
, 124 is not supplied. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. The port on the relay board 70 has a game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 has a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 to open the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (large winning opening) to open the first special variable winning device 38. Solenoid 1), upper prize opening solenoid 39b (large prize opening solenoid 2) for opening the second special variable winning device 39, and lever solenoid 86b for operating the lever to open the specific area 86. Two output ports 134 are provided.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. On / on the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
A fourth output port 136 for outputting off-data is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information related to the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, to the external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to is provided. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10 can be externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the normal electric solenoid 37 output from the second output port 134.
Current supply of the batch display device 50 output from the first driver (drive circuit) 138a and the third output port 135 that receive the open / close data signals of c, the winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, etc. and generate and output the solenoid drive signal. The second driver 138b that outputs the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the side, and the third driver that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current draw side of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136. A fourth driver 138d is provided which outputs an external information signal supplied from the 138c and the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal 71.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. In addition, the batch display device 50
DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the above. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. Fourth to output an external information signal to the external information terminal 71
The driver 138d supplies a level of 12V to the external information signal, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. Photocoupler 13
Reference numeral 9 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and receives the performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 for driving is provided. In the present embodiment, the performance display device 152 is composed of a plurality of (4) 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display (LED lamp), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

Although the performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board),
It may be installed in another place. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability setting value, an accessory ratio, a ball ejection rate, and the number of ejected balls.

Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls).
It is the total of the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winnings) and the number of game balls that have passed through the out opening 30b. The number of ejected balls counts (counts) the signal of the out ball detection switch 74 and the like.
It can be obtained by doing. In the present embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), and a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2).
), And special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (large winning openings) are included.

The ball ejection rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of ejected balls (or the number of launched balls), and (
It is calculated by multiplying the number of acquired balls by the number of ejected balls (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 ejected balls.

For example, the bonus ratio is in the jackpot state among the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning a prize in the winning opening during a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (= so-called continuous prize ratio) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by the character) obtained by winning the big prize opening. In addition, the prize ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize opening (= big prize opening ratio) among the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the large winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= the so-called bonus ratio (total bonus ratio) commonly used. )) May be used.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a block diagram of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying video on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. It is equipped with a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 is a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
Program ROM 321 consisting of ROM (programmable read-only memory), RAM 322 that provides a work area, Fe that can retain stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure.
A RAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 of the output video content, and outputs the sound source LSI 314.
It executes processing such as instructing the playback sound to, lighting the decorative lamp, driving control of the motor and solenoid, and managing the production time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal sync signal HSYNC, and a vertical sync signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speakers 19a and 19b provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speakers 19c and 19d provided on the front frame 12. , Sound source LSI
The sound generated by 314 is output from the upper speakers 19a and 19b and the lower speakers 19c and 19d via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I / F3
Receives the decorative special figure hold number command, the decorative special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the game control device 100 as the effect control command signal (effect command). .. The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5.
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at V and operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). Frame decoration LED control circuit 333, game board 3 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an provided LED (light emitting diode).
Board effect device 44 (for example, display device 41) provided in 0 (including the center case 40)
A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control a movable accessory (such as a movable accessory) that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display in the above. The panel decoration device 46 includes the lamp display device 8 described above.
0 and RUSH lamp 812 may be included.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. It should be noted that a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and a cross key 6 provided on the surface of the effect button 25.
90f, the function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) that detects the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the effect. A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the control device 300 and inputs the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the motor. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker.

Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- is used to generate DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. DC-
The DC converter may be usually provided in the power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, The amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332-334 (IORESET signal) that drives and controls lamps, motors, and the like are supplied to reset the state. Further, the effect control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
When the N45 is connected and the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on, the cooling FAN45 is driven.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
In the CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of 00, a random value for hit determination in the normal figure is extracted and stored in the ROM 111b based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. The hit / miss of the normal map fluctuation display game is judged by comparing with the judgment value.

Then, after displaying the identification symbol variable for a predetermined time on the normal map display, a normal map variable display game for stopping and displaying is displayed. When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal figure display, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example,). (0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is out of sync, the normal map display is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

Further, the start winning prize (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variation display game is made based on the starting memory. The random value for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the hit / miss of the special figure 1 variation display game is determined.

Further, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and the random value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is stored based on the start memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the hit / miss of the special figure 2 variation display game is determined.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, the special figure variation display game in which the identification symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sound from the speakers 19a-19d, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100.
That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. Let me. In the process of generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 is opened by the large winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed so that the game ball can flow into the large winning opening.

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the big winning opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big winning opening. One round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the above condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) control (cycle game). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the normal fluctuation operating state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled as compared with the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal operating state. Since the opening time is controlled to be substantially longer, the normal electric support state is set. Even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) excluding the latent probability change state, the time saving state is duplicated and the normal electric support (electric support) is executed.

For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time)
Is possible to shorten the time to make the second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time-reduced state, the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation time) is also shorter than usual, and the time reduction variation of the special figure fluctuation display game is also executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is set to the first.
Second stop time (eg 704 msec) shorter than stop time (eg 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so as to be.

Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening time (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to set the probability (normal probability) of the hit result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal power probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 becomes easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased as compared with the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set multiple types of time saving states that change different things. Further, in the normal operating state, the movable member 3
It may be set so that 7b is not released (probability of normal drawing is 0). Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the time-saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating a transition state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power restoration). As described above, the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 shift to four states (modes) as shown in FIG. 81 depending on the on / off state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on.

First, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed in the setting variable state (setting change state,
(Setting change mode) (see A1027-A1036 and FIG. 84 in FIG. 82B).

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (FIG. 82B A1031-A1036 and FIG. 84).

Further, when the power is turned on, the setting key switch 93 is off, but the RAM initialization switch 11 is used.
When 2 is turned on, the state shifts to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode), and R
The AM initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1444 in FIG. 82B).

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode), and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 is mainly performed in FIGS. 82A and 82B.
It is composed of the main process shown in FIG. 3 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the game microcomputer 111 is composed of a main program (caller routine) corresponding to the main processing and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to the timer interrupt processing. ..

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 82A and 82B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100,
The code (number) of the step is represented as "A ***".

As shown in FIG. 82A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process of disabling interrupts (A1001). Further, the stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs, is executed (A1002).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). A game control device 1 that serves as a main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power delay timer.
Waiting time (for example, 3) for waiting until the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instructions from 00 starts normally.
Seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and delays the activation of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 3).
It is a waiting means for setting a predetermined waiting time for waiting for the activation of (00, etc.).

Further, the timing of the power supply delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, a part of R
Since it is not necessary to exclude the AM area for calculation, it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated or the power is turned on after the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 from the time until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed at the time of turning on the power cannot be accepted without performing such a troublesome operation. Can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes time counting of the standby time and a process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A).
1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. (A1008). When a power failure occurs (the result of A1008 is "Y"), the machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

When the game control device 100 does not have a power failure (the result of A1008 is "N").
, The power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1009), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0 (A1010). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"".
), That is, when the standby time has expired, access to RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM that can be read and written is permitted (A1011), and off-data is output to all output ports (state where there is no output). (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) (A1013). ).

Further, here, the driver 150 for driving the performance display device 152 (status display device) may be initially set. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of digits used in the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

Next, the game control device 100 generates a CTC (Counter / Timer C) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
ircuit) Start the circuit (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator is a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a CP based on the divided signal.
The U111a is provided with a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 indicates RA indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM111c).
Set the M error flag (A1015). Here, the flag on the premise of abnormality is once set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). And if it is normal (A101
The result of 6 is “Y”), and it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. The calculation process is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum when the power is turned off match (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal and the RAM indicates a RAM error.
Clear the error flag (A1020). After that, the process proceeds to step A1021.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N" or the result of A1017 is "N"), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to the process of step A1021 without clearing the RAM error flag.

Next, the game control device 100 has a setting key switch 93 and a RAM initialization switch 112.
It is determined whether or not both of the switches are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process during the probability setting change in steps A1027-A1037. ..

The game control device 100 is a RAM (here, RAM) when at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is “N”).
It is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag indicating the abnormality of 111c) is set (A102).
2). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), step A103.
1-A1037 Probability Setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) in steps A1041-1044, or step A1
The normal power-on (power-restoring) processing of 041, A1045, and A1046 is executed.

The game control device 100 has (A1023) when the probability setting changing flag is set.
The result is "Y"), and a command for notifying the main abnormality error that notifies that the game control device 100 (main board, main board) has an abnormality is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024).
.. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for notifying the main abnormality error is the game control device 10.
Notify that there was an abnormality of 0.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 uses the driver 15 of the performance display device 152 to display the 7-segment display data (data of the error display of "E1") when the game is stopped on the performance display device 152.
Output to 0 (A1025). Then, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), information collecting terminal, etc.) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, the information about the big hit is RAM
Even if it remains in 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state. After that, the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated and waited for.
The setting change operation (both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on) is performed again, and the power is waited to be turned on. While the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeatedly waited for, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 83) capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game process and the normal figure game process. ) Cannot be executed, so the game (special map variable display game, normal map variable display game) cannot be executed.

In this way, the setting change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112)
The process of A1024-A1026 is executed, assuming that there is an abnormality when the probability setting changing flag is set even though both of the on operations) are not executed. For example, when the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation has not been executed. be.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (A102).
The result of 2 is "Y"), a command for notifying the main abnormality error that notifies that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and 7 segments when the game is stopped. The display data (data of the error display of "E1") is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and the on-data of the security signal is output to the external information terminal 71 in order to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality. (A1026). As described above, even when the information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state. Then steps A1025 and A10
The process of 26 is repeated and waits.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). When the RAM error flag is set (the result of A1027 is "Y".
Since it is unknown whether the probability setting value is correct, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared and set to the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value "1") (A1028). ), Set the probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed ()
A1029). When the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N".
”), Set the probability setting changing flag without clearing the probability setting value (A1029).
Next, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1).
030), the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), And when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, and the processing during the probability setting confirmation (setting confirmation state) starts, and the probability Probability indicating that the setting is being confirmed Set the setting confirmation flag (A1032). Then, the command during the probability setting confirmation is output to the effect control device 30.
It is transmitted to 0 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processes of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processes during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

First, the game control device 100 saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output a security signal while the probability setting is being changed and the probability setting is being confirmed (A1034). The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change / confirmation process (FIG. 84) described later, but the rest if the probability setting change or the probability setting confirmation is completed early. The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed by the external information editing process (A1321). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms while the probability setting is being changed and the probability setting is being confirmed.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interrupts (A1035). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 83) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). When the setting key switch 93 is on (A1036)
The result of is "N"), and it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to step A1036. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs (the result of A1037 is "Y"), step A1055-A1
The process when a power failure of 061 occurs is executed.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and a power failure has not occurred, it is possible to confirm the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the probability setting value. The setting confirmation status (setting confirmation mode) is continued.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036).
The result is "Y"), interrupts are prohibited (A1038), and a command to end the notification is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1039). The effect control device 300 that has received the command to end the notification ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed so far (A1040). When the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed so far, the RAM initialization process (described later) in step A1042-A1044 is executed. do. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed so far, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored). Performs normal processing of.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is “N”) (A1041).
.. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (the result of A1041 is "Y"), RA
In M111c, the RAM area other than the probability set value area for storing the probability set value is 0.
Clear (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0 except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. Further, in addition to the probability setting value area, a configuration that does not clear the stack area or an unused area, or a configuration that does not clear the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) is also possible. .. The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning, for example, the ball ejection rate, the base value (the ball ejection rate in the normal gaming state), the bonus ratio, the number of ejected balls, and the like. be.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1044), and the process proceeds to step A1047.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (A1).
Since the result of 041 is "N") and both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off, the normal power-on (power recovery) process is started and the power failure recovery process is executed (power recovery process). A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery (power recovery) is saved in the area to be initialized. In addition, the above-mentioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1046), and step A10.
It shifts to the process of 47.

The command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command at the time of recovery from a power failure transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of the game machine and the hold of special figures 1 and 2. Ornament special figure 1 indicating the number Hold number command and decoration special figure 2 Hold number command, probability information command indicating the presence or absence of a probability state (high probability state or low probability state) or time saving state, special figure change in a predetermined production mode It includes a production count information command that indicates the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command that indicates that the power has been turned on.

Further, the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power failure recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information which is information of the probability setting value (setting value) of the game machine 10. Is done. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the set value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the set value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command is, for example,
A customer waiting demo is displayed on the display device 41, and the RAM is displayed by the sound of the LED and speaker of the board decoration device 46 and the like.
Notification of initialization (RAM clear) is performed for 30 seconds. Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery includes a screen designation command for designating the display contents of the screen of the display device 41. In addition, the command to specify the screen is normally being processed for both Special Figures 1 and 2 (when it is neither fluctuating nor hitting).
, It is a customer waiting demo command, otherwise it is a recovery screen command.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (C) in the random number generation circuit.
The CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in the TC update permission register). In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) by exchanging them in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power, and corresponds to various initial value random numbers (big hit symbol random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol). Initial value (big hit symbol initial value random number), small hit symbol random number that determines the small hit symbol (small hit symbol initial value random number), initial value of the hit random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (hit initial value random number) , Save in the predetermined area of RWM as the start value of the initial value (fall lottery initial value random number) of the fall lottery random number used in the fall lottery (A1048), and allow the interruption (A10).
49). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it can be difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However,
The jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU. CTC output with the same cycle (CTC for timer interrupt processing (CTC (
It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on CTC (CTC2)) that is different from CTC0).

In addition, for big hit symbol random numbers, hit symbol random numbers, and fall lottery random numbers, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. ing. It should be noted that each random number may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1051) and executes a performance display editing process for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, the performance information (such as the accessory ratio and the ball output rate) may be calculated. Further, when the RAM error flag is set in the register, the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). After that, interrupts are permitted (A1053). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 83) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1054).
If no power failure has occurred (result of A1054 is “N”), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the process of step A1050-A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (the result of A1054 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts processing at the time of a power failure, temporarily disables interrupts (A1055), and outputs off-data to all output ports (A1055). 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A).
1058). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060).
.. Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in the predetermined register (A1302). By switching from the register bank 0 used in the main processing to the register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt processing, it is equivalent to saving the register used in the main processing. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs from various sensors and switches, captures signals, and so on.
That is, an input process for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag (A1304). When the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1304 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

When the game control device 100 is neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting (A130).
The result of 4 is "N"), and based on the output data set in various processes, output processing for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) is executed (A1306). When a launch prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, the launch permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permitted state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process (A1307) that outputs commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, and further, random number update process 1 (A1308), random number update. Process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, monitoring whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower winning opening switch 38a, and the upper winning opening switch 39a, and monitoring the error. (A1310), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened, etc.) is executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of the game ball is occurring at the large winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurring flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1320) described later, it can be determined that the abnormal discharge is occurring. When the abnormal discharge is occurring (the result of A1311 is "Y"), the processes after step A1317 are executed.

The game control device 100 is used when the abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is "N").
, The start port switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the start port is executed by the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A1312). Subsequently, the special figure 1 game process for processing the special figure 1 variable display game is executed (A1313), and then the special figure 2 game process for performing the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (A1314). The details of the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a normal map game process that performs a process related to the normal map variation display game (A1315). A segment LED editing process is executed (A1316), which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents (A1316).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1317). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board and determining whether or not there is an abnormality is executed (A1318).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1319). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring abnormal discharge from the large winning opening is executed (A1320). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the special variable winning device 38, 39 has a large winning opening switch 43 (lower winning opening switch 38a, upper winning opening switch 39a), a specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch, V switch), and remaining. Based on the input from the ball discharge port switch 73, the abnormal discharge of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is monitored, and when the abnormal discharge occurs, the abnormal discharge occurring flag is set. The game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 43 of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is the specific area switch 7.
2 (V winning port switch, V switch) or the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 is passed through and discharged.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1321). Then, the performance display monitor control process for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1322). After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

When the timer interrupt process returns, the interrupt disabled state is restored and the register bank specification is automatically restored. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are permitted after the external information editing process. Processing or processing to return the designation of the register bank to register bank 0 may be performed.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change / confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process. In the probability setting change / confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (A2).
401). The probability set value here is stored in the probability set value area of the RAM 111c.

When the probability set value is within the normal range, the game control device 100 (the result of A2401 is "
Y ”), the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A2402), and the data is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). When the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), the extinguishing data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and the data is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A).
2404).

Here, the probability set value display data is display probability set value data displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability set value display data area. In addition, in order to prevent confusion among people involved in the hall, if the probability setting values are different but the same jackpot probability (and small hit probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the jackpot probability (and small hit probability). May be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big hit probability (and small hit probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 1 set in step A1034.
28 ms (predetermined time). Subsequently, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) of the abnormality is sent to the external information terminal 71.
Is output to (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). When the flag for changing the probability setting is not set (A2407)
The result of is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

The game control device 100 has (A2407) when the probability setting changing flag is set.
The result of is "Y"), that is, it is determined whether or not it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on when the probability setting is being changed (A2408). When it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent a situation in which the probability set value is unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is held down.

When the game control device 100 is not the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (A240).
The result of 8 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not there is an input of the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2).
409). When there is no input of the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 has an input of the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2409).
The result is "Y"), the working setting value in the working setting value area (in RAM111c or register) is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5, and the probability of the probability setting value area corresponding to the working setting value. The set values 1 to 6 are updated by +1 (A2410). As a result, the RAM initialization switch 112
Is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by 1. After that, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. In the work setting value area (RAM111c or register) for storing the work setting value when the setting change mode is entered, the value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 from the probability setting value). The subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated in response to the update of the work setting value, but the work setting value of the RAM 111c is updated. The probability setting value (work setting value) during setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (the result of A1036 is "Y".
”), The value corresponding to the work setting value in the work setting value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. By doing this, if a power failure occurs while changing the settings (A1037)
It is possible to prevent a situation in which the probability setting value (probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, effect control, etc. is changed to an unintended value in the result of "Y").

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A1312) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a starting port 1 winning monitoring table (A2701) for monitoring the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (starting port 1), and acquires a hard random number as a big hit random number. Is executed (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening prize in the first start winning opening 36 (A2703). And if there is no starting opening prize (A)
The result of 2703 is "N"), and the process proceeds to step A2709.

The game control device 100 has a start opening prize in the first start winning opening 36 (A2703).
The result of is "Y"), whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is a low probability state and there is no time reduction (state without normal electric support), that is, special figure low probability & no time reduction medium (normal game) It is determined whether or not the condition is (A2704). If the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (during the normal game state). Then, in the case of a low probability state and a state without time reduction (the result of A2704 is "Y"".
), That is, in the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step A2707.

When the game control device 100 is in a state where the probability of occurrence of a big hit is not a low probability state (when it is in a high probability state) or when there is a time reduction (a state where there is a general electric support) (the result of A2704 is "N"). A right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and an effect command setting process is executed (A2706). As a result, the effect control device 300 displays the right-handed instruction display for instructing right-handed as a warning when there is a starter winning to the first starting winning opening 36 in the special figure high probability state or the time saving state. Can be displayed on. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table (A2707) for setting the information of holding by winning the first start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1), and executes the special drawing start opening switch common process (A2708). ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 is a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2).
A start port 2 for monitoring the winning of a prize is prepared (A2709), and a hard random number acquisition process for acquiring a hard random number as a big hit random number is executed (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (A2711). If there is no start opening prize (the result of A2711 is "N"), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

The game control device 100 is used when there is a start opening prize for the normal variable prize device 37 (A271).
The result of 1 is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is operating (during normal electric operation) (A2712). When the normal variable winning device 37 is not operating (the result of A2712 is "
N ”), it is determined whether or not fraud (Public electricity fraud) against the ordinary variable winning device 37 is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determinations (for example, 5 or more), it can be determined that a general electric fraud is occurring. Ordinary variable winning device 37
When the fraud is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is not fraudulent with respect to the normal variable winning device 37 (A2).
The result of 713 is "N"), a table for setting the information of the hold due to winning in the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) is prepared (A2714), and the special figure starting port switch common processing is executed (A).
2715), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is fraudulent with respect to the normal variable winning device 37 (A2).
The result of 712 is "Y"), the process of step A2713 is not executed, and the processes of steps A2714 and A2715 are executed.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process, the special start port switch common process (A270)
8. The details of A2715) will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a procedure of common processing of the special drawing start port switch. Special figure Start port switch common processing is start port 1 switch 36
This is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information regarding the number of winnings to the monitoring target start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the external management device of the game machine 10. The start port signal output number of times is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number of times overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"),
Save the updated value in the RWM start port signal output count area (A2904), and step A.
The process proceeds to 2905. On the other hand, when the number of output times overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, in the game control device 100, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting memory number) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value. (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start port switch common processing is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target start opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2702 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

After that, the game control device 100 extracts and prepares a fall lottery random number for drawing a fall from a high probability state to a low probability state of the jackpot probability of the special figure (A2912), and stores the fall lottery random number. Save to the area (A2913).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the prize is given to the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) (A2914). If the prize is not won in the normal variable winning device 37 (the result of A2914 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2917. On the other hand, when the winning is to the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2914 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A).
2915), save in the small hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (A2916).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2917), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2).
918). Then, a start port switch to be monitored and a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared as effect commands (A2919), and the effect command setting process (A292) is prepared.
0) is executed to end the common processing of the special figure start port switch. The decoration special figure hold number command is
The start port 1 switch 36a is a decorative special figure 1 hold number command, and the start port 2 switch 37a
Then, it is a decoration special figure 2 hold number command.

In the special figure reservation information determination process (A2918), the first start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 are used.
It is executed for the special figures 1 and 2 starting memory generated based on the winning of the game ball to. In the special figure hold information determination process, pre-reading to determine the execution information (including the stop symbol information) of the special figure variation display game before the special figure variation display game based on the special figure 1 and 2 start memory is executed. Processing (preliminary determination processing) is executed. Further, in the special figure hold information determination process, the low-probability look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) and / or the high-probability look-ahead stop symbol command (high) corresponding to the target start port switch and the determined stop symbol information. Probability) is prepared as an effect command, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number (determined) indicating the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is executed.
In the normal game state, as will be described later, the special figure 2 variable display game often becomes a long-term fluctuation (long fluctuation) and is forcibly terminated as a result of the deviation. It is not necessary to execute the look-ahead process (preliminary determination process).

When the effect control device 300 receives both the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) and the look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability), if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in a low probability state, the look-ahead stop symbol Execute pre-reading symbol command processing using a command (low probability),
If the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in a high probability state, the look-ahead symbol command processing may be executed by using the look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability).

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. It serves as a start storage means for storing a predetermined number as a start memory up to an upper limit. also,
The start storage means (game control device 100) stores various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting storage up to a predetermined number. , Various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game processing (A1313) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game processing.

First, the game control device 100 has a special figure 1 indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended.
It is determined whether or not the game interruption flag is set (A3201).

When the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is not set (the result of A3201 is "N"), the game control device 100 is a big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. It is determined whether or not the player is in a state or a small hit state (A3202). Special Figure 2 When the variable display game is neither in the big hit state nor in the small hit state (the result of A3202 is "N").
The large winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3203). In the big prize opening switch monitoring process,
The detection of the game ball is monitored by the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Then, the specific area switch specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3204).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (
Only 1 is subtracted) (A3205). Special figure 1 The game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Special Figure 2 When the variable display game is in the big hit medium state or the small hit state (the result of A3202 is "Y"), steps A3203 and A32.
The process of step A3205 is performed without performing the process of 04. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3206). Special figure 1 When the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3206 is “N”), the process proceeds to the process of step A3217.

In the game control device 100, when the game processing timer of the special figure 1 is 0 (the result of A3206 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the special figure 1
The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the game process number is set in the register (A3207). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is acquired by using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3).
208). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 1 game processing number, and the game branch processing according to the special figure 1 game processing number is executed (A3209).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A3209, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Special figure 1 A special figure that monitors the change start of the variable display game, sets the variable start of the special figure 1 variable display game, sets the effect, and sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 variable processing. 1 Normally, the process is executed (A3210). The details of the special drawing 1 normal processing will be described later in FIG. 89.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A3209, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The special figure 1 changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process is executed (A3211). The details of the processing during the change in FIG. 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A3209, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Special Figure 1 If the game result of the variable display game is a big hit, set the big hit fanfare command according to the type of big hit, set the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, and perform fanfare / interval processing. Special Figure 1 Displaying processing for setting information necessary for performing is executed (A3212).

In the special figure 1 display processing, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the hit symbol command corresponding to the big hit symbol is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command, and the big hit fanfare is prepared. Prepare the command as an effect command and execute the effect command setting process. Subsequently, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set, and the jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. Then, in order to shift to fanfare / interval processing, "3" is set as the processing number, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area, and the normal figure game mode flag area is used. Save the no time saving flag. When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the processing number of the special figure 1 normal processing in order to shift to the special figure 1 normal processing, and the processing is performed in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save the number.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A3209, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The fanfare / interval processing for setting the opening time of the large winning opening, updating the number of opening times, setting the information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the large winning opening, etc. is executed (A3213). The details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

When the game processing number is "4" in step A3209, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, and the information necessary for processing the remaining ball of the jackpot is set. The middle process is executed (A3214).

When the game processing number is "5" in step A3209, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
A process for setting an interval time and an ending time, a process for setting information necessary for performing a big hit end process, and the like are executed (A3215).

When the game processing number is "6" in step A3209, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Special Figure 2 A game wait time value (described later) is set, and Special Figure 1 big hit end processing for setting information necessary for executing normal processing is executed (A3216).

In addition, in the special figure 1 big hit end process, when the time reduction determination data (described later) set at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game is data without time reduction, in order to shift to the normal gaming state after the big hit ends. The big hit end setting process 1 is executed, and when the time reduction determination data is data with a time reduction, the big hit end setting process 2 is executed in order to shift to the time reduction state after the end of the big hit. However, if there is specific area passing information indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the big hit end setting process 3 is performed in order to shift to the probable change state (probability fluctuation state) after the big hit ends. To execute. Further, in the special figure 1 big hit end process, "0" is set as the process number in order to return to the special figure 1 normal process, and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

In the case of a probable change jackpot that becomes a probable change state after the end of the jackpot, the specific area 86 is opened for a long time in a predetermined (for example, the first) big hit round, and the specific area switch 72 is used.
Reliably detects the passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning).

In the jackpot end setting process 1, the normal figure game mode flag area is saved with the normal figure time reduction flag, and the special figure game mode flag area is saved with the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag. The flag for no time reduction in the normal map indicates that the game is not in the time reduction fluctuation state (time reduction state, normal power support state) of the normal map fluctuation display game. The special figure low probability & no time reduction flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and it is not in the time reduction state (conducting support state). After that, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction fluctuation frequency region to 0.

In the jackpot end setting process 2, the flag with the normal figure time reduction is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area, and the special figure low probability & time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. The normal map time reduction flag indicates that the game is in the time reduction fluctuation state (time reduction state, normal power support state) of the normal map fluctuation display game. The special figure low probability & time reduction flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low probability and the time reduction state (normal electric support state). Further, the game control device 100 saves an initial value (for example, 100) in the time reduction fluctuation number region for storing the time reduction fluctuation number.

In the jackpot end setting process 3, the special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. The special figure high probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of the big hit is high probability and the time saving state (here, the time shortening fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is executed).

When the processing based on the special figure 1 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3217), and then displays the special figure 1. The symbol variation control process related to the device 51 is executed (A3218), and the lever solenoid 86 is executed.
The lever solenoid control process for controlling b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 game process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set (the result of A3201 is "Y"), the game control device 100 is set to step A32.
Special figure 1 for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 without performing the processing of 02 to A3216.
After preparing the fluctuation control table (A3217), the symbol fluctuation control process according to the special figure 1 display 51 is executed (A3218), the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 is executed. End the game process. In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the time counting (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) for measuring the variable time is stopped. It should be noted that, by the symbol variation control process, the variation of the special symbol itself may apparently continue on the special figure 1 display 51.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game processing (A1314) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. 88A and 88B are flowcharts showing the procedures of the first half and the second half of the special figure 2 game processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is in the jackpot state (A3301). Special Figure 1 When the variable display game is not in the jackpot state (the result of A3301 is “N”), the jackpot switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball in the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Monitor detection. Then, the specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3303).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (
Only 1 is subtracted) (A3304). Special figure 2 The game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0.

When the game control device 100 is in the jackpot state of the special figure 1 variable display game (A3301).
The result of is "Y"), step A33 without performing the processes of steps A3302 and A3303.
The process of 04 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3305). Special figure 2 When the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3305 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3323.

In the game control device 100, when the game processing timer of the special figure 2 is 0 (the result of A3305 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the special figure 2
It is determined whether or not the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 0 (A3306). Special figure 2 When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3306 is "N")
The number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3307), and the timer value for length variation (for example, 60,000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (for example, 60,000 msec (60 seconds)).
A3308). As will be described later, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has long fluctuations and the fluctuation time is long (for example, 10 minutes), the fluctuation time timer cannot be set with 2 bytes. Therefore, steps A3306-A3308 A timer with a long fluctuation time for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prepared by repeating the counting of the timer value for long fluctuations for the number of repetitions by the process of.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is “Y”) and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3306 is “Y”). , The special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (A3309). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired by using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3310). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number, and the game branch processing according to the special figure 2 game processing number is executed (A3311).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Special figure 2 The special figure that monitors the change start of the variable display game, sets the variable start of the special figure 2 variable display game, sets the effect, and sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 variable processing. 2 Normally, the process is executed (A3312). The details of the special drawing 2 normal processing will be described later in FIG. 90.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The special figure 2 changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process is executed (A3313). The details of the processing during the change in FIG. 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Special Figure 2 If the game result of the variable display game is a big hit, set the big hit fanfare command according to the type of big hit, set the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, and perform fanfare / interval processing. Special Figure 2 Displaying processing for setting information necessary for performing is executed (A3314).

In the special figure 2 display processing, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the hit symbol command corresponding to the big hit symbol is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command, and the big hit fanfare is prepared. Prepare the command as an effect command and execute the effect command setting process. Subsequently, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set, and the jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Then, "3" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the fanfare / interval processing.

Further, in the special figure 2 display processing, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the hit symbol command corresponding to the small hit symbol is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command. Prepare a small hit fanfare command as an effect command, and execute the effect command setting process. Then, "7" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the processing during the small hit fanfare, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, and the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. do.

Further, in the special figure 2 display processing, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the processing number of the special figure 2 normal processing in order to shift to the special figure 2 normal processing. , Special figure 2
Save the processing number in the game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The fanfare / interval processing is executed to set the opening time of the large winning opening, update the number of opening times, set the information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the large winning opening, and the like (A3315). The fanfare / interval processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

When the game processing number is "4" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, and the information necessary for processing the remaining ball of the jackpot is set. The middle process is executed (A3316).

When the game processing number is "5" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The big winning opening remaining ball processing for setting the interval time and the ending time, setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing, and the like is executed (A3317).

When the game processing number is "6" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Special Figure 2 Special Figure 2 Big hit end processing for setting information necessary for executing normal processing is executed (A3318). In addition, the special figure 2 big hit end processing is "special figure 1" of the special figure 1 big hit end processing.
Is replaced with "Special Figure 2".

When the game processing number is "7" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The small hit fanfare processing is executed (A3319), in which the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of times of opening is updated, and the information necessary for performing the small hit processing is set. In the small hit fanfare middle processing, the processing number "8" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, and the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is set as the opening time of the lower prize opening in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Save to.

When the game processing number is "8" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
A process for setting a small hit end command, a process for setting information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process, and the like are executed (A3320).

When the game processing number is "9" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The small hit remaining ball process for setting the ending time, the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end process, and the like is executed (A3321).

When the game processing number is "10" in step A3311, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process. (A3322). In the special figure 2 small hit end process, "0" is set as the process number in order to return to the special figure 2 normal process, and when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the decorative special figure 1 restart command is used. Is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is executed. In the special figure 2 small hit end process, the flags of the normal figure game mode flag area and the special figure game mode flag area are maintained, and the probability state and the like do not change due to the occurrence of the small hit.

When the processing based on the special figure 2 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A3323), and then displays the special figure 2. The symbol variation control process related to the device 52 is executed (A3324), and the lever solenoid 86 is executed.
The lever solenoid control process for controlling b is executed (A3325), and the special figure 2 game process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal processing (A3210) in the special figure 1 game processing will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special drawing 1 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game can start variation (A3401). If the special figure 1 variable display game cannot start variable (if the variable start is not possible) (the result of A3401 is "N"), the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" is set as the special figure 1 game processing number. (A3416), save in the special figure 1 game processing number area of RWM (A3417). Here, from the end of the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 2 variation display game (during processing during the special figure 2 display) to the end of the big hit operation (special figure 2 big hit end processing), and in the special figure 2 variation display game. From the end of the fluctuation of the small hit (during the processing during the display of the special figure 2) to the end of the small hit operation (processing of the end of the small hit of the special figure 2), it is said that the special figure 1 variation display game cannot start the fluctuation.

The game control device 100 is used when the special figure 1 variation display game can start variation (A3401).
The result of is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the left-handed instruction has been notified (A3402). If the left-handed instruction notification command has already been prepared as an effect command and transmitted to the effect control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handed instruction notification has been completed. When the left-handed instruction has been notified (A34)
The result of 02 is "Y"), and the process proceeds to step A3406.

When the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified based on the left-handed instruction notification flag (the result of A3402 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares the left-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A3403), and prepares the left-handed instruction notification command (A3403). (A3404), and set the left-handed instruction notification flag indicating that the left-handed instruction is notified (displayed) on the display device 41 or the like (A340).
5).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 0 (A3406).
.. When the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (the result of A3406 is "Y"), the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area of the RWM (A3402). As a result, the special figure 1 normal processing is repeated until the number of reserved special figures 1 becomes 1 or more.

When the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3406 is "N"), the game control device 100 is used.
A fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the time saving state is prepared as an effect command (A3407), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3408). Subsequently, the special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A3409). After that, a decorative special figure hold number command (decorative special figure 1 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared as an effect command (A3410), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3411).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game count command corresponding to the time shortening fluctuation number, which is the number of remaining special figure fluctuation display games in the time saving state, as an effect command (A34).
12), the effect command setting process is executed (A3413). The effect control device 300 that has received the remaining game count command can grasp the time reduction fluctuation count.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during the change of the special figure 1 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3414). Here, the information of the special figure 1 changing or (the special figure 1 changing + the special figure 2 changing) is set in the special figure status area. Next, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, which is the process for shifting to the special figure 1 changing process, is executed (
A3415). In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, for example, the process number “1” is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

[Special Figure 2 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 normal processing (A3312) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special drawing 2 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game can start variation (A3501). If the special figure 2 variable display game cannot start variable (if the variable start is not possible) (the result of A3501 is "N"), the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number. (A3518), save in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3519). Here, the special figure 2 variation display game fluctuates from the end of the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game (during processing during the special figure 1 display) to the end of the big hit operation (special figure 1 big hit end processing). Not startable.

The game control device 100 is used when the special figure 2 variation display game can start variation (A3501).
The result of is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (A3502). Special figure 2 When the number of holdings is not 0 (the result of A3502 is "N"), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the time saving state is prepared as an effect command. Then (A3503), the effect command setting process is executed (A3504). Then, special figure 2
Special Figure 2 for starting the variation display game The variation start process is executed (A3505).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure hold number command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number as an effect command (A3506), and executes the effect command setting process (A3506). A3507). After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game count command corresponding to the time shortening fluctuation number, which is the number of remaining special figure fluctuation display games in the time saving state, as an effect command (A3508), and executes the effect command setting process. (A3509
). The effect control device 300 that has received the remaining game count command can grasp the time reduction fluctuation count.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during the change of the special figure 2 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3510). Here, the information of the special figure 2 changing or (the special figure 1 changing + the special figure 2 changing) is set in the special figure status area. Next, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, which is the process for shifting to the special figure 2 changing process, is executed (
A3511). In the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, for example, the process number “1” is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area.

When the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (the result of A3502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 has a special figure 2.
It is determined whether or not the number of pending special figures 1 is 0 (A3512). Special figure 1 When the number of pending numbers is 0 (
It is determined whether or not the result of A3512 is "Y") and the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A3513). When special figure 1 is not changing (result of A3513 is "N"
), It is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3514). If the customer waiting demo has not started (the result of A3514 is "N"), set the customer waiting demo in progress flag (A3515).
..

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3516), and executes the effect command setting process (A3517).
The effect control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demo command can execute the customer waiting demo on the display device 41. After that, the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (A).
3518), save in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3519). As a result, the special figure 2 normal processing is repeated until the special figure 2 hold number becomes 1.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved special figures 1 is not 0 (the result of A3512 is "N"), the special figure 1 variable display game will be executed. As the game processing number, the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set (A3518), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3519). In addition, when special figure 1 is changing (A35)
If the result of 13 is "Y") or if the customer waiting demo has already started (the result of A3514 is "Y").
In)), the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (A3518) without preparing the customer waiting demo command, and the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM is set. Save (A3519).

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3409) in the special figure 1 normal processing will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A3601a).
The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting fluctuation information (including distribution of look-ahead fluctuation patterns). Next, a random number is loaded from the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1), prepared (A3602a), and the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A3603a). , The fall lottery process described later is executed (A3604a). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot flag 1 setting process for setting the jackpot information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a jackpot (big hit flag 1).
A3605a), special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A) relating to setting of special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information)
3606a), the special figure 1 information setting process (A3607a) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed.

In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3606a), when the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, the stop symbol number corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number and the time reduction determination data are obtained. , The information on the upper limit of the number of rounds and the information on opening the big winning opening are acquired and saved, while when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit, the missed stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. After that, the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is executed. The types of jackpots corresponding to the jackpot stop symbol numbers are, for example, 16R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and 1
6R There is a normal big hit (time reduction 100 times).

The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special figure 1 display device 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not there is a time reduction state (with or without time reduction) after the end of the big hit, and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and the special figure 2 big hit end process. Information on the upper limit of the number of rounds and information on opening the big prize opening
This is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3608a). ). Subsequently, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609a) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3609a). A3610a) is executed. Then, the time reduction fluctuation number update process for updating the time reduction fluctuation number is executed (A3).
611a).

In the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is used to convert the fluctuation pattern random number 1 loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the special figure 1. Execute the distribution process based on, and prepare the latter half variable selection table. Then, using the latter half variation selection table, the variation pattern random number 2 storage area of the special figure 1 (holding number 1).
The distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 2 loaded from (for) is executed, the latter half variation number is acquired, and the latter half variation number area is saved. Further, the first half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the table selection pointer calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number is prepared. Further, the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 3 loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 1 is executed, the first half variation number is acquired, and the first half variation number area is saved.

In the time reduction fluctuation frequency update process, when the special figure low probability & time reduction flag is set in the special figure game mode flag area and the special figure time reduction is in progress (the special figure low probability and the normal power support is available), the time is shortened. The number of fluctuations is updated by -1 (only 1 is subtracted). The initial value of the time shortening fluctuation number is the number of fluctuations in which the time saving state is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to, for example, 100 times. Further, regardless of whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts to change, the time shortening change number is updated by -1. Then, when the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes 0, the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area, and the normal figure time reduction no flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area, and the time is saved. If the number of shortened fluctuations does not become 0, do nothing.

Next, the game control device 100 has a processing number of "1" in order to shift to the processing during the change in the special figure 1.
(A3612a), and save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A3).
613a). Subsequently, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A3614a), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (on-data of the signal during change of the special symbol 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A3615a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the changing flag in the variation control flag area of FIG. 1 (A3616a). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the indicator 51 of the special figure 1) is saved in the blinking control timer area of the special figure 1 (A3617).
a), the initial value of the changing symbol number (for example, 0 indicating a non-lighting symbol) is saved in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area (A3618a), and the special figure 1 change start process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3505) in the special figure 2 normal processing will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the "big hit flag 1" in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 91) is replaced with the "big hit flag 2", and the "special figure 1" is replaced with the "special figure 2". Since the same processing as that of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that steps A3601b-A3618b in the special figure 2 variation start process correspond to steps A3601a-A3618a in the special figure 1 variation start process, respectively.

In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3606b), when the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot, the stop symbol number corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number and the time are shortened. While the judgment data, the round number upper limit value information, and the big winning opening opening information are acquired and saved, when the big hit flag 2 is a small hit, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved. , When the jackpot flag 2 is out of order, the out-of-order stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. After that, the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is executed.

[Fall lottery process]
Next, the fall lottery process (A3604) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 change start process.
The details of a and A3604b) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fall lottery process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is in a high probability state (probability variation state), that is, whether or not it is in a special figure high probability (A3701). If the special figure is not in high probability (the result of A3701 is "N"), the fall lottery process is terminated.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure is in high probability (the result of A3701 is "Y"), the value of the fall lottery random number of the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value. Whether or not it is determined (A3702). When it is less than the lower limit judgment value of the fall lottery (the result of A3702 is "Y".
”), The fall lottery process is completed. When it is equal to or greater than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (the result of A3702 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the value of the target fall lottery random number is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (A3703). When it is larger than the fall lottery upper limit judgment value (the result of A3703 is "Y")
, End the fall lottery process.

When the game control device 100 is equal to or less than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (the result of A3703 is "N").
), Since the value of the target fall lottery random number is a value between the fall lottery upper limit judgment value and the fall lottery lower limit judgment value, the processing at the time of winning the fall lottery is started, and first, the signal regarding the high probability end is sent to the RWM. Save in the external information output data area (A3704). Here, the signal regarding the high probability end is
It is off data (off signal) of 2 jackpot signals and off data (off signal) of 4 jackpot signals. As a result, the signal relating to the high probability termination is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and thus to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area (A3705). The signals related to the end of high probability & time saving are, for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 2 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 1
The off-data of the fluctuation time shortened state signal and the off-data of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A3706). Then, the number without time reduction is saved in the game status display number area of the RWM (A3707). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area of RWM (A3708), and the fall lottery process is completed. The special figure low probability & no time reduction flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and there is no time reduction state (normal game state).

As described above, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the fall lottery is executed at the start of each special figure fluctuation display game, and when the fall lottery is won, the probabilistic state (high probability state) is changed to the normal gaming state (low). The fall process (A3704-A3708) that falls to the probabilistic state) is executed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3605a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

First, the game control device 100 saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 1 area of the RWM (A3801). Subsequently, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (A3802). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0 (A3803).
..

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3804). Jackpot flag 2
Is not a big hit (the result of A3804 is "N"), based on the obtained big hit random value,
Special Figure 1 Executes the jackpot determination process to determine whether or not the variable display game is a jackpot (A38).
05), it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3806). When the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3806 is "Y"), the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A3801 is overwritten with the big hit information and saved (A3807), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed. finish. Since the jackpot flag 1 can be a jackpot only when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area), it is possible to avoid that the jackpot flag 1 and the jackpot flag 2 are jackpots at the same time. ..

In the game control device 100, when the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of A3804 is "Y".
”) Or, if the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A3806 is“ N ”), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3605b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the misalignment information in the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM (
A3901), the information is saved in the RWM jackpot flag 2 area (A3902).
Next, load the jackpot random number from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, and load it.
Prepare (A3903). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A3905). Jackpot flag 1
Is not a big hit (the result of A3905 is "N"), based on the obtained big hit random value,
Special Figure 2 The jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the variable display game is a jackpot is executed (A39).
06), it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3907). When the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3907 is "Y"), the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3902 is overwritten with the big hit information and saved (A3908), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is performed. finish. Since the jackpot flag 2 can be a jackpot only when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area), it is possible to avoid that the jackpot flag 1 and the jackpot flag 2 are jackpots at the same time. ..

In the game control device 100, when the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (the result of A3905 is "Y".
”) Or, if the judgment result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3907 is“ N ”), whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit based on the acquired big hit random value. A small hit determination process for determining whether or not is executed (A3909) is executed, and it is determined whether or not the determination result is a small hit (A3910). In this embodiment, the big hit random value is also used for the small hit determination (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit determination and the big hit determination). Special figure 2
If the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A3910 is "Y"), step A3901
The small hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved is overwritten with the small hit information and saved (A).
3911), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. If the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the jackpot determination process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the jackpot flag 2 setting process, and the like (
The details of A3805 and A3906) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A4001), and determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A4002). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

In the game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A400).
The result of 2 is "Y"), a deviation (other than a big hit) is set as a judgment result (A4007), and the big hit judgment process is terminated.

Further, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (A4).
The result of 002 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (A4003). Then, when the special figure is in high probability (the result of A4003 is "Y"), the upper limit determination value in high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A4004). On the other hand, if the special figure is not in high probability (A)
The result of 4003 is "N"), and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A).
4005).

When the upper limit determination value of the value of the jackpot random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A4006). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A4006 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the jackpot) is set as the determination result (A4007). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A4006 is "N"), and a big hit is set as the determination result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3909) in the big hit flag 2 setting process and the like will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

As a matter of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment. It does not overlap the range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In this embodiment, it should be noted that
A small hit random number is not provided independently, and a large hit random number is also used for determining a small hit, but a configuration in which an original small hit random number is provided is also possible.

In the game control device 100, when the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A).
The result of 4101 is "Y"), a deviation is set as the determination result (A4103), and the small hit determination process is terminated.

Further, in the game control device 100, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is "N"), whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. (A4102). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (A)
The result of 4102 is "Y"), and a deviation is set as the determination result (A4103). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A4102 is "N"), the small hit is set as the determination result (A4104). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability, fall probability]
FIGS. 98 (a), (b), and (c) are special figure variation display games determined as a result of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (FIG. 96), small hit determination process (FIG. 97), and fall lottery process (FIG. 93). It is a table exemplifying the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the fall probability of.

In the example of FIG. 98 (a), the jackpot probability (high probability state) in the high probability state is the probability set value 1 to 1.
It is the same regardless of 6 (settings 1 to 6). On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (low probability state)
Has a tendency to increase as the probability setting value increases (becomes a higher setting), and the larger the probability setting value, the more likely it is that a big hit will occur, which is advantageous for the player. As described above, only one of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state may be configured to increase as the probability setting value increases. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value in FIG. 96 by the range of the value of the jackpot random number. The jackpot probability can be changed according to the probability setting value by changing the range of the lower limit determination value or the value of the jackpot random number corresponding to the probability setting value in addition to the upper limit determination value.

Also, with setting 1 and setting 2, with setting 3 and setting 4, or with setting 5 and setting 6, the jackpot probability (
The high probability state) and the jackpot probability (low probability state) are the same. It should be noted that the jackpot probabilities may be different from each other in all settings. Further, even if the jackpot probabilities are the same, the effect control device 300 can execute the effect according to each probability set value (variable effect setting process described later).

In the example of FIG. 98 (b), the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state, and regardless of the probability setting value (setting). The small hit probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the small hit upper limit determination value and the small hit lower limit determination value in FIG. 97 by the range of the value of the large hit random number. As shown in FIG. 87, in the special figure 1 variable display game, small hits do not occur (small hit probability is zero). It should be noted that a configuration in which a small hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game is also possible. Further, in the low probability state, the small hit probability may be lower than in the high probability state.

In the example of FIG. 98 (c), the fall probability as the winning probability of the fall lottery is a probability setting value (setting).
Regardless of whether it is a high-probability state or a low-probability state, and whether it is a special figure 1 variable display game or a special figure 2 variable display game, it is constant (1/237). be. The fall probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the fall lottery upper limit determination value and the fall lottery lower limit determination value in FIG. 93 by the range of the fall lottery random numbers.

[Special Figure 1 Information Setting Process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3607a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets a variation pattern selection information table (A4401).
). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 are acquired (A4402).

Here, the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuations, and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuations. The first half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode before the start of reach,
The latter half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode after the reach state is reached, and corresponds to the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A4403), and when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A4403 is "N"). ), The value is converted by adding the special figure 1 hold number to the first half offset data in order to distribute the first half fluctuation according to the special figure 1 hold number (A4404). Then, the process proceeds to step A4405.

In the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A4403).
The result is “Y”), the process of step A4404 is not performed, and the first half offset data acquired in step A4402 is not updated or converted, and the process proceeds to step A4405.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4405), and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2).
) Is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4406), and the special figure 1 information setting process is completed.

[Special Figure 2 Information Setting Process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3607b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is a low probability state and no time reduction (state without normal electric support), that is, a special figure low probability & no time reduction (normal game). It is determined whether or not the condition is (A4501). Special figure Low probability & No time reduction (A)
The result of 4501 is "Y"), and the process proceeds to step A4505.

When the game control device 100 is not in the special figure low probability & no time reduction (the result of A4501 is "N".
”), That is, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation display game to be started is the time reduction final variation in the case of the time saving state or the probable variation state (A4502). The time-reduced final variation is a final (for example, 100th) special figure variation display game in a time-reduced state. When the special figure variation display game to be started is the time-reduced final variation (the result of A4502 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A4506.

The game control device 100 sets a variation pattern selection information table (A) when the special figure variation display game to be started is not the time-reduced final variation (the result of A4502 is "N").
4503). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 are acquired (A4504). As described above, the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuations, and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuations. ..

On the other hand, when the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (the result of A4501 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure variation display game to be started is a high probability final variation. (A4505). Here, the high-probability final fluctuation is a special figure fluctuation display game when the player wins the fall lottery (FIG. 93) and falls from the probabilistic change state (high probability state) to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

The game control device 100 is used when the special figure variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (the result of A4505 is "Y") or when the time-reduced final variation is (A450).
2), in order to secure time for notifying that the result is the final fluctuation, the first half offset data and the second half offset data for the final fluctuation are set (A4506), and the process proceeds to step A4511. ..

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit when the special figure variation display game to be started is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A4505 is "N") (the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is "N"). A4507). Special Figure 2 When the result of the variable display game is not a big hit (A450)
The result of 7 is "N"), the first half offset data for the missed / small hit of the special figure 2 at the time of low probability is set (A4508), and the process proceeds to the process of step A4510. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4507 is “Y”), the first half offset data for the big hit of the special figure 2 at the time of low probability is set (A4509). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A4510). As a result, in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 variation display game becomes variable (long variation) for a long time.

In the probabilistic state (special figure high probability state), the latter half offset data for the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not set, so that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has a normal fluctuation time fluctuation (long fluctuation). (Short fluctuation in comparison). As a result, in the probabilistic state (special figure high probability state), special figure 2
A small hit rush (RUSH) state occurs in which small hits frequently occur due to the variable display game. Since the probability state does not change with small hits, the small hit rush state where small hits occur frequently is
It continues from the start of the probabilistic state to the occurrence of the big hit state (until the result of the special figure fluctuation display game becomes the big hit result). It should be noted that a configuration that enables a small hit rush state even in a short time state is also possible.

After step A4504, A4506 or A4510, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A451).
1), the latter half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4512), and the special figure 2 information setting process is completed.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing.
The details of 610a and A3610b) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area (for the reserved ball 1) of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 used in the special figure 1 (A5001).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation time value table (A5002) and acquires the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (A5003). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (A5004), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (the second half fluctuation time value).
A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A500).
6), the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (A5007). continue,
Special Figure 1 It is determined whether or not information is being set for the variable display game (A5008). Special Figure 1 When information is not being set for the variable display game (the result of A5008 is "N"), Special Figure 2
Since the information is being set for the variable display game, it is determined whether or not to start the long variation (long-term variation) of the special figure 2 variable display game (A5009).

When the game control device 100 does not start the length variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (A5009).
The result of is "N"), and 0 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A50).
10) In the case of starting the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the result of A5009 is "Y"),
Special figure 2 Save 9 in the repeat count area of the game processing timer (A5011). Special Figure 2 Fluctuation display In the long fluctuation of the game, the fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) that is not enough for the 2-byte timer is changed. Therefore, the predetermined number of repetitions (here, 9) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is the number of repetitions. Set in the area. In timer interrupt processing with an interrupt cycle of 4 msec (milliseconds), a 2-byte timer can be set up to about 262 seconds. Special Figure 2 The length variation of the variation display game is executed in the normal gaming state.

For example, by saving the above added value to the special figure game processing timer area, 60,000 ms.
When the ec (60 seconds) timer is set and the number of repetitions of 9 times is saved.
The timer is subtracted by the timer interrupt processing (particularly, the special figure 2 game processing (FIG. 88)) (A3).
304) When the time is up (the result of A3305 is "Y"), the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 (A3307), and the timer value for length variation of 60000 ms (60 seconds) is set again in the game processing timer (A3308). ). As a result, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of long fluctuation,
It is possible to set a long fluctuation time of 60,000 msec + (60,000 msec × 9) = 10 minutes.

The fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game when the fluctuation is not long (number of repetitions = 0) are the first half fluctuations saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5007. It is the sum of the time value and the latter half fluctuation time value.

When the game control device 100 is in the process of setting information regarding the special figure 1 variable display game (A50).
The result of 08 is "Y"), step A5012 without setting the number of timer repetitions.
Move to.

After steps A5008, A5010, and A5011, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5012), and prepares a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5013). .. Then, the effect command setting process for transmitting the variable command as the effect command is executed (A5014).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) of the target of the special figure change display game to be started by -1 (A5015), and the target special figure change. Shift the contents of the random number storage area related to the display game (A5016), and clear the empty area after the shift (A5016).
A5017). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holding number), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game. Variable commands including information about the pattern are mentioned, and these commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing by the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 changing process (A3211) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the change in Special Figure 1.

First, the game control device 100 updates the number of times the symbol is fixed by +1 (A5301).
The number of times the symbol is confirmed is output. Will be done. Next, the decorative special figure 1 command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5302), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5).
303). After that, the decorative special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5304), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5).
305).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 as the display time.
The display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 is set (A5306). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 6 if the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol of the special figure 1.
00 msec, 2000 msec for the jackpot symbol of Special Figure 1.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order (A5307). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order (the result of A5307 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of off) is used as the special figure 1 stop symbol. Load from the save area and save in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5)
322).

In the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of order (in the case of a big hit) (the result of A5307 is "N"), the special figure 2 is also changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed).
(A5308). If the special figure 2 is not changing (the result of A5308 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5319. When special figure 2 is also changing (A53)
The result of 08 is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the processing being displayed in Special Figure 2 described later is being executed (A5).
309).

When the game control device 100 is executing the process being displayed in the special figure 2 (the result of A5309 is ".
Y ”), the process proceeds to step A5311. Special figure 2 Displaying When processing is not being executed (
The result of A5309 is "N"), and the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (A5310). Subsequently, as the display time of the special figure 2, the display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 1 (display time of the special figure 1 + 4 msec) is set (A5311) and displayed in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Save time (A5312). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) in the next special figure 2 game processing (A3304), so that it is added in excess. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 can be made the same. If the stop display of Special Figure 2 has already started, the display time will be reset here (basically, the display time will be extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the out-of-order symbol command of the decorative special figure 2 as an effect command (A5313), saves it in the decorative special figure 2 command area (A5314), and executes the effect command setting process (A5314). A5315). Subsequently, the decorative special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5316), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5317). After that, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 for setting to execute the special figure 2 display process is executed (A5318). In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, the process number "2" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area, or
Special Figure 2 The process of stopping the variable display game as a result of being missed is executed.

By the processing of steps A5311 to A5318, the deviation result of the special figure 2 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 2 variable display game) is set in the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the control related to the special figure 1 variable display game. , Execution of processing during special figure 2 display (end of special figure 2 variable display game)
Is set. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (during the change of special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a hit result (big hit), the special figure 2 variable display game is missed. As a result, the fluctuation will be forcibly terminated (forced termination).

The special figure 1 changing process is performed at the end of the variable time, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5007) is timed up (A3206). Since the result is executed in "Y"), when the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops variable, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated (forced termination).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure 1 command from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5319). Next, the round number upper limit value information is loaded from the above-mentioned special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A5320), and is large from the above-mentioned special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area. The winning opening opening information is loaded and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (A5321). After that, the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322). Next, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (A5323) for setting to execute the special figure 1 display process is executed, and the special figure 1 variable process is terminated. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, the special figure 1 is being displayed, such as saving the process number "2" in the special figure 1 game process number area or executing a process of stopping the special figure 1 variable display game. Perform the necessary processing to move to the processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting a stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (during the change of special figure 2).
Even so, when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a hit result, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated with a missed result.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during the change in FIG. 2.

First, the game control device 100 updates the number of times the symbol is fixed by +1 (A5401).
The symbol confirmation count output count is used in the symbol confirmation count signal editing process (part of the external information editing process) that outputs the symbol confirmation count signal generated when the stop symbol of the variable display game is fixed to an external device. .. Next, the decorative special figure 2 command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area, prepared as an effect command (A5402), and the effect command setting process is executed (A540).
3). After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5404), and the effect command setting process is executed (A540).
5).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 as the display time.
The display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 is set (A5406). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 6 if the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol of the special figure 2.
It is 00 msec, 600 msec for the big hit symbol of the special figure 2, and 136 msec for the small hit symbol of the special figure 2. The display time of the missed symbol and the big hit symbol of the special figure 2 is the same, but it is longer than the display time of the small hit symbol of the special figure 2.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is out of order (A5407). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order (the result of A5407 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of off) is used as the special figure 2 stop symbol. Load from the save area and save in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5)
427).

In the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not out of order (A5407).
The result of is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is also changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed) (A5408). If the special figure 1 is not changing (the result of A5408 is "N"), the process proceeds to the process of step A5423. When the special figure 1 is also changing (the result of A5408 is "Y".
”), It is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A5409).

The game control device 100 is used when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a big hit (A540).
When the result of 9 is "N"), that is, a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (
A5412), the decorative special figure 1 interruption command is prepared as an effect command (A5413), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5414). After that, the process proceeds to step A5423. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (during the change of special figure 1), when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit, the special figure 1 variable display game becomes the special figure 1 game. It is interrupted by interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time by the processing timer. In this case, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 variable display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and the special figure 1 that has been interrupted after the small hit operation related to the special figure 2 variable display game is completed. You can restart the variable display game.

The game control device 100 is used when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A540).
The result of 9 is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the processing being displayed in Special Figure 1 described later is being executed (A54).
10). If the process being displayed in the special figure 1 is being executed (the result of A5410 is “Y”), the process proceeds to the process of step A5415. When the special figure 1 display processing is not being executed (the result of A5410 is "N"), the number of symbol confirmation counts is updated by +1 (A5411). Subsequently, as the display time of the special figure 1, a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 2 (display time of the special figure 2 + 4 mse).
The display time of c) is set (A5415), and the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5416). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. 4msec is added because the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracting only 4msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) in the next special figure 1 game processing (A3205).
), It is an extra addition. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 can be made the same. If the stop display of Special Figure 1 has already started, the display time will be reset here (basically, the display time will be extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the out-of-order symbol command of the decorative special figure 1 as an effect command (A5417), saves it in the decorative special figure 1 command area (A5418), and executes the effect command setting process (A5418). A5419). Subsequently, a decorative special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5420), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5421). After that, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 for setting to execute the special figure 1 display process is executed (A5422). In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, the process number "2" is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area, or
Special Figure 1 The process of stopping the variable display game as a result of being missed is executed.

By the processing of steps A5415 to A5422, the deviation result of the special figure 1 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) is set in the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the control related to the special figure 2 variable display game. , Execution of processing during special figure 1 display (end of special figure 1 variable display game)
Is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (during the change of special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit, the special figure 1 variable display game is forced to be out of order. The fluctuation ends (execution ends).

The special figure 2 changing process is performed at the end of the variable time, that is, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 and the special figure 2 game processing timer times up (results of A3305 and A3306). Is executed in "Y"), so that when the special figure 2 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated (executed).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure 2 command from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5423). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (A5424). Special Figure 2 When the result of the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5424 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) is displayed in special figure 2. It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (when the result is a big hit) (the result of A5424 is "N"), the game control device 100 has the above-mentioned special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area to the round number upper limit. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5425).
The large winning opening opening information is loaded from the above-mentioned special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (A5426). After that, the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427). Next, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (A5428), which sets the setting for executing the special figure 2 display process, is executed (A5428), and the special figure 2 variable process is terminated. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, the process number "2" is set in the special figure 2 game process number area.
The processing necessary for shifting to the processing during display of the special figure 2, such as saving the game or executing the process of stopping the special figure 2 variable display game, is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting a stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (during the change of special figure 1).
Even so, when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated with a missed result.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (A3213, A3315) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. 104A and 104B are shown in FIGS. 104A and 104B.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the remaining ball counter for counting the remaining balls of the special variation winning devices 38 and 39 is 0 (A6001). When the remaining ball counter is not 0 (the result of A6001 is "N"), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated.
When the remaining ball counter is 0 (the result of A6001 is "Y"). It is determined whether or not it is the first big hit round (A6002). If it is not the first jackpot round (A600)
The result of 2 is "N"), and the process proceeds to step A6010.

When the game control device 100 is the first big hit round (the result of A6002 is "Y".
”), It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed at the normal drawing start gate 34 (A6003). When the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 (the result of A6003 is "N"), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. That is, right-handed strike is started and the normal drawing start gate 34
Until the game ball passes through, it does not shift to the processing related to the big hit (processing while the big winning opening is open, etc.).

The game control device 100 is used when the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 (A600).
When the result of 3 is "Y"), that is, when the right-handed hit is started, the setting of the information regarding the start of the jackpot is executed (A6004-A6009). First, set the round number upper limit table (
A6004), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round number upper limit value information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table, and saved in the round number upper limit value area of RWM (A6005). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds is 16R, 8R,
It is 2R.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round number upper limit value information area from the round number upper limit value table, and saves the round LED pointer in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A6006). Then, in the present embodiment, since the upper prize opening is opened by the big hit, the upper prize entrance illegal winning number area is cleared (A6007), and R
Save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the WM top prize opening (A600)
8) The on-output data of the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device is saved in the test signal output data area (A6009).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds in the round number area by +1 (A601).
0). Since the number of rounds in the number of rounds area is cleared to 0 in the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, it is 0 before the start of the big hit operation this time.
After that, the large winning opening opening information and the round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared as the effect command (A6011), and the effect command setting process is executed (A6012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the initial value of the jackpot processing control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds (A6013), and saves the game in the jackpot processing control pointer area of the RWM (A6014). Here, in the case of a pattern in which the opening and closing of the big winning opening is repeated during one round, 0 is set as the initial value, and in the case of the pattern in which the big winning opening is opened only once in one round, the upper limit is suddenly set as the initial value. Set the value (= 21). In the case of a pattern in which opening and closing is repeated, the initial value may not be 0, but may be larger than 0 and less than the upper limit (that is,).
Start with a value in the middle). Next, the large winning opening opening information and the large winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (A6015).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a lever solenoid operation round that operates the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A60).
16). In the present embodiment, the lever solenoid operation round is the jackpot round 1 (the first jackpot round).

The game control device 100 sets the operation data of the lever solenoid 86b (A6017) when the lever solenoid operation round is set (the result of A6016 is “Y”). Here, the specific area 86 is opened in a long time in the case of a probability variation jackpot (for example, 16R, 8R or 2R probability variation jackpot) and in a short time (very short time) in the case of a normal jackpot (for example, 16R normal jackpot). The operation data of the lever solenoid 86b is set in. Specifically, the data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared to 0. On the other hand, when it is not the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is "N"), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (A6018).

Next, the game control device 100 uses the processing number "
4 ”is set (A6019), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game (A6019).
A6020). Special figure 1 When it is a big hit of a variable display game (the result of A6020 is "Y")
, This processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6021), and the large winning opening opening time is saved in the special drawing 1 game processing timer area (A6022). If it is not a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6020 is "N"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6023), and the big winning opening opening time is set to the special figure 2 game processing timer. Save to the area (A6024).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of opening of the upper prize opening (on-data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) in the test signal output data area (A6025), and outputs the solenoid of the special winning opening of the RWM. Turn on the upper prize opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) in the data area Save the upper prize opening on data (A6026), clear the number of big winning openings count (A6027), and process during fanfare / interval. To finish.

In this embodiment, only the big hit that opens only the upper big winning opening exists, but two types of the big hit that opens only the upper big winning opening and the big hit that opens only the lower big winning opening may be provided.
It is also possible to provide a jackpot that opens both the upper and lower prize openings.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 by the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 10
5 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (directing microcomputer) when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the code (number) of the step is represented as "B ***".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first disables interrupts (
B0001). Next, the initial settings of CPU 311 and VDP 312 are executed (B0002, B).
0003) Allow interrupts (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, the game control device 1
The command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from 00 is ready to be executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at the time of turning on the power is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0).
008). The WDT is started with the above-mentioned CPU initial setting (B0002), and the CPU 311
Monitor whether is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period of time, the WDT time is up and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 sets the RTC (real-time clock) 3 as a timekeeping means.
The RTC reading process for reading the time information from 38 is executed (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information every time the process shifts to step B0009. Further, the RTC reading process may be executed only once when the power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10) (the position of the RTC reading process may be changed, for example, step B0003). And B0004 may be executed). The effect control device 300 sets a time timer (time measuring means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on, the time is set from the RTC 338 only once. When the information is read, the time timer may be adjusted to match the time of RTC338. Then, the effect control device 300 may execute various processes by using the time timer instead of the RTC 338. By doing so, the number of processes for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In the RTC reading process, if the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time, ...), A predetermined effect may be executed, but a plurality of By drawing a lottery for the time interval of the predetermined time with a probability corresponding to the set value, the player can estimate the set value from this time interval. For example, the lottery may be performed so that the selection rate at long time intervals becomes smaller as the set value is larger. Further, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing a lottery for the execution period for executing the predetermined effect with a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed so that the selection rate for a long execution period becomes larger as the set value is larger.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (the signal of the effect button switch 25a or the cross key 690f), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0010). Subsequently, a hall / player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED or liquid crystal by the person in charge of the game hall (game store) or the player is executed (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode processing, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect point control process for adding or clearing the effect points (B0012). In the effect point control process, the effect points are added by executing the effect or operation for which the effect points are to be added, and at the end of the game so that the effect points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on production points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode processing. The player can estimate the set value from the added value by drawing a value (added value) to be added to the effect points with a probability according to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed so that the selection rate of the large addition value increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). The details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 106.

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data according to the contents to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. The effect display editing process to be performed is executed (B0015). As for the drawing data set at this time, the image of the display device 41 can be updated without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within the frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer is completed, and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B).
0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "N"), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "Y"), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B0
018). Since the frame period of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame is switched when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice, for example, every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period). .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs and the like (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44, frame effect device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B002).
1). In the movable body control process, for example, the accessory operation effect for driving the motor is set.

Then, when the effect control device 300 finishes the process of the above-mentioned B0021, the effect control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. After that, the processes from B0008 to B0021 are repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 105) will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the command number received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (B1102). When the number of commands received is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to analyze, so the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, when the number of commands received is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 has a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of commands received (B1103)
), Copy the contents of the receive command buffer of RAM to the command area for analysis (B11)
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of command received is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds only 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer contains 32 received commands.
It is configured to store up to the number. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31, and here, the received commands are read in the order of the index and copied to the command area for analysis. When the copy to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N". ”), The processing of steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is saved in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing a free area without performing analysis directly in the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of commands received.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1106 is "Y".
”), Load the received command content in the command area for analysis (B1107), and execute the received command analysis process to analyze the content (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107 below. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the step. The processing of B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 106) will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a procedure of reception command analysis processing executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE unit and the lower byte as an ACTION unit (ACT unit) (B1201). The commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 are the MODE unit (MODE command) and A.
It is composed of a CTION unit (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from a MODE unit indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower levels of the received command are M.
It is composed of an OD part and an ACTION part in this order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit is in the normal range (B12).
02). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type) that can be taken by the MODE unit indicating the type of the command. Then, when the MODE unit is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION unit is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific effect instruction, etc.). Then, when the ACTION section is in the normal range (B1203).
The result is "Y"), and the ACTION section for the MODE section determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE unit is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variable command is a command for instructing a variable pattern of a special decorative symbol, and is a variable command (set in the variable start information setting process). And MODE
When the part represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a variable command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 05 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the hit command (B).
1207). The hit-type command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to the effect during hitting. Interval command (set in process during interval opening), interval command (set in process during opening of big winning opening), ending command (set in processing during opening of big winning opening), small hit fanfare command, command during opening of small hit (small hit round command), Small hit end screen command (small hit ending command), etc. Then, when the MODE unit represents a hit-type command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the hit-type command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a hit command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 07 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the symbol-based command (B).
1209). The symbol-based commands include a decorative special figure 1 command and a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. And when the MODE part represents a design command, (
The result of B1209 is "Y"), the symbol-based command process is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a symbol-based command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 09 is "N"), and then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of the one-shot command (B).
1211). Then, when the MODE unit represents a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), the single-shot command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a one-shot command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 11 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (B1213). The look-ahead symbol command includes a look-ahead stop symbol command. Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead symbol-based command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol-based command processing is executed (B1214), and the reception command analysis processing is terminated. In the look-ahead symbol system command processing, when the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 1 hold number command, the look-ahead symbol type command (look-ahead stop symbol command) corresponds to the special figure 1 hold number. 1 Saved in the look-ahead symbol command area, and if the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 2 hold number command, the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) corresponds to the special figure 2 hold number. Special figure 2 Save to the look-ahead symbol command area. If the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in the low probability state, the look-ahead symbol command processing is executed using the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability), and if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in the high probability state, the look-ahead is executed. A look-ahead symbol-based command process may be executed using a stop symbol command (low probability).

When the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead symbol command, the effect control device 300 (
The result of B1213 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (B1215). The look-ahead fluctuation command includes a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command. Then, when the MODE section represents a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is ".
Y ”), the look-ahead variable command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is terminated. In the look-ahead variation command processing, the look-ahead lottery process related to the look-ahead effect is executed based on the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command and the look-ahead symbol command (look-ahead stop symbol command). The look-ahead effect includes, for example, a continuous advance notice effect (including a chance eye effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a hold change advance notice.

On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode). Since there is a possibility, the received command analysis process is terminated. If the MODE section is not in the normal range (B1202 result is "N"), the ACTION section is not in the normal range (B1203 result is "N"), or AC for the MODE section.
Even if the TION unit is not the correct combination (the result of B1204 is "N"), the reception command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 107) will be described. FIG. 108 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the one-shot system command processing executed by 0.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine (B1301). Then, when the MODE section represents a model specification command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), the model setting process for setting the type of the gaming machine is executed (B).
1302), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE unit does not represent the model designation command (B1).
The result of 301 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents the RAM initialization command (B1303). And when the MODE part represents the command of RAM initialization, (
The result of B1303 is "Y"), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization and the like is executed (B1304), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a power failure recovery command when the MODE section does not represent a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is “N”). ). Then, when the MODE section represents a power failure recovery command (B13).
The result of 05 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not indicate a power failure recovery command, the effect control device 300 is (B1).
The result of 305 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents the customer waiting demo command (B1307). Then, when the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B130)
The result of 7 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE unit does not represent the customer waiting demo command (B).
The result of 1307 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (B1309). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is executed (B1310).
Terminates single-shot command processing.

In the effect control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command. (B1311). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 hold information setting process is executed (B131).
2) End the one-shot command processing.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents the probability information command when the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is “N”). (B1313). Then, when the MODE part represents a probability information command, (B1
The result of 313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a probability information command, the effect control device 300 is (B1).
The result of 313 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents an error / invalid command (B1315). Note that there are, for example, an error occurrence command, an error release command, a state off command, and a state on command as error / invalid commands. As a status on command, a signal is generated from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) and a signal is generated from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) (main body frame opening error, front frame). There is a command indicating (open error). In addition, the status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

Then, when the MODE section represents an error / invalid command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), an error / invalid setting process for notifying or canceling the error or invalidity is executed ().
B1316), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE unit does not represent an error / invalid command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the MODE unit then issues a command for switching the effect mode (processing during special figure display). Etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the effect mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

If the effect control device 300 does not represent a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "N"), then the MODE section represents an out ball number command indicating the number of out balls. It is determined whether or not (B1319). Then, when the MODE unit represents the out ball number command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the out ball number reception processing is executed (B1).
320), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the out-ball number command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
The result of 1319 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a count command (large winning opening count command) (B1321). Then, when the MODE unit represents the count command of the large winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a count command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
It is determined whether or not the result of 1321 represents "N") and the MODE unit represents the set value information command (probability set value information command) (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery in step A1046 of FIG. 82B and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. Then, when the MODE unit represents the set value information command (the result of B1323 is "Y"), the set value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the process of receiving the set value, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

When the MODE unit does not represent the set value information command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
The result of 1323 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a setting change type command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, a command during which the probability setting is being changed (A)
There is 1030). Then, when the MODE section represents a setting change command, (B13).
The result of 25 is "Y"), the setting change system information setting process is executed (B1326), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting change information setting process, the contents of the setting change command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for which the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change information setting process, the setting changing display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display device 41.

When the MODE unit does not represent a setting change command, the effect control device 300 is (
The result of B1325 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a command of the setting confirmation system (B1327). As a setting confirmation command, for example, a command during probability setting confirmation (
There is A1033). Then, when the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command, (B1)
The result of 327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command during the probability setting confirmation is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, the setting confirmation display for notifying the player that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the display device 41.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a symbol stop command (B1329). The symbol stop command includes, for example, a symbol stop command of special figure 1 (decorative special figure 1 stop command) and a symbol stop command of special figure 2 (decorative special figure 2 stop command). And MODE
When the part represents a command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 3
Next, 00 determines whether or not the command in the MODE section is a normal command (B13).
30).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1330 is "Y").
, The effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all the symbols are stopped (B1332), and ends the one-shot command process. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing when this process is executed, the game state flag is a flag of "changing", "big hit", and "small hit". Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE part does not represent the command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "N".
”) Or when the command in the MODE section is not normal (the result of B1330 is“ N ”).
The effect control device 300 ends the one-shot command processing.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 108, the MODE section is decorated with a special figure 1 interruption command (A).
In the case of 5413) or the decorative special figure 1 restart command (A7311), the effect control device 30
0 may execute a process of interrupting or resuming the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. MO
When the DE unit represents information (such as a command for passing through a specific area) indicating that the V prize has been won, the effect control device 300 may notify the V prize on the display device 41 or the like.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 107) will be described. FIG. 109 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the symbol system command processing executed by 0.

The effect control device 300 receives a symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2).
The special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the command) is set (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT) of the design command.
Set the symbol type corresponding to the combination of (part) and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180).
2). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the symbol type is set by using the table for each MODE. In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol type is a missed symbol, a 16R probability variation jackpot symbol, a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol, a 16R normal jackpot symbol, and the like.

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 107) will be described. FIG. 110 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the variable system command processing executed by 0.

The effect control device 300 is a special figure type (special figure 1) of the received variable system command (variable command).
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2) is undecided (B1901). When the special figure type is undecided (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing the production, such as when the symbol system command of the jackpot symbol is received even though the variable system command of the deviation is received. When the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y")
, Ends variable command processing.

When the effect control device 300 does not match the symbol type with the variable command (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variable pattern type from the variable command (variable command) (B1).
904) Executes a variable effect setting process for setting a variable effect, which is a variable effect (B19).
05). It should be noted that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special figure changing is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous notice effect (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) is not 0, the number is updated by -1. (B1907)
).

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the variation system command process (FIG. 110) described above will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the fluctuation pattern type is non-reach fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of production points, the model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the special figure type, effect mode, and set value (probability set value) (B2002), and correspond to the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the number of pending special figure types. First half notice Get the address of the distribution group table (B200)
3). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

When the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, the effect control device 300 is reachable variation, the effect control device 300 has a number of effect point points, a model code, a special figure type, and an effect mode. Set the first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and set value (probability set value) (B2004), and set the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the first half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the variable pattern type. Get the address of (B2005).

After steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 draws a lottery for a notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). The lottery probability of the notice depends on the set value. Next, set the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, symbol type, and set value (probability setting value) (B2007), and set the variable command. The address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT unit is acquired (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). The lottery probability of the notice depends on the set value. After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to the MODE section and the ACT section of the variable command (variable command) is determined (B2010). From the variable commands, you can see the variable time and the main reach contents.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the advance notice (B2011). Then, the content of the setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value (probability set value, setting) is determined (B2012). After that, the stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol of the decorative special symbol variation display game is executed according to the content of the variation effect such as the reach effect or the advance notice effect (B2013). Here, the decoration stop symbol is concretely determined, such as determining the looseness in the case of the out-of-order symbol.

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the setting suggestion effect (B2014). Set the display of variable effects such as reach effects (B2015), and set the display of notice effects (B20).
16). Subsequently, the display setting of the hold reduction (hold shift) corresponding to the special figure type is set. The corresponding display information (B1717) and the like are read out (B2017). Subsequently, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2018). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decorative LEDs, etc.) and emits light in a light emission mode (color, light emission timing, etc. of each LED) defined by a decoration number. ..

It is possible to set the voice number and the decoration number not only based on the effect content but also by drawing with a lottery probability according to the set value (probability setting value). In this way, the player can change the light emitting mode of the decorative device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED) to the gaming machine 10.
You can enjoy guessing the set value (probability set value) of.

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the decorative special map variation corresponding to the special map type (B).
2019), display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) other than the first to third special symbols (B2020). The fourth symbol variation is the display device 41.
Lamp display units 1, 2 (LEDs) of the above-mentioned lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the above, and / or
It is displayed on the display device 41.

[Action / effect of the fifth embodiment]
According to the fifth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 can be controlled as a so-called simultaneous variable machine, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be in a state of being executed simultaneously (both) independently of each other. .. Even if one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, if the other becomes a big hit, one of the variable display games can be forcibly terminated with a missed result. Further, in the probabilistic state, the small hit RUSH (rush) state in which many small hits are generated by the special figure 2 variable display game becomes possible. Furthermore, game control and effect control according to the probability set value can be realized.

[Sixth Embodiment]
A sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 125. The sixth embodiment is
Warning display unit 929 (warning display means) mainly arranged on the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15.
And the wall portion 920 (position specifying means). The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fifth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

[Caution display and wall]
FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 10 as viewed from diagonally above to the right. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine 10. FIG. 114 shows the glass frame 1 excluding the decorative device 18a (top unit).
5 is an exploded perspective view of 5. FIG. 115 shows a front view (a) of the glass frame 15 excluding the decorative device 18a (top unit), a sectional view (b) taken along the line AA, and a speaker decorative member 470.
It is a front view (c) and a back view (d) of the glass frame 15 excluding a and 470b. FIG. 116 shows
It is a plan view (view from directly above) of the gaming machine 10, FIG. 116A shows a state before the front frame and the glass frame are rotated forward of the gaming machine, and FIG. 116B shows the front surface. The state after rotating the frame and the glass frame to the front of the gaming machine is shown. FIG. 117 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 116.
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of the alert display unit 929.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, for example, the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15 (front frame) has, for example,
A warning display unit 929 (seal) displaying the content of the warning regarding the removal (and attachment) of the decorative device 18a is arranged (attached) (FIG. 118).

The alert display unit 929 (FIG. 118) has, for example, a rectangular shape and has a yellow background, and the characters indicating the alert are displayed in black (or a color different from the background color such as red). There is. On the other hand, the glass frame 15 (upper surface 15a) is colored black, for example. As a result, the alert display unit 929 is not only arranged in a conspicuous place called the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15, but also the color of the glass frame 15 is displayed (pasted) as the background color, so that the color is also positional. It has become very noticeable.

By the way, since the warning display unit 929 is used to call attention in a conspicuous place as described above, it may not match the motif or decorative member of the gaming machine 10, which may spoil the aesthetic appearance. Further, the caution display unit 929 alerts a worker (such as a person involved in the game hall) who adjusts the hall setting of the gaming machine 10 to pay attention when removing the decoration device 18a, or the decoration device. Although it suggests how to handle and remove 18a (FIG. 118), it is an unnecessary display for the player. Therefore, when the yellow warning display unit 929 is arranged on the black background as described above, the warning display unit 929 is very conspicuous. Therefore, there is a risk that the interest of the player will be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a wall portion 920 is provided on the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15, a warning display portion 929 is arranged in the wall portion 920, and at least from a player and a seat seated during the game (during the game). The warning display unit 929 behind the player is made difficult to see from the standing player. The caution display unit 929 may display precautions that are not directly related to the decorative device 18a (for example, precautions regarding the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15).

The wall portion 920 has a longitudinal direction in the left-right direction (width direction of the glass frame 15), and its length is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the mounting portion 442 of the decorative device 18a. The wall part 920
It is arranged at a position inside the mounting portion 442 in the left-right direction, and the rear end portion of the wall portion 920 forms the same plane as the back surface of the glass frame 15. The wall portion 920 is the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15.
It can be arranged so as to protrude slightly upward (see FIG. 115).

The wall portion 920 is a portion forming an outer wall (FIG. 120, front wall 921, side wall 922, side wall 923).
) And the bottom surface 924 (FIG. 120) surrounded by the outer wall, and a caution display unit 929 is arranged on the bottom surface 924 (FIG. 120). As a result, the warning display unit 929 is hidden from at least near the height of the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15 (at a position as high as the upper surface 15a) (see FIG. 119, etc.), and at least in front of the gaming machine. It becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the caution display unit 929. Although the wall portion 920 is integrally formed with the glass frame 15, it may be formed as a separate body and attached to the upper surface 15a.

An upper tank 448 is attached to the rear of the front frame 12 (glass frame 15). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), the wall portion 920 is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the decorative device 18a and the upper tank 448 in a plan view. In the state where the glass frame 15 is closed, the wall portion 920 is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the mounting portion 442 of the decorative device 18a and the frame 11 of the outer frame unit 17 in a plan view, and the upper tank 448 is arranged from the frame 11. Is also located behind. On the other hand, when the front frame 12 is rotated forward with the glass frame 15 closed around the hinge 16a (and the hinge 16b (FIG. 113)), the upper tank 448 slips under the frame 11 and the frame 11
It rotates to a position that is ahead of it. At this time, there is no obstacle between the wall portion 920 and the upper tank 448 (see FIG. 116 (b)).

By the way, the game balls stored in the upper tank 448 may cause ball clogging in the upper tank 448. At this time, in order to facilitate the removal of the game ball, the front frame 12 is rotated with the glass frame 15 closed as described above so that the frame 11 does not come on the upper tank 448, and the operator can play the game. It is possible to secure a space for taking out the ball. However, if the worker takes out the game ball in that state, the game ball may pop out from the upper tank 448 and get on (scatter) on the decoration device 18a.

Here, the decorative device 18a is arranged so as to be higher than the wall portion 920 (front wall 921). Further, the upper surface of the main body portion 432 of the decorative device 18a and the upper surface of the mounting portion 442 are inclined rearward (see FIG. 117). Therefore, the game ball on the decorative device 18a has a wall portion 920.
Will flow down toward.

Therefore, as described above, the wall portion 920 is at least a warning display portion 929 from the player.
Not only the configuration that makes it difficult to see, but also the configuration for temporarily retaining (storing) the game ball that has flowed down from the decorative device 18a and discharging it to the upper tank 448 (that is, the three front walls 921 and the side wall 922). , There is a side wall 923, but there is no rear wall). Since the wall portion 920 does not have a rear wall, it is easy to discharge the game ball to the upper tank 448, but the bottom surface 9
If it is assumed that the game ball stored on the 24 is manually moved to the upper tank 448, a rear wall may be provided on the wall portion 920.

[Arrangement of warning display, wall, and decorative device]
FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view (a portion surrounded by a broken line ellipse in FIG. 117) showing the arrangement relationship between the wall portion 920 and the decorative device 18a (top unit). FIG. 120 is a back view showing the arrangement relationship between the wall portion 920 and the hinge 16a.

As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the wall portion 920 has a width direction (left-right direction) of the glass frame 15.
Glass from the front wall 921 facing the mounting portion 442 of the decorative device 18a and one end of the front wall 921 in the width direction (left-right direction) facing the hinge 16a side. A side wall 922 extending rearward of the frame 15 (not shown in FIG. 119), a side wall 923 extending rearward of the glass frame 15 from the other end of the front wall 921, and a front wall 921, side wall 922, side wall 92.
It is surrounded by 3 and has a bottom surface 924 on which a warning display unit 929 is arranged.
Although the load of the decorative device 18a is applied to the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15, the front wall 921, the side wall 922, and the side wall 923 also function as a reinforcing portion for reinforcing the strength of the upper surface 15a.

As shown in FIG. 119, in the wall portion 920, the distance D1 between the front wall 921 of the wall portion 920 and the rear end portion (hereinafter, referred to as the rear end portion) of the glass frame 15 of the mounting portion 442 is a game. It is arranged so as to be smaller than the diameter D of the sphere. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down from the mounting portion 442 does not fit into the interval D1, and the game ball can be reliably flowed down to the wall portion 920.
Further, the length D2 of the glass frame 15 of the bottom surface 924 of the wall portion 920 in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) is formed to be longer than the diameter D of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can be temporarily retained (stored) on the bottom surface 924. For example, the game ball hits the rear edge of the glass frame 15 on the bottom surface 924 and greatly jumps backward and jumps over the upper tank 448. You can prevent it from going. When the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15 and the upper surface of the front frame 12 form the same plane, the length D2 is the length of the bottom surface 924 in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the front frame 12.
It may be defined as the total length of the thicknesses of.

As shown in FIG. 119, the upper surfaces of the front wall 921, the side wall 922, and the side wall 923 form substantially the same plane that inclines backward, and the substantially same plane forms a part of the virtual inclined surface 920a. There is. On the other hand, the upper surface of the mounting portion 442 is also an inclined surface 442a that is inclined toward the rear of the glass frame 15.
The inclined surface 442a forms a part of the virtual inclined surface 442b. Here, the virtual inclined surface 442b is an extension of the inclined surface 442a. The mounting portion 4
The upper surface of the 42 and the upper surface of the main body 432 (FIG. 117) also form substantially the same plane.

The inclination angle (α- (π / 2)) (rad) of the inclined surface 920a is the inclination angle of the inclined surface 442b (
It is the same as φ− (π / 2)), but the inclined surface 920a is arranged so as to be lower than the inclined surface 442b by a distance D3 in the vertical direction. That is, the wall portion 920 is the mounting portion 44.
It is arranged so as not to intersect the same plane (inclined surface 442b) formed by the upper surface (inclined surface 442a) of 2. As a result, even if the frame 11 direction is viewed from the vicinity of the upper end of the decorative device 18a, the wall portion 920 and the caution display portion 929 can be made difficult to see, and the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine 10 is not spoiled. The height of the outer wall (front wall 921, side wall 922, side wall 923) of the wall portion 920 is the line of sight of the player whose outer wall itself stands up by the decorative device 18a while the outer wall appropriately shields the caution display portion 929. It may be adjusted appropriately so that it can be sufficiently shielded from.

It is preferable that the caution display unit 929 is arranged at a position closer to the front wall 921 side than the rear end of the bottom surface 924. As a result, the inclination angle of the line of sight from the front of the gaming machine 10 through the upper surface of the front wall 921 to the caution display unit 929 becomes higher than the inclination angle of the inclined surface 442b. Therefore, even if the gaming machine 10 is viewed from a height at which the wall portion 920 can be visually recognized, the warning display unit 929 is difficult to visually recognize, and therefore the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine 10 is not spoiled. Attention display unit 92
Reference numeral 9 may be arranged so as to abut on the front wall 921, and the length of the caution display unit 929 in the front-rear direction may be shorter than half of the length D2 of the bottom surface 924. In this way, the caution display unit 929 becomes more difficult to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 120, the wall portion 920 is arranged so as to be lower than the hinge 16a. As a result, even if the gaming machine 10 is viewed from the side surface where the hinge 16a of the gaming machine 10 is arranged and from the height position of the hinge 16a, the wall portion 920 (front wall 921, side wall 922, side wall 9).
23) becomes difficult to see and does not spoil the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine 10. Further, the caution display unit 929 may be arranged so as to abut on the side wall 923 on the side where the hinge 16a is not arranged, and the length of the caution display unit 929 in the left-right direction is set to the left-right direction of the bottom surface 924. May be shorter than half the length of. In this way, the alert display unit 929 becomes difficult to see even from the other side surface on which the hinge 16a is not arranged.

In the present embodiment, the wall portion 920 is arranged so as to project from the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15 (FIGS. 117 and 119). As a result, even if the glass frame 15 is viewed from the height position of the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15 so as to avoid the decoration device 18a from the side of the decoration device 18a, the caution display unit 929 becomes difficult to see.

Further, the decorative device 18a (top unit) basically shields the wall portion 920, and makes it difficult to visually recognize the caution display portion 929 as an auxiliary together with the wall portion 920. but,
In the present embodiment, since the decorative device 18a is large, the decorative device 18a (top unit)
It is also possible to omit the wall portion 920, provided that the wall portion 920 is not removed. As a result, the decorative device 18a makes it difficult for the player to at least visually recognize the caution display unit 929. However, since the outer wall of the wall portion 920 is arranged near the alert display unit 929, the effect of shielding is strong, and the angle range in which the attention alert display unit 929 can be shielded (the angle range of the line of sight with respect to the front-rear direction) is stronger than that of the decorative device 18a. ) Tends to increase. Therefore, if the wall portion 920 is omitted, it is advantageous in terms of cost, but there is a possibility that the caution display portion 929 can be easily seen by the player (for example, when the player is tall).

Further, the distance D1 between the front wall 921 of the wall portion 920 and the rear end portion of the mounting portion 442 can be set to zero, that is, the front wall 921 and the mounting portion 442 can be brought into contact with each other. As a result, the mounting portion 442
The flow of the game ball from the wall portion 920 to the wall portion 920 can be smoothly performed. Moreover, this arrangement (D1 = 0)
), The wall portion 920 can be omitted. Then, the mounting portion 442 of the decorative device 18a (position specifying means) makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the warning display unit 929 at least, and the rear end portion of the mounting portion 442 is used to arrange the warning display unit 929. Positioning can be performed.

[Deformation example of wall part (1)]
FIG. 121 is a cross-sectional view showing a modified example of the wall portion 920 (a portion surrounded by a broken line ellipse in FIG. 117). FIG. 121 (a) shows an inclination angle of the upper surface of the wall portion 920 of the decorative device 18a. FIG. 121 (b) shows a case where the upper surface of the wall portion 920 is lower than the same plane including the upper surface of the decorative device 18a, which is lower than the inclination angle of the upper surface, and FIG. 121 (b) shows the upper surface of the wall portion 920 and the decorative device 18.
The case where the inclination angle of the upper surface of the wall portion 920 is the same and the upper surface of the wall portion 920 coincides with the same plane including the upper surface of the decorative device 18a is shown in FIG. 121 (c). 1
The angle of inclination of the upper surface of the wall portion 920 is higher than the inclination angle of the upper surface of the wall portion 920, the upper surface of the wall portion 920 is lower than the coplanar surface including the upper surface of the decorative device 18a, and the coplanar surface including the upper surface of the wall portion 920 is behind the decorative device 18a. The case where it touches the end of is shown.

In the wall portion 920 illustrated in FIG. 121 (a), the height of the side wall 922 (not shown) and the rear end portion (hereinafter referred to as the rear end portion) of the glass frame 15 of the side wall 923 from the upper surface 15a. Figure 1
It is the same as the case shown in FIG. 19, but the inclination angle of the inclined surface 920a (β- (π / 2)).
) Is lower than the inclination angle (φ− (π / 2)) of the inclined surface 442b. Therefore, the height of the front wall 921 is lower than that of the front wall 921 shown in FIG. 119, and the distance D4 between the inclined surface 442b and the front wall 921 is larger than the distance D3 (FIG. 119). Although the illustration is omitted (same below), the interval D1 and the length D2 are the same as those shown in FIG. 119. In the above configuration, the front wall 921 is lower than that shown in FIG. 119, and the wall portion 920 is further difficult to see while maintaining the visibility difficulty of the caution display portion 929.

In the wall portion 920 shown in FIG. 121 (b), the heights of the side wall 922 (not shown) and the rear end portion of the side wall 923 are higher than those shown in FIG. 119, and the inclination angle (γ-) of the inclined surface 920a is higher.
(Π / 2)) is the same as the inclination angle (φ− (π / 2)) of the inclined surface 442b, and the inclined surface 92
0a and the inclined surface 442b form the same plane. In the above configuration, the wall portion 920 has an inclined surface 4
Since it does not cross the 42b and protrude above the inclined surface 442b, it is difficult to see the wall portion 920. On the other hand, since the front wall 921 is higher than the case shown in FIG. 119, it is difficult to visually recognize the caution display unit 929. Further, the inclined surface 920a and the inclined surface 4
Since the 42b forms the same plane, when the distance D3 (FIG. 119) is sufficiently smaller than the diameter D (FIG. 119), the game ball moves from the mounting portion 442 to the wall portion 920 (front wall 921, side wall 922).
, The impact received when flowing down to the side wall 923) can be suppressed, and the game ball can be reduced from bouncing due to the impact.

In the wall portion 920 shown in FIG. 121 (c), the heights of the side wall 922 (not shown) and the rear end portion of the side wall 923 are the same as in the case shown in FIG. 119, but the inclination angle of the inclined surface 920a is the same. (Δ− (π / 2)) is higher than the inclination angle (φ− (π / 2)) of the inclined surface 442b, and the inclined surface 920a intersects the rear end portion of the inclined surface 442a and the inclined surface 442b. In the above configuration, the caution display unit 929 and the wall unit 920 have difficulty in visual recognition, as in the case shown in FIG. 119. Further, when the distance D3 (FIG. 119) is close to the diameter D (FIG. 119), the game ball (emitted so as to draw a parabola) emitted from the inclined surface 442a is inclined more than the inclined surface 442a. A wall portion 920 having an inclined surface 920a having a large angle (front wall 921,
Since it flows down to the side wall 922 and the side wall 923), it flows down from the mounting portion 442 to the wall portion 920 (front wall 921,
It is possible to suppress the impact received when flowing down to the side wall 922 and the side wall 923), and it is possible to reduce the jumping of the game ball due to the impact. In addition, in FIG. 121 (the same applies to FIGS. 119, 120, and 121 (a)), the height of the rear end portion of the side walls 922 and 923 from the upper surface 15a can be set to zero.

[Deformation example of wall part (2)]
122 is a cross-sectional view showing a modified example of the wall portion 920 (a portion surrounded by a broken line ellipse in FIG. 117), and FIG. 122 (a) shows the bottom surface 924 facing rearward in the arrangement shown in FIG. 119. 122 (b) shows a case where the front wall 921 and the side walls 922, 923 are flush with the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15 (front frame) in the arrangement shown in FIG. 122 (a). Is shown.

In the wall portion 920 illustrated in FIG. 122 (a), the bottom surface 924 is compared with the case of FIG. 119.
Is inclined downward toward the rear of the glass frame 15. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the bottom surface 924 can be quickly discharged toward the upper tank 448.

In the wall portion 920 illustrated in FIG. 122 (b), as compared with the case of FIG. 122 (a), the entire wall portion 920 is embedded in the glass frame 15, and the front wall 921 and the side wall 922 (FIG. 1) are provided.
22 (b) is not shown), the upper surface of the side wall 923 forms the same plane as the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15. This prevents the game ball from coming into contact with the outer corners of the side wall 922 (not shown in FIG. 122B) and the outer corner of the side wall 923 to prevent the game ball from bouncing in the left-right direction, and also prevents the game ball from jumping in the left-right direction, and the bottom surface 92.
The game ball that has flowed down to 4 can be quickly discharged toward the upper tank 448. note that,
Although the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15 is horizontal, it may be slightly inclined toward the rear. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the upper surface 15a can be quickly discharged toward the upper tank 448.

[Deformation example of wall part (3)]
FIG. 123 is a back view showing a modified example of the wall portion 920. In the wall portion 920 shown in FIG. 123, the side wall 922 is arranged so as to be higher than the side wall 923. Also, the front wall 921
, The side wall 922 and the side wall 923 form substantially the same plane (inclined surface 920a (not shown in FIG. 123)), but the substantially same plane not only inclines downward toward the rear of the glass frame 15, but also the glass frame. It is inclined downward in the width direction (left-right direction) of 15 and toward the direction away from the hinge 16a. Similarly, the bottom surface 924 not only inclines downward toward the rear of the glass frame 15, but also
The glass frame 15 is inclined downward in the width direction (left-right direction) and away from the hinge 16a. With the above configuration, the wall portion 92 from the side wall 922 arranged higher than the side wall 923.
It is possible to reduce the number of game balls that jump out of 0. On the contrary, the side wall 923 is the side wall 92.
By arranging it lower than 2, the number of game balls that jump out from the side wall 923 to the outside of the wall portion 920 is larger than that of the game balls that jump out from the side wall 922 to the outside of the wall portion 920. However, the upper tank 4
When 48 (FIG. 116) is unevenly distributed in the left-right direction from the wall portion 920 and in the direction away from the hinge 16a, the bottom surface 92 is the amount of the game ball that protrudes from the side wall 923 to the outside of the wall portion 920.
Since the overflow of the game ball in No. 4 is reduced and the game ball protruding from the side wall 923 flows down to the upper tank 448, the game ball can be reliably flowed down to the upper tank 448 (FIG. 116). Although not shown, it is preferable that the height of the upper surface of the front frame 12 in contact with the rear surface of the glass frame 15 is equal to or less than the height of the rear end portion of the bottom surface 924. Alternatively, when the height of the upper surface of the front frame 12 is substantially the same as the height of the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15, the height of the upper surface of the portion of the front frame 12 facing the bottom surface 924 is equal to or less than the height of the rear end portion of the bottom surface 924. Is preferable. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down the bottom surface 924 is the front frame 12
It can be discharged to the upper tank 448 via the upper surface of the above.

[Deformation example of wall part (4)]
FIG. 124 is a plan view (viewed from directly above) showing a modified example of the wall portion 920. On the bottom surface 924 of the wall portion 920 shown in FIG. 124, positioning portions 925, 926, 927 for positioning the arrangement position of the alert display unit 929 are arranged. Positioning unit 925, 926,92
Reference numeral 7 has a shape that follows the outer shape of the warning display unit 929, and can be arranged at a position that is in contact with (or adjacent to) the front wall 921 and the side wall 923 of the bottom surface 924, but is located closer to the front wall 921. Any position is acceptable as long as it is.

The positioning unit 925 is arranged at a position adjacent to (or in contact with) the short side of the side wall 922 side of the alert display unit 929, for example. The positioning unit 926 has, for example, an L-shape, and has an L-shaped shape.
The inner corner of the L-shape is arranged behind the warning display unit 929 (upper tank 448 side (FIG. 116)) and adjacent to (or in contact with) the corner on the side wall 922 side. The positioning unit 927 is
For example, behind the alert display unit 929 (upper tank 448 side (FIG. 116)) and side wall 92.
It is arranged at a position adjacent to (or in contact with) the long side on the 3rd side.

The positioning portions 925, 926, 927 may be formed as convex portions protruding from the bottom surface 924, or may be displayed by coloring with a color different from that of the bottom surface 924 (for example, yellow, white, etc.). In addition, the warning display unit 929 may be peeled off from the bottom surface 924 for some reason or reason, and a part of the back surface of the warning warning display unit 929 may remain as a peeling residue. I can recognize that it was.

Further, a recess (not shown) may be formed in the region surrounded by the positioning portions 925, 926, 927 on the bottom surface 924, that is, the region in which the caution display portion 929 is arranged. The recess is formed, for example, by digging the bottom surface 924 according to the shape of the character "Note". Therefore, the operator can recognize that the place where the character (recess) of "Note" is displayed is the place where the caution display unit 929 should be arranged. Next, the attention display unit 929 is positioned as the positioning unit 925, 926, 9
When arranged in the area surrounded by 27 (provided with the recess), the caution display unit 929 covers the recess, but the area overlapping the recess does not contact the bottom surface 924. After that, the alert display unit 9
When 29 is peeled off, a part of the back surface of the caution display unit 929 may remain as a peeled-off residue. In this case, the area without the unpeeled residue appears as the character "Note" inside the unpeeled residue. Therefore, the worker can see the character of "Note" to call attention display unit 929.
Can be recognized that was placed. Further, since the inner contour portion forming the character "Note" of the unpeeled residue serves as a starting point for the operator to peel off the unpeeled residue, the unpeeled residue can be easily peeled off.

It is also possible to form a convex portion (not shown) having the same shape instead of the concave portion. In this case, the height of the convex portion is such that the alert display unit 929 is hardly deformed in a plan view when the attention display unit 929 is arranged on the positioning unit 925, 926,927 (including the convex portion). It is preferable to make a plan. As a result, the operator can recognize that the place where the character "Note" raised from the bottom surface 924 is exposed is the place where the caution display unit 929 should be placed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 124, a caution display unit is provided in a region opposite to the front wall 921 of the bottom surface 924, that is, a region behind the positioning portion 926,927 (upper tank 448 side (FIG. 116)). A prohibited area display unit 928 indicating an area for which display (pasting) of 929 is prohibited is arranged. The prohibited area display unit 928 can be formed by, for example, a plurality of grooves extending in parallel in the width direction (left-right direction) of the glass frame 15. As a result, it is possible to prevent the warning display means (warning display unit 929) from being erroneously placed at a position away from the front wall 921 of the bottom surface 924. In particular, when the prohibited area display unit 928 is configured by a groove, the contact area between the groove and the caution display unit 929 is small and sufficient bonding force cannot be obtained. Therefore, the caution display unit 929
It is possible to easily make the worker recognize that it is an area where the arrangement (pasting) of is prohibited.

In addition, on the bottom surface 924, the caution display unit 929 and the positioning unit 925, 926, 92
7. Arbitrary display unit 930 (sticker) is placed (pasted) at a position different from the prohibited area display unit 928.
can do. The optional display unit 930 displays arbitrary information such as, for example, the type and model number of the decorative device 18a. The background color of the optional display unit 930 is the caution display unit 929.
It is not necessary to use yellow as in the case of white, and any color such as white can be selected. By arranging the arbitrary display unit 930 on the bottom surface 924 in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the arbitrary display unit 930 at least like the caution display unit 929.

[Caution display displayed on the display device]
By the way, the display of the warning regarding the adjustment of the gaming machine 10, such as the warning display on the warning display unit 929, can be displayed on the display device 41 during the adjustment of the gaming machine 10, for example. Further, the warning display displayed on the display device 41 includes not only the warning display for the operator who adjusts the gaming machine 10 but also the warning display for the player. As a warning display for the player, there is a warning display for how to correct the wrong way of hitting (left-handed, right-handed) and a warning display for forgetting to take the prepaid card for purchasing a rental ball. be. The striking caution display can be displayed by erroneous operation of the player's operation handle 24, and the caution display prompting the player to forget to remove the prepaid card is displayed after the jackpot ends.

However, during the adjustment of the gaming machine 10, not only the warning display for the operator but also the warning display for the player may be displayed on the display device 41. In this case, the warning display for the player is unnecessary for the operator, but if this is displayed on the display device 41, the worker may mistake it for the warning display for the worker. There is a risk of reducing the efficiency of the inspection work of the gaming machine 10.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display device 41 displays the warning display for the player during the adjustment of the gaming machine 10, the movable accessory (movable accessory 820 and falling accessory 810 shown in FIG. 35) is displayed.
It is preferable to move the shielding means such as the above) to shield the portion of the display device 41 displaying the alert display so that the operator cannot easily see the alert display. At this time, the warning display is displayed on the display device 41 at a position included in the movable range of the movable accessory, but the movable accessory operates to shield a part or all of the warning display. It will be. As a result, it becomes difficult for the operator who is adjusting the gaming machine to visually recognize the warning display for the player displayed on the display device 41, so that it is possible to avoid a decrease in the efficiency of the inspection work of the gaming machine 10.

At the time of setting the hole, the above-mentioned warning display for the player is generated at an arbitrary timing of the hole setting. In addition, the warning display for forgetting to remove the prepaid card occurs at any timing of the hall setting, or during the initial operation when a power failure occurs during a big hit and the power is restored immediately. Therefore, when the warning display for the player is displayed during the adjustment of the gaming machine 10 including the hole setting and the initial operation, the movable accessory is movable to shield the warning display for the player. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the efficiency of the inspection work of the gaming machine 10.

[Sheet attached to decorative equipment]
FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an example of a sheet 435 attached to the decorative device 18a. Figure 1
As shown in 25, a seat 435 is attached to the front surface of the decorative device 18a. The display content of the sheet 435 is changed each time the model is changed, and the decorative device 1 is sandwiched between the transparent cover 434 to which the decorative device 18a is attached and the front surface of the decorative device 18a.
Attached to 8a. Therefore, the sheet 435 is visible through the transparent cover 434.

A model that displays the model name of the gaming machine 10 (arbitrary model name such as "CR tiger") and the character related to the model name (arbitrary character such as "tiger face") in the center of the sheet 435. An equal display area 435a is arranged, and a related information display area 435b for displaying information related to the model displayed in the model display area 435a is arranged at the lower right of the sheet 434.

In the related information display area 435b, the two-dimensional code 4 for accessing the model-dedicated site related to the model displayed in the model display area 435a and the homepage of the manufacturer of the model concerned 4
35c (QR code (registered trademark)) is placed, and by reading with the camera attached to the high-performance mobile phone (smartphone (registered trademark)) owned by the player, the display screen of the high-performance mobile phone is related to the model. Information to be played (game information such as specifications of the model concerned) can be displayed. Further, in the related information display area 435b, the character information 435d for prompting the reading of the two-dimensional code 435c by an arbitrary expression such as "Click here for model information" and the two-dimensional code 43 for the player's line of sight.
A figure 435e (arrow) for pointing to 5c is displayed.

In FIG. 125, the related information display area 435b is arranged at the lower right, but may be arranged at the upper right, the upper left, and the lower left. In particular, when the related information display area 435b is arranged in the lower left (or upper left), the two-dimensional code 435c can be read by operating the high-performance mobile phone with the left hand while operating the operation handle 24 (FIG. 112) with the right hand. It can be done easily. This will result in
Check the game information while playing when the method of hitting is unknown at the first hit, such as when the game state is switched during a big hit or during general electric support, or when the production on the display device 41 (Fig. 35) changes significantly. can. The related information display area 435b may overlap with the model display area 435a, but it is more preferable to arrange the related information display area 435b so as not to overlap with the display area 435a.

[Action / effect of the sixth embodiment]
According to the sixth embodiment, the warning display means (warning display unit 929) capable of displaying a predetermined warning display on the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the game (variable display game) when the predetermined condition is satisfied. The position specifying means (wall portion 920, decorative device 18a) capable of specifying the position of the alert displaying means (warning display unit 929) is provided, and the position specifying means (wall portion 920, decorative device 18a) is provided. It is characterized in that the attention alert display means (attention alert display unit 929) is made difficult to see from the front of the game machine 10. As a result, it is possible to avoid deterioration of the aesthetic appearance due to the caution display (warning display unit 929) arranged on the gaming machine 10.

In the sixth embodiment, the position specifying means (wall portion 920) is arranged on the upper surface 15a of the front frame (glass frame 15, a part of the opening / closing frame) of the gaming machine 10, and the warning display means (warning display unit 92).
9) is arranged in the position specifying means (wall portion 920). As a result, at least the alert display means (attention display unit 929) becomes difficult to see from the player who is executing the game, and it is possible to avoid a decrease in the player's interest. In the sixth embodiment, an example in which the position specifying means (wall portion 920) is provided on the upper surface 15a of the glass frame 15 among the opening / closing frames composed of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is shown. If the upper surface of the glass is wide, it is possible to provide a position specifying means (wall portion 920) on the front frame 12 (a part of the opening / closing frame).

In the sixth embodiment, the position specifying means (wall portion 920) has a front wall 921 extending along the width direction of the front frame (glass frame 15) and a front frame (glass) from the end portion of the front wall 921 in the width direction. Frame 15
), A pair of side walls 922,923, a front wall 921 and a pair of side walls 922,92.
A warning display means (warning display unit 929) including a bottom surface 924 surrounded by 3 is arranged on the bottom surface 924. Thereby, the position specifying means (wall portion 920) can be constructed with a simple configuration.

In the sixth embodiment, the length D2 in the front-rear direction of the front frame (glass frame 15) of the bottom surface 924 is
It is longer than the diameter D of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can be temporarily retained (stored) on the bottom surface 924. For example, the game ball hits the rear edge of the glass frame 15 on the bottom surface 924 and greatly jumps backward and jumps over the upper tank 448. You can prevent it from going.

In the sixth embodiment, a positioning unit 925, 926, 927 indicating an arrangement position of the attention alert display means (attention alert display unit 929) is arranged at a position closer to the front wall 921 of the bottom surface 924. As a result, the arrangement position of the alert display means (attention display unit 929) can be easily determined.

In the sixth embodiment, on the opposite side of the front wall 921 of the bottom surface 924, a prohibited area display unit 928 indicating an area for prohibiting the arrangement of the caution display unit (warning display unit 929) is arranged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the warning display means (warning display unit 929) from being erroneously placed at a position away from the front wall 921 of the bottom surface 924.

In the sixth embodiment, the position specifying means (decorative device 18a) is attached to the upper surface 15a of the front frame (glass frame 15), and the decorative device 18a capable of specifying the position of the warning display means (warning display unit 929). The height of the decorative device 18a includes the front wall 921 and the side wall 922.
, 923 is arranged to be higher than. As a result, the alert display means (attention display unit 929) can be arranged so as to be difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine 10, and the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine 10 and the deterioration of the player's interest can be avoided.

In the sixth embodiment, the upper surface of the decorative device 18a includes an inclined surface 442a that inclines toward the rear of the front frame (glass frame 15), and the front wall 921 and the side wall 922,923 each include an inclined surface 442a. They are arranged so as not to intersect the same plane (inclined surface 442b).
As a result, the wall portion 920 (front wall 921, side wall 922, side wall 923) can be made difficult to see, and the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine 10 can be maintained.

In the sixth embodiment, the distance D1 between the decorative device 18a (mounting portion 442) and the front wall 921 is arranged so as to be shorter than the diameter D of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down from the mounting portion 442 (decorative device 18a) does not fit in the interval D1, and the game ball can be reliably flowed down to the wall portion 920.

In the sixth embodiment, the bottom surface 924 is inclined toward the rear of the front frame (glass frame 15). As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the bottom surface 924 can be quickly discharged toward the rear (upper tank 448) of the front frame (glass frame 15).

In the sixth embodiment, the bottom surface 924 is inclined in a direction away from the hinge 16a that rotatably supports the opening / closing frame including the front frame (glass frame 15). As a result, the upper tank 448 (FIG. 116) for storing the game ball is in the left-right direction with respect to the wall portion 920, and the hinge 16a
When the wall portion 920 (front wall 921, side wall 922, side wall 92) is unevenly distributed in the direction away from the wall portion 920.
3. The game ball that has flowed down to the bottom surface 924) can be reliably supplied to the upper tank 448 (FIG. 116).

In the sixth embodiment, the front wall 921 and the side walls 922, 923 are the front frame (glass frame 15).
It is arranged so as to be lower than the upper surface of the hinge 16a that rotatably supports the opening / closing frame including. As a result, the hinge 16 is from the side surface on which the hinge 16a of the gaming machine 10 is arranged.
Even when the gaming machine 10 is viewed from the height position of a, the wall portion 920 (front wall 921, side wall 922, side wall 923)
) Can be made difficult to see, and the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine 10 is not spoiled.

In the sixth embodiment, of the pair of side walls 922 and 923, one side wall 922 is arranged so as to be closer to the hinge 16a than the other side wall 923 and higher than the other side wall 923. ing. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that jump out of the wall portion 920 from the side wall 922 arranged higher than the side wall 923. On the contrary, since the side wall 923 is arranged lower than the side wall 922, the number of game balls protruding from the side wall 923 to the outside of the wall portion 920 is larger than that of the game balls protruding from the side wall 922 to the outside of the wall portion 920. However, the upper tank 448 (FIG. 116) is in the left-right direction with respect to the wall portion 920, and the hinge 16a
When it is unevenly distributed in the direction away from the side wall 923, the overflow of the game ball on the bottom surface 924 is reduced by the amount of the game ball protruding from the side wall 923 to the outside of the wall portion 920, and the side wall 923.
Since the game ball that jumped out of the ball flows down to the upper tank 448, the upper tank 448 of the game ball (
The flow to FIG. 116) can be reliably performed.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the warning display means (warning display unit 929) capable of displaying a predetermined warning display on the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the game (variable display game) when the predetermined condition is satisfied. , Display device 41) and shielding means (wall portion 920, decorative device 18a, movable accessory) that makes it difficult to see the display contents of the alert display means (attention display unit 929, display device 41) from the front of the game machine 10. And prepare. As a result, by appropriately concealing the warning display that is unnecessary for the player or the warning display that is unnecessary for the worker, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the interest of the player and a decrease in the work efficiency of the worker.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the warning display means (display on the display device 41) capable of displaying a predetermined warning display on the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the game (variable display game) when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Characters that represent alerts) and position-specific means that can identify the position of alert display means (images that surround (shield) the characters that represent alerts (rectangle, ellipse, etc.))
And, the position specifying means makes it difficult to visually recognize the warning display means from the front of the gaming machine 10. As a result, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the work efficiency of the worker by appropriately concealing the warning display that is unnecessary for the worker. It should be noted that the position specifying means (the image (rectangle, ellipse, etc.) that surrounds (shields) the character representing the alert) is displayed when the hole is set, and is not displayed during the game.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and content equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Pachinko machine 12 Front frame (game frame)
25 Direction button 30 Game board 32 Game area 36 1st start winning opening (1st start winning area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device 38 1st special variable winning device 39 2nd special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 44 Board effect device 46 Board decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
93 Setting key switch 100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Production control device (sub-board)
400 Power supply 806 Large winning opening unit 808 General winning opening unit 812 RUSH lamp 815 Seal 817 Related information 819a Location information 819b Location information 820a Character lamp 822 Virtual line 841 Sub-board box 841
841a Internal space 842 Box lower member 843 Box upper member 858 Fastening screw 859 Cover member 906a Movable member 920 Wall part 929 Attention display part

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can execute a game when certain conditions are met,
It has a visible area that makes the game area visible, a tank that stores the game ball is located at the rear, and an opening / closing part that can be opened and closed freely.
Provided in an upper portion of the opening portion, projecting upward, and decoration device upper surface having an inclined surface inclined rearwardly toward the tank,
Equipped with a warning display means that can display a predetermined warning display,
The alert display means is arranged inside a wall portion that surrounds a part of the alert display means on the upper surface of the opening / closing portion.
The wall portion is located behind the decorative device below a virtual extension surface of the inclined surface, and the decorative device makes it difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine.

Images